Home

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

1. 02000 156 Overview Of Form Processing scssssccsessseeeeeesseeseeeseenseeees 158 The Structure of Form Data cccsssssecesssseesseeseeeesseeeseeeeeneees 158 Creating a New FOrim sccsccccssssssseessseesseeeeseeesseesseneesseeessonenes 159 Creating a Form s Conte nt cccccccsssssseeeeessesseeeseeeesseeesseeeass 166 Form Ni ROW essor sie eae enacs eae 172 FO BIE a oe e S R E N E E 173 Implementing a Form on a Web Page ssscccseeeeeeeeseeeees 194 Assigning a Task to a FOr qu ceccccceeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeees 195 Viewing Form OOOO assnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 197 Viewing Form INfOrmatiOn cccccccceeseeseeeeseseeeseeseseeeeeseeeneens 204 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 ili Editing a FOM Peer creer ener n enter ects seen anne cn nestle snes Temsne eens ens 210 peilung a FOr Sennen neo ee eee eee enon nee ae 212 View Form Toolbar sescaesvecires csccunduprecesacindvacadaeeonmaisvanestunaevendons 212 Creating Polls and Surveys cccsssseeesesseeceseseeeseenseeseeees 214 Using the Document Management System 222 Supported Types Of ASSeUS cccssceceeseeeeeseeseeneeseaneeseenees 223 S re eae te or a em E EAEE ene et a ere enn ee st eraser 224 Software Requirements cccssseccssseeceeseecenseecenseeseeneesennees 224 Working with Microsoft Office Documents c0esse000 2
2. cccccsssseeessssseeeeesseeeseenseeseeeseeenes 69 Adding a Content Summary cccsseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeees 73 Automatic Creation Of a SUMMALY eceseeseeeseeeneeeeeeenees 74 Creating a Summary for New Content ccccsesseeeeenseeeeennees 74 Creating a Summary for Existing Content cccesseees 75 Editing a Summary secescipesetretancecinsceccnssecueuescecesdsuececsavantancesacenses 76 Adding or Editing Metadata ccssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Entering Custom Metadata cccccseesessseseeseeseeseeseeneeseenees 78 Entering Title and KeywordS cccccsssseeeeseeseensenenseeseesnensenees 85 Approving Declining Content ccssecesseeseseeeeseseees 87 Approve Decline One Content Item sceesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 Approve Decline Several Content ItemS ecesseeeeees 90 Example of an Approval Chainn ssccsssssessesseeceeseeeessensenees 91 Comparing Versions of Content ccssseeeseeeeeeeeees 98 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 ii The View Content Difference Screen 0 csceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenenes 98 The View Content Difference Feature ccseccsssseeeseeenees 100 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content s000000 108 Accessing Content HIStory cccccssseeecsssseseeesseeeseeeseenseeees 108 The Content History WindOW ccsssssecees
3. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 22 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame View Content icin Content Block LF ta U U amp fo a M e Ra View English U S select Content ae Metadata Comment E Category Ektron pep Server Controls Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams Faced with the challenge of reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to roll out new Internet and intranet sites and rich Web applications developers need every advantage tilted in their favor to help their organizational Web strategies succeed Ektron CMS400 NET delivers that advantage It now offers eight visual drag and drop template development components that enable developers to assemble Web sites up to four times faster than working in J2EE To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 23 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar
4. Guillain Barre Ghee yan Bah ray Syndrome also called acute inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy and Landrys ascer paralysis 15 an inflammatory disorder of the peripheral nerves those outside the brain and spinal cord Itis characterized by Comments 3 rapid onset of weakness and often paralysis of the legs arms breathing muscles and face GBS is the most common cause of rapidly acquired paralysis in the United States today affecting to two people in every 100 000 Last Edited by Generated User on 6 2 2006 2 13 51 PM Status A ES World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 13 2006 5 09 46 Status 4 Mo comments E Welcome to ektron Medical The View Posts in Blog screen shows the following information about each blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 344 Blogs View Posts in Blog Life Story i i i PAT pT 7 sol Re eee eee Ly e i E oe ga I VIEW Last Edited by Joho Editjon 2 14 2006 10 37 57 4 Y Comments 1 See Also Blog Posts on page 341 Blogs on page 312 SS eee The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of commenis for a post When this link is clicked the View Comments for Post screen appears If a red flag appears next to the comments icon they are awaiting app
5. Note This field applies to content only It has no effect on other types of menu items such as images Also this field only affects content that dynamically references a content block such as cMS400Min therapies aspx id 84 If the menu option is a template that includes content for example cMS400Min news aspx the template you identify here is ignored If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content on this menu uses this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here content on this menu uses the template specified in its Quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content item on this menu and instead use the template specified in its Quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 453 Go to the View Menus option Click More Info Click the menu item you want to change ve a At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Link OuickLink Menu Template Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to this version of Ektron CMS400 NET those menu items are assigned as Quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Add a more detailed descr
6. Blank whitespace characters are ignored One or more consecutive whitespace characters are treated as a single separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For example if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Determines whether comparison ignores changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only After updating setup information click OK to save changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 105 Comparing Versions of Content Content Area The content area displays the content comparison 4 CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC international EC a is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RC ri EC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehucles sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO commumty We wil improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC International member The following table describes the change indicators Plain black text Trinitys new pipe and Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Our dedication tothe Added View Tabs When viewing content in the View Content Difference feature there are thre
7. Click the Subjects tab Change the information in the text box for the subject you want to edit Click Save fA NOTE You can edit several subjects before clicking Save Removing Blog Subjects There are two ways to remove blog subjects Remove the last link that was added Remove any link in the list Each task is explained below Removing the Last Blog Subject Follow these steps to remove the last blog subject on the page NOTE To remove a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site right click the blog click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button Click the Subjects tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 324 Blogs 5 Click Remove Last Subject Add a Blog to folder Blog I g 3 Baa a a Ra a a kaakaa kia a i E i ow a fre ols a a lr os 2s es i Subjects Add New Subject 6 A dialog box appears 7 Click OK to remove the last subject NOTE You can continue to remove subjects at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Subject link 8 Click Save fA Removing a Blog Subject NOTE To remove a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Fol
8. aoe oe Ne Table Wizard E Table Design k Fa Table Properties Dimensions E Width 610px px Lavout Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 544 Working with Tables center If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is left justified so this text appears to the right of the table To specify table alignment follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Specify table alignment at the Alignment field ae w Ye Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 545 Working with Tables Table Wizard ae ee E4 Table Pre Dimensions Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table e Deleting a Table s Background Color on page 548 e Specifying a Table s Background Image on page 549 Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to give it more visual appeal Here is an example To assign a background color to your table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor within the table 2 Right click the mouse
9. 2 Click the Summary tab Edit Content in Folder About Us Title About Us English U S Content Summary Comment Templates Cat BBE S2BBHAS Oo Ve ARAMEA Bi Apply Style Normal Ezra e The Edit Summary window opens Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor Make the necessary changes When done click the appropriate button Op pi oe p The View Content page reappears NOTE When you edit an existing content summary it goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content back in From that point you must submit it or publish it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 76 Adding or Editing Metadata Adding or Editing Metadata You can add several kinds of metadata to Ektron CMS400 NET content e Metadata that can be found by your Web site search It helps site visitors find content on your Web site This kind of metadata can also be found using the Workarea s Search screen For more information see Entering Custom Metadata on page 78 e Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below E www ektron 1 txt Notepad File Edit Format wiew Help lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt r HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset 1s0 8859 1L kmeta fname robots content index f
10. Background Color ff Unassigned Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 725 Field s Size Rows Columns Layout Width Layout Horizontal Alignment Background Color Background Image Borders Use Default Color Border Color Cell Padding Cell Spacing Lets you specify The number of rows and columns in the table Table width The table s alignment across the Web page The background color of the table A background image for the table Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders If you do not use the default the color of the table border The size of the table border The space in pixels between the cell text and a cell s border The space in pixels between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 730 Specifying Table Width on page 732 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 756 Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 39 Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 41 Assigning Border Color on page 742 Assigning Border Size on page 44 Assigning Cell Padding on page 7
11. Caune These settings will be used whenever you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button E or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears Edit the HTML code as desired Click OK Ce Se YS Inserting Source If you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Z775 Working with HTML 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from another application The Clean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properly and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a browser Also the a
12. Content Reports in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Community Messaging see Messaging on page 390 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 19 The Workarea and Smart Desktop e The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS400 NET Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content on page 28 Forms folder see Working with HTML Forms on page 156 Library Folder on page 131 Modules see Membership Users and Groups and Business Rules sections of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page 477 and Accessing Online Help on page 483 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its subfolders then click a subfolder to see its content The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major features from the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 20 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map Smart Desktop 6 Tasks 45 Reports ss content repo
13. Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original application In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application in which the information resides Select the information to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEditPro XML Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information oR OD Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 658 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find And Replace FiodWhet ff Replace With o P Match whole word only Replace E este aaa Replace All Direction Up Down Cancel You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explained below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears
14. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 340 Blogs Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Subscribe Unsubscribe Blog Ektron Medical Blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Notification All Comments Type Unsubscribe Select the Notification Type 4 5 Check the Unsubscribe check box 6 Click Update Subscription 7 A message states that you are unsubscribed to the blog post Blog Posts For a definition of blog posts see Blogs on page 312 From your Web site only published blog posts are visible But from the Workarea you can see all blog posts regardless of status Using the Workarea you can also create edit delete and archive blog posts the same way you work with content This section contains the following subtopics e Blog Posts on the Site on page 342 e Blog Posts in the Workarea on page 344 e Adding a Blog Post on page 346 e Editing a Blog Post on page 348 e Deleting a Blog Post on page 349 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 341 Blogs Blog Posts on the Site You can view published blog posts on the Web site The following is an example of one A blog post has a Title Content Comments Link Post Time Date and Editor Information Below is a breakdown of a blog post ona site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 342 Blogs Se ee Date and Time l i aa TS z 0 M Mi ENT j i LIK l Titre a
15. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 661 Finding and Replacing Text stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find And Replace Find What iit Find Next Replace With P Match whole word only Replace Al Direction Up Down Cancel Replace PEER Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Find And Replace ww Eoo oo o Replace With Match whole word only Bee F Match case Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 662 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains e Disabling Script Blocking on page 663 e Checking Spelling as You Type on page 663 e Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 664 e Spell Checking Selected Text on page 665 e Setting Spell Check Options on page 666 Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable scr
16. Layout width i uis C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Horizontal Alignment center Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 738 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make it more pleasing to the eye Here is an example NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button ES to change the text color To assign a background color to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Wo Unassigned Background Color When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 739 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s
17. Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 730 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 746 e Inserting a Cell on page 747 e Deleting a Cell on page 748 e Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 749 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 750 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 752 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 754 e Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 756 e Splitting a Cell on page 759 e Merging Two Cells on page 760 e Word Wrap on page 761 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 762 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 732 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 746 Working with Table Cells When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell wh
18. Sign on to the application that contains the information Select the text to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEdit400 Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate them Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft Word retrieves the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate the values oR OD Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 497 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Find and Replace button 44 When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find amp Replace Find Bove Find OoOo Find Next Search Entire text D selection only Match whole words only You can use this dialog to simply find text or to find text then replace it with other text Each option is explained below Tip You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 499 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also e Finding Text on page 499 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 499 e Additional Options
19. Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell span more than one row or column follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that will span rows or columns Right click the mouse Click Merge Cells Horizontally or Merge Cells Vertically from the menu e Merge Cells Horizontally merges the cell in which the cursor resides with the cell to its right e Merge Cells Vertically merges the cell in which the cursor resides with the cell below NOTE You can also merge cells on the Table Design tab of the Table Wizard Table Wizard X HA Table Design MAENE TAR d a Cell TARTE d A A Columns R o wW S p n Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 563 Working with Table Cells Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns eWebEdit400 does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column oP Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically You have nine choices for specifying the horizontal and vertical alignment of a cell illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 564 Working with Table Cells To
20. amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 193 Working with HTML Forms SS Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Wind
21. button 3 The calendar appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 269 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Bal S 4 Bal E 5 EJA 6 Ed E 7 ALM Trade ALIM Trade SIT Trade show in show in show in Miani Paro Miani yl E 11 Ed E 12 E E 13 Fal S 14 Ed El Company meeting al E 18 E E 19 Fa S 20 Ed S 21 E E lk 1 See Also Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 271 4 lf you want to view events of a certain type only click the Select Event Type to View drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Undersianding Event Types on page 277 show All Company Holiday Trade Show Company Event The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of that type only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 270 Working with Calendars From the View Calendar screen you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen Click on More Information Add Calendar Event Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 View Calendar Events Viewing a Calendar Event on page 280 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen Event title within calendar sample below East Ed RC International Announces the RC Jump to calendar event s Web page if available See Also Working with Calendars on page 261 T
22. emailing Tasks You can email the contents of any Task screen emailing tasks works the same as emailing reports See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Common Report Topics gt emailing Reports Editing a lask You can change task information such as e Title e Assigned to e Language e Content e Priority e Task Category Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 305 Managing Tasks e Task Type e Status State e Due Date e Start Date e Description To edit a task perform the following steps 1 Access the View Task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder on page 300 NOTE You cannot edit a task after viewing it from the Content folder 2 Click the Edit button L 3 The Edit Task screen appears 4 Edit the task 5 Click the Update button i to save the changes Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from n progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 306 Managing Tasks Sn kelLiLkikLikbLkeliLiLkeikbiLkeiLikL kel L
23. on page 618 Editing a Form on page 618 Deleting a Form on page 618 View Form Toolbar on page 618 Creating Polls and Surveys on page 618 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 575 Working with HTML Forms Overview of Form Processing Step For more information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 576 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 615 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved toa database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 618 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data A form has the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc e Form fields text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a form follows five simple steps After completing the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need To make the task easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 211 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms create
24. Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it 3 Press lt Delete gt Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 537 Working with Tables NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 1 3 Drag the cursor over rows and column to indicate the size of the table 4 Click the mouse Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Table Design tab of the Table Properties box to change the number of rows or columns in a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 538 Working with Tables Table Wizard A DA Table Design E Table Properties Y so Cell Properties kd Accessibility Columns Column Span Sa0mson l 1 som I Alternatively place the cursor within the table then add or remove columns relative to that cell See Adding or Removing Rows and Co
25. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 546 Working with Tables 3 Select Set Table Properties 4 Click the Table Properties tab 5 Click the Background dropdown list Table Wizard E Table Design Y Fa Table Pre Dimensions Width px o Height BKM Add Hex Color J 6 A selection of colors appears Click a color for the table s background From the dropdown you can add custom colors by selecting a color patch or entering a color s hex value Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 547 Working with Tables Basic colors EE HEREN Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Background dropdown list on the Table Properties tab of the Table Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 548 Working with Tables Peano Tabh Dimensions Then click the top left choice circled above Specifying a Table s Background Image You can specify a background image for your table Here is an example Note that when you apply a background image to a t
26. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 695 Choose Font Color Ei ES Basic colors al See nel ee DE f imi i ie oe ff ioe ff I m Custom colors iLL aS a a HEBER Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Standard Toolbar Button Description Dialog Box A ina Editing Images Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 696 Editing Images aa O Arial Black Bald O Arial Marrow F Arial Unicode MS F Batang O Berling Antiqua O Book Antiqua Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button Description Changes an image s color depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 718 Dialog Box 697 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Editing Images w Color Depth Contrast Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark areas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box w Contrast Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 698 Copy Editing Images Standard Toolbar Button Description Create New Copies a selected area of an image After y
27. For more information see http msdn microsoft com library default asp url workshop author dhtml reference properties abbr asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 792 Section 508 Compliance SS Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see hittp msdn microsoft com workshop author dhtml reference properties axis asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 793 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ektron CMS400 NET content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing they do not appear when the content is published on your Web site 2 Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0758 fowektron comb Ektron CMS Comments Microsoft Internet Explorer uropear Comments 312 pt B Bom ye edia Co Torn Please review the text to verify accuracy g Bill Partners Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 794 Inserting Comments within Content Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Co
28. Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 585 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Po Website Email Phone State Province Country Comments Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown list of choices You can learn how to create such a form by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form e The Form Toolbar Options on page 587 e Form Validation on page 590 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 586 Working with HTML Forms The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating standard content See Adding HTML Content on page 74 The big difference is a form toolbar illustrated below which lets you insert form elements M abl c fy 4 4 y When using the form toolbar place the cursor where you want field Then click the appropriate toolbar button Adding a Field to the Screen The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange a form that collects exactly the information you want To create the form insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter information Then add a button that enables the user to submit data If you chose a sample form at the beginning
29. Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www example com To link to content on your Web site click the library button i This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 279 Working with Calendars Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it Launch Link in New Browser If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 277 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow gt to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event
30. Normal HEH J U A Loe x 5 Add a title and content See Adding HTML Content on page 48 for an explanation of the buttons and tabs in this window Click the Publish button ES to publish the content The page refreshes and the HTML content appears in the file list Documents a aaa a ie eee eil ae aLi ae balaa pein Sa RAD a nhaM aa oe RSA RoE SERENE ERS Workspace Documents 3 No subcategory exists gj My Test Content Here is another example of test content sample d this is a sample content block under the documents folde W Server Control Review d Below is a list of server controls waiting for review Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 386 My Workspace Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents You can change the folder where assets and HI ML content are stored in My Workspace gt gt Documents by moving the content from one folder to another In addition to moving files you can copy files to another folder To accomplish either of these actions follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select the folder from which to move or copy the content 3 Click the triangle to the right of the content title circled below Documents Workspace Documents 3 2 No subcategory exists 2 My Test Content Here is another example of test con
31. Then click the underline button W to underline the word Create a Hyperlink e ww NN Type You can also easily add hyperlinks Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 629 Creating a Simple Web Page Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Text content Target Frame 0 Cancel i Quick Link select link Mi 5 In the Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notice that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type You can begin a line with bullets 2 3 Click the bullet button i 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet You can begn a line with bullets Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 630 Creating a Simple Web Page Changing the Size of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type Finally you can change the font to a large size Select the words large size Click
32. To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the left or upper cell 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Merge Cells Horizontally or Merge Cells Vertically Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of cells It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result lf Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 567 Working with Table Cells By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on Turning Word Wrap On and Off To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties The Cell Properties dialog box appears O e D m a To turn off Word Wrap click the No Wrapping checkbox Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment ni z Background z Dimensions Additional Height Id widths Background Image 6 Click Update Setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1the page pixel Cell
33. e inserting text This section explains WebIlmageFX NOTE WeblImageFxX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WeblmageFX Choosing the Image If you double click an image it appears within WeblmageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 687 Editing Images Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Image Editor Insert Custom Tag WeblmageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons File Edt View Image Annotations jde aelmex olo QaQgaQl ia _ Pae e e omT lf the Image Edit button A appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WebImageF x If no image is selected when you press the button or click the menu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 688 Editing Images Once the image is in WeblmageFX you can use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button Als Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button eel Wh
34. 1 of 8 O Business Practices ektron Medical s commitment to operating with integrity requires more than just adequate financial management workplace relations and public service It requires a framework for leaders to guide their organization in an ethical way Learn about how ektron Medical integrates integrity into its culture C Ektron Offers a Visual Development Environment for Rapid CMS Integration and Deployment Ektron leverages strong capabilities of Visual Studio NET to give developers a truly visual environment for integrating CMS components into Web templates O Ektron Supports Rapid and Efficient Globalization Strategies on the Web Powerful new tools in Ektrons CMS300 and CMS400 NET enable content managers to better handle end to end site translation and localization processes 5 To indicate that a wiki to new content has been applied the text color changes to blue and bold and small dots appear under the wiki text t Summary Metadata Schedule Comment web Alerts Templates Category tS BRA Soo aD ACOHTORS FR BIUAA x s wo eme GRC Hole jlobal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and ularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for tre ations Itis a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of the E In employees live and work ikeLink Normal We yi uFi yi I I i Il Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Vers
35. 3 The message is deleted and you are returned to the Inbox or Sent Messages Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 396 My Workspace Message Board The Message Board allows site visitors to leave a short message or comment on the site Message Board in My Workspace The Message Board located in My Workspace allows a user to manage the comments on their board From this area a user can e view comments see Viewing Your Message Board Comments on page 398 See Viewing Your Message Board Comments on page 398 e add comments see Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 399 See Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 399 e delete comments see Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 399 Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 399 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 397 My Workspace en ee tars why moe oe wal J a f iie rd Pred aE m asa aan na oa a Bi aa m E na tte iad aes il DM e a a r j ge RS Ree ee en eae ea ei et ree H a Documents He Community Groups s5 Favorites 6 Colleagues 5 Journal Message Board 0 Messaging 44 Photos a Ps i Ti i a a a ie a i i i 5 we a Ba A Bn me ne Bs Se A i 1 x Message Board Fitri r N A A a NNA Here is the first message for 10 10 2007 my Message Board Delete 10 48 10 AM Add Comment HPI character limit Page l
36. 5 Click the Save button H Viewing a Calendar Event Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 269 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 280 Working with Calendars April May 2004 Thursday weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM EE JAA weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM JAA 1AA weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM 3 Click the View Events button 4 The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that date If an event is part of a series of recurring events the following icon appears next to it 3 From this screen you can perform the following functions Add anew event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 View edit and delete an existing event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 281 Working with Calendars Editing Calendar Events The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned See Also Adding a Cale
37. 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 660 e Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 661 e Whole Word Match on page 662 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 660 Finding and Replacing Text Find And Replace Find hat firitial Find Next Replace With P Match whole word only P Match case Direction C Up f Down oo Replace Replace All Cancel PEER To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc lf you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only
38. A Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 Sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 713 Editing Images w Sharpen OFX men Text Standard Toolbar Button T Description Places text on an image You can also change the text s size font color and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps Click the Text button T Move the cursor to where you want to place the text 3 Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 714 Editing Images Attributes Font Attributes Color Attributes Text Attributes Font Style OB atang Bold fonds Mincha SIZE mP ingLill fi 2 fos iS un Arnal Old Sample AaBbYyZz M Underline T Strikeout Cancel The following table lists functions you can perfo
39. Advanced Search Tab on page 119 The Search Published Tab The Search Published tab within the Workarea finds content that satisfies these criteria e status is published e active archived content is ignored however the Advanced Search finds archived content See The Advanced Search Tab on page 119 e you have read only or greater permission for the contents folder e content is public However private content is available to those with permission to view it such as membership users after logging in See Also Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual e matches selected language if site is multi lingual See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with Multi Language Content e the content s Content Searchable check box is checked e is nota non image file added to the library Images are searchable while other files added to the library are not So to make files searchable add them as assets not library files e content resides in the folder you selected before launching the search or one of its subfolders To search the entire Web site begin the search at the root folder e satisfies text and or query entered in the search box no value returns nothing The text inserted in the search field can appear in the content summary or metadata See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Adminis
40. After you select the content Properties information such as Summary Metadata you have the following options Schedule and Taxonomy After viewing you can on page 43 also edit that information if you have permission After you complete the edit screen you proceed to the View Content screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view its history Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 39 Adding a Subfolder Adding a Subfolder Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Adding Subfolders Deleting a Folder Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Deleting Subfolders Viewing Content You can view all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing content allows you to see the content metadata summaries and other information Viewing Content from a Web Page To view content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in Browse to the content you want to view Right click the mouse oe 1 2 Click Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 40 Viewing Content 5 Continue reading from The View Content screen appears on
41. Border Size 5 When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 743 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 744 Manipulating Your Table s Format Border Size If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button H Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 745 Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 719 and
42. Click Add The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 7 Use the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 456 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu ltem on page 458 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 458 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 459 Adding Content as a Menu Item To add content as a menu item follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 456 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 453 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 454 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 455 NOTE You can only add content that resides in the menu s content folder or its subfolders 2 Click the radio button next to Content Block 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu 5 By default all content is available To limit your selection to a type of content for example Word documents click the content types dropdown and select a type Add New Item About All
43. Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 411 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 400 My Workspace pa 1 a j r m n ji eas ss p rs _ pees fee F ar TA o Se TTET F E gi AAE ad ry D er T ar T oe A ere TUARAN not AEEA fected PET TRAAN wt gt ree a EE ii a ll ESO ey LACDODET LU 2 H Community Groups ae Favorites S45 Colleagues Collea ae Journal gt Message Board ae Messaging He Photos 1 x My Friends tT A a Im 3 G n LI Colle Avatar y First Name Last Name Edit Managing Existing Colleagues Ektron CMS400 NET User To manage existing colleagues in the Workarea click My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues From the Colleagues link users can e view alist of colleagues see Viewing the Existing Colleagues List on page 402 Manual Version 7 5 401 My Workspace e invite non site user to join to the site and become a colleague see Inviting Non Site Users to Become Colleagues and Join the Site on page 402 e search for users see Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members on page 403 e send a colleague request see Send a Colleague Request on page 408 e remove colleagues see Removing Colleagues on page 409 e choose whether a colleague is a Selected Colleague see Selected Colleagues on page 410 Viewing the Existing Colleagues List The Colleagues list provides a quick and easy way to view your colleague
44. Content Awaiting Approval 0 BE Reports a L Content Currently Checked Out 7 im Messaging x Tasks 2 Tasks Content Reports amp aS ts Messaging Form Submission Tasks 1 f Content To Expire 0 42 Forum Topics and Posts 0 ee be Content Re Popular reports and tasks this section also displays content block information e The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content you need to approve before it proceeds to the next approver or is published if you are the final approver See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Approvals Reports Content currently checked out all content in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 18 The Workarea and Smart Desktop A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 286 Any form submission tasks assigned to you See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 195 The Content to Expire Report See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Forum Post A list of Forum Posts that are awaiting approval Posts
45. Folders Synchronize 4 dell i 7 i E Documents and Sett 0 Administrator 4 The Map Network Drive screen appears Click Sign Up for Online Storage or Connect to a Network Server A wizard screen appears Click Next 6 Another wizard screen appears Click Choose another network location Click Next 7 A third wizard screen appears Enter the path to your Ektron CMS400 NET site followed by the ekdavroot folder For example http server23 CMS400 ekdavroot Click Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 240 Using the Document Management System Add Network Place Wizard What is the address of this network place Type the address of the Web site FTP site or network location that this shortcut will open Intemet or network address View some examples z Back Next gt WARNING If your computer runs Microsoft Vista and you see this error message The folder you entered does not appear to be valid Please choose another refer to this Ektron KB article http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 151 76 8 A login screen appears see below Enter your Ektron CMS400 NET username and password Click OK Connect to icestorm server icestorm ip t EktronCMS4005erver requires a User name f admin vw Remember my password 9 Another wizard screen appears Name the folder You will use this name to identify the folder when you want to drag and drop assets to it Click Next
46. For example if you click More than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 187 Working with HTML Forms SS Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically ee a art music sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally el le at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box The box lengthens to display all entries Interests i MUSIC sports Item Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by
47. Managing Tasks aa es Lis is i Task Title Assigned To Language Content Priority Task Category Docs Task Type State NotStated pue pate OOO Description 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 297 Managing Tasks Edit Task Type Task Type Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability Not Available From this screen you can edit the following e Task Type e Task Type Description e Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 296 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Save lal 7 The Task Type information is changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 298 Managing Tasks Creating a Task from the Web Site IMPORTANT To create a task from a Web page follow these steps 1 Browse to the content for which you want to assign a task 2 Right click the mouse to display a menu 3 Click the Add Task button 4 The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator
48. Place the cursor in that cell 2 Right click the mouse 3 Select Set Cell Properties from the menu 4 Make the changes on the Cell Properties dialog 5 Click Update Modifying Several Cells If you want to make any of the modifications described in this section to several cells follow these steps NOTE Most procedures in this section tell you to select Cell Properties from the right click menu To perform an action on several cells select Set Table Properties from the right click menu then click the Cell Properties tab Place the cursor anywhere in the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties from the menu Click the Cell Properties tab Select the cells that you want to change Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting nA ee oe i As you select a cell its color changes from light to dark gray Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 557 Working with Table Cells Table Wizard E Table Design F E Table Properties ff Cell Properties Content Alignment Background nimen lt ions Additional 6 Make changes to fields on the lower part of the Cell Properties tab The fields are described later in this section 7 Click OK Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 7382 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the height and width of an individual cell When you set a cell wi
49. Procedures for doing this are explained in Importing Office Documents on page 230 See Also Warnings About Saving in html Format on page 250 1 Within the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea open the Content area 2 Open the folder that contains the Office document you want to save as html Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 251 Using the Document Management System 3 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the document you want to save 4 Click Edit in Microsoft Office The document opens within Office From Office s File menu select Save as Web Page In the Save as Type field select Web page Filtered htm html See Also Saving an Office Document as a Web Page on page 250 You may be warned about formatting features not supported in HTML Press Continue 9 Adialog prompts you to enter your Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password 10 Ektron CMS400 NET s folders appear in a Save as window The folder that contains the Word document is the default folder Select that or any other Ektron CMS400 NET folder and click Save 11 The Office document is saved as an html file into Ektron CMS400 NET 12 Close the document and exit from Office Saving Office Document as html from Your Computer Open the Office Document Click File gt Save as htm html 3 Click My Network Places and navigate to exdavroot folder on the server that hosts Ektron CMS400 NET
50. Section 508 Compliance lf your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this Edit VIEW As Faragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use 6 A new menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if you select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 786 Section 508 Compliance Cut Copy Faste Paste Text Replace Find Nest Print Undo Redo Check Spelling Check Spelling 4s fou Type Bookmark Hyperlink Remove Link HRA Picture Table Edit in Word 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 90 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 90 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 787 Section 508 Compliance Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 90 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 90 Horizontal Caption Accessibility dial
51. The message is sent Moving to the Next or Previous Message Users in the Workarea can navigate through their messages by located in the header Wace R e opens the next clicking the Next or Previous button of a message Clicking the Next button F newest message in the list Clicking the Previous link opens the next oldest message in the list Once you have reached the end of the list that option s link is unavailable For example when Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 395 My Workspace a user reaches the newest message in the list the Next link is greyed out 45 4 and cannot be clicked Print a Message in the Workarea To print a message follow these steps 1 oo gt oS 7 Delete a Message In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message you want to print and click the subject Click the Print button C3 The Print dialog box appears Select a printer Click the Print button Deleting a message permanently deletes it from Ektron CMS400 NET To delete a message follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message you want to delete and click the subject or Find the message you want to delete and fill in the check box Click the Delete button
52. Title English U 5 Advance Settings These fields are not required Image Link fCMS400Example ti CS OW FG l Use image instead of a title URL Link CMS400Example E Hyperlink this menu item to this link Template Link ICMS400Example ti CS CO Override tems with quicklinks at this menu level with this template Description 6 Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen e ses The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 449 Working with Menus Plt Powerpton Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example Document Management Solution Web Authoring Tools Web Image Editor Store 4 Download Center To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 141 1 2 3 4 Click the image icon amp The library window opens Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use Click the Insert button to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicat
53. We do this by applying our expertise in me pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to mak difference in patients Ives With the latest medical science we are able to provide solt make a difference in people s lives Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 517 To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Open a browser and your Web site Go to the Web page that contains the bookmark link Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 524 Using Hyperlinks 4 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in the browser address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www example com single aspx id 35 Benefits2 5 Click the address bar The address is selected 6 Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEdit400 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 9 Click t
54. adding as menu item 458 copying files to 140 definition 131 file extensions 135 files deleting 148 editing 145 inserting into content 148 overwriting 145 viewing 143 folder properties 134 forms adding to content 153 viewing 153 hyperlinks adding 151 adding to content 151 editing 151 viewing 151 images adding to content 152 editing titles 152 extensions 135 overwriting 152 uploading 151 viewing 152 quicklinks adding to content 153 viewing 153 search results include images 127 140 text only 128 140 searching 136 license keys viewing 640 643 lifecycle content block 10 line WeblmageFX command 704 link check button 62 link search button 59 links broken finding 59 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 442 lock table or image in position 640 log in 11 log out 13 button floating toolbar 4 managed files 253 creating 255 editing 256 importing one 255 manuals online accessing 483 mapped network folder adding Office documents 238 drag and drop assets 241 editing Office document 245 language restrictions 239 removing 243 setting up 239 viewing files 242 marked for deletion content 804 menus accessing 446 add new content block via naviga tion link 461 adding new via content folder 448 via Menus module 453 adding to toolbar 646 appearance to content contributor 444 to site visitor 444 changing orientation 653 compared with collection and List Summary 442 creating 650 in any language 476 def
55. buttons appear on your toolbar TECHNICAL NOTE The following Ektron Knowledge Base article explains how a Webmaster adds a custom toolbar button to eWebEdit400 http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 16550 See Also Selecting Text on page 632 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 633 Table of Toolbar Buttons on page 490 e Form Elements Toolbar on page 496 Table of Toolbar Buttons eWebEdit400 s toolbar buttons are explained below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 490 Toolbar Buttons Button Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Ctrl A Select all content Select All Ctrl X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ctrl C Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 497 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Ctrl V Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Launch the Search and Replace dialog Finding and 3 Find and Replace box The dialog searches for and lets Replacing Text on you optionally replace text that you page 498 specify E Und Ctrl Z Reverse the most rec
56. cesseceseseneeenseseneees 477 nS PE 0 emereenemerreter nt tc rc ac teri tenes arentre renter cert entcen tr tert 483 Accessing Online Hel p cccsssseccssesseeessesseeeesseeeseesseeeeeesnees 483 Accessing Online Manuals ccccssscesssssseeeseeseeeseesseeseeennees 484 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors 486 Setting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users 487 Introduction to eWebEdit400 cc000 488 Bieie se Tals Ui C2 i Beeeer sere ren heeeree reer eer eeeen ee rn seer erst rnn Seer Peerrn ree 490 Copying from Other Applications ccsssseesssseesseneeseees 497 Finding and Replacing Text ccccssccesseeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneens 498 Checking Spelling cc ccccssssseecesseesenseeeesseseessseesesessoees 503 Working with Images 0ccceesceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeenseeneneeeaeeoanes 506 Inserting an Mage eee eee 506 Inserting an Image THUMDNAIL cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 508 Editing an Image s Properties ccsssscseesseeeeeseeeeeneeeenseeees 508 Deleting an Image from Content ccscceeeeeesseeeeeeneeeseeeneeeens 516 Using OG gt ceil ianseetitecn letestui resins 517 Creating a BOOKmall k s scsssssecccsesseeecensseesennseesseesseeeseass 517 Using FA SG sce oestrus evareneeucaenecseecenreeene deine 521 Creating a Hyper link ccccccssssececcessessceeneeeseesseeesenneesseoees 521 Testing a Hyper
57. content item you added to the page See illustration below MainLettZone Risk Factors For Heart Disease F x E edit What Are the Risk Factors for Heart Disease 4 To remove that item from that Web part zone click the delete button 5 A warning message appears Click OK Minimizing a Content Item There are two reasons for minimizing content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 373 Personalizing a Web Page You want to reduce the clutter while working on a page in personalization mode When you minimize only the title and menu appear in the zone MainRightZone What can I do to lower my risk 2 P D edi MainRighntZone What can I do to lower my risk 2 edit Making changes in your lifestyle is a proven method for reducing your risk of developing heart disease While there are no guarantees that a heart healthy lifestyle will keep heart disease away these changes will certainly Improve your health in other ways such as Improving your physical and emotional well being Also because some risk factors are related to others making changes in one area can benefit other areas Here are some ways you can reduce your risk of heart disease Quit smoking Smokers hawe more than twice the risk for heart attack as nonsmokers and are much more likely to die if they suffer a heart attack Smoking Is also the most preventable risk factor In this case you would restore content to full
58. creating content block 166 585 database 212 deleting 212 618 editing content block 211 introduction 210 618 summary 211 field validation options 178 596 implementing on Web page 194 615 inserting fields 169 calendar field 192 609 checkbox 173 591 choices 185 605 hidden text 175 password 180 select list 189 text 176 592 text area 182 introduction 156 574 mailto 212 processing overview 158 576 reports exporting 203 reports viewing 197 618 structure of data 158 576 toolbar 212 618 toolbar options 168 587 validation 172 590 viewing 204 618 properties 204 viewing 153 forum signature defining 481 freehand WeblmageFX command 702 G gray content border color meaning 798 green content border color meaning 798 H height work page customizing for user 481 help online accessing 483 hide borders toolbar button 643 history button view floating toolbar 5 content accessing from Web page 53 109 accessing via Workarea 54 109 viewing 63 window 109 horizontal flip WeblmageFX command 703 horizontal line inserting toolbar button 643 HTML cleaning 776 editing 775 inserting 775 saving Office document as 249 view as toolbar and menu option 637 viewing 774 hyperlink edit toolbar and menu option 636 remove toolbar and menu option 636 hyperlinks 768 adding as menu option 458 creating 768 definition 131 editing 772 entering manually 770 library adding 151 adding to content 151 edit
59. delete TA ahstrart O NOTE Check the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all 5 Click the Delete Content button CA 6 A confirmation message appears 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Link Search button locates all content that includes a Quicklink to the displayed content This feature is useful before deleting content because it informs you of every content item that Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 59 Workarea Toolbar Buttons will include a dead link if you delete a content item You should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want to check as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Link Search button a 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content 5 Remove or change the Quicklink Workarea Toolbar Buttons Many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the buttons functions C a _ Add Calendar Event Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea E Add Content In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to create E new content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 Add Conten
60. immune disol H o We do this by apply i is TS ee devices pharmaceu ain i D g t 1 ka mr F Optior make a meaningful E SS With the latest tech GH To webmaster ektron com science we are able j make a difference in Contact Us today Subj Medical Technology We do this by apply iE gi ee EEEREN pharmaceuticals and patients lives With The address and subject are retrieved from the mail link and inserted into the user s email screen as shown above To insert an email link follow these steps 1 Within eWebEdit400 content insert text that a site visitor will click to open the email link For example Contact us today If the text does not exist yet insert it 2 Select the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 527 Inserting email Links Click the Hyperlink Manager button The Hyperlink dialog appears 4 Click the E mail tab Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink Anchor E mail i Address Link Text today Subject 55 Class Note that the selected text appears in the Link Text field In the Address field enter the email address to which the message will be sent 7 Inthe Subject field enter default text for the email s Subject line if desired The user sending the mail can edit this text if desired 8 Press OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 528 Working with HTML eWebEdit400 creates pages for display on the internet or an
61. intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEdit400 However if you Know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code Viewing and Editing HTML To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Scroll to the bottom of the screen 2 Click the HTML button circled below lt gt Words 297 Charact 3 The HTML code appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 529 Working with HTML http localhost id 3 3atype update Langlype 1033 CM5400 Edit Content Microsoft l ektrori Les gt FE sale ee TEELE a oe ee ee Mahe a ne sase esau ren tnerE o A Ae eta a huh alate i i r a A af bl i A iik t ae Li k mi Le La Pe er lr ee PO Beant srs amet a rats use Nua NER kun Pea Neale tantra Loa thrash enone Satuceeunen a a Sneeueesageu a n Soeenueuceee a s SGsnanueeenn a Title English U S lt p gt lt img width 149 height 135 title Welcome Doctors alt Welcome Dc src http localhost CH5400Developer uploadedimages CM5400Demo p1 jpq border 0 gt At lt strong gt lt em gt lt a href http localhost CH5400Developer We content id amp Lang lype 1l0ss amp id s3 amp type update amp enableFrmbar htcreatetask bookmark gt ektron Medical lt a gt lt emo lt strong gt we focus on of the mos
62. language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you Know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code This section explains e Viewing and Editing HTML on page 774 e Inserting Source on page 775 e Cleaning Source Code on page 776 e Inserting Content from MS Office on page 777 Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HTML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button e or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu IEBIECL ll Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Di k re Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 774 Working with HTML 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appears To do this right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box appears in which you can enter formatting information about the HTML code View Preferences i i Cancel Font Size Font Name
63. on page 52 Click the Schedule tab Click the calendar icon next to the End Date field Start Date None Ea End Date None E8 4 A calendar pops up 5 Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 68 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 6 Click the Done button 7 The date and time appear in the End Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time What Happens After I Set an End Date You have three choices for what to do with content when it reaches its end date These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 69 If your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content item ready to replace it If not and a site visitor visits the page containing the content he sees the template without the content Appearance on Content Reports After content reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you track expired content See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report The report lists all content whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify setting Archive Options Use content s archive options to determine what ha
64. path type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt 6 Remove the comment characters in red above After you make this change you can click to view any image file in the ekdavroot folder Removing Mapped Network Drives Ektron CMS400 NET s DMS feature creates a mapped exdavroot network drive for many functions For example if you sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET and create a new folder a new mapped ekdavroot network drive is created Address ial My Network Places Ww G Folders x Name Doom avot on estom i My Documents E ekdavroot on icestorm 2 WY My Computer E ekdavroot on wS10080 lt a Local Disk C 1_5497345_1033_ 1_on ws10080 A DVD CD RW Dr Neal ekdavroot_ 1_142369280_1033_ 1 on localhost Se CMS400Demo d ekdavroot_1 226157056 1033 1_on icestorm S Source on Amt G ekdavroot_1_405496320_1033_ 1_ on icestorm E Cms400on Am E ekdavroot_1_465072896_1033_ 1_on icestorm E S Documentation G ekdavroot_1_623734912_1033_ 1_on localhost S Documentation ekdavroot_1_816112128_1033_ 1_on localhost gt control Panel 3 ekdavroot_1_882467840_1033_ 1_on wsi0080 a My Network Places EB ekdavroot_ 1_921133568_ 1033 on icestorm 2 Recyde Bin ES ekdavroot_ 1_991972608_1033_ 1_ on icestorm E ekdavroot_1 1_1004849152_1033_ 1_ on icestorm If you find that exdavroot folders clutter up your My Network Places folder you can delete them Deleting ekaavroot folder
65. select all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 302 Managing Tasks ic Displays these tasks Active All whose state is Active Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data On Hold All whose state is On Hold All whose state is Pending All whose state is Reopened Completed All whose state is Completed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Action you can perform from view screen Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type
66. to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 lf desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 767 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 764 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 771 Using Hyperlinks To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark s address looks like thi
67. your permissions for that folder The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 263 Working with Calendars View all calendars View information for one calendar view calendar jump to Add event View events linked web _ page ah Z Edit event Apply Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you perform calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 264 Working with Calendars 2 Click the Calendars folder m Modules a Collections HO Calendars 5 MemberShips 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET Calendar modules Title ID Description Path Re International listing of events for RE International news y Calendar events NOTE Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 265 Working with Calendars view Calendar Intranet Company Calendar Be View In English U 5 m Add In Select a Langu Title Intranet Company Calendar ID a Description Location Label Locat
68. 425 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 428 Click the Delete button 7 A confirmation message appears 5 Click OK to proceed Working with Collections in a Multi Language system NOTE In a multi language Ektron CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS400 NET displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS400 NET displays nothing Note the contrast between the collections and content if a collection is not available in the selected language nothing appears But if content is not available in the selected language content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 440 Working with Collections e a foreign edition of an existing collection or e anew collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user see Creating a
69. 426 Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps 1 Click the content folder that contains the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 425 Working with Collections 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language by clicking View gt Language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 440 3 Click View gt Collection 4 The View Collections screen appears Title ID Date Modified URL Link About Us 8 3 21 2006 Homepage Ads 4 10 4 2007 Homepage News 6 3 21 2006 The screen displays each collection created for the folder The following table explains each column Column Description The title assigned to the collection by the creator The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS400 NET This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Date When the collection was last edited Modified The default template used to display the content To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed to Viewing a Collection on page 428 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To view all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the Workarea click Modules gt Collections 2 The Collections Report screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 426 Worki
70. 48 e Editing HTML Content on page 52 e Deleting Content on page 57 e Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 60 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 29 Viewing a Folder Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 13 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea 3 All content in the root folder and the selected language appear in the right frame Subfolders appear in the upper left frame NOTE The View menu option lets you filter content by type For example you can set it to view only HTML content Therefore you may only see content of a selected type in the folder See Also View Menu on page 33 4 To work with any folder or its content click the folder When you do its content appears in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content for a particular language or all languages using the View gt Language menu option illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 30 Viewing a Folder lew Contents of Folder Root HTML FormSurvey pi DMS Document English U S n Deutsch German Espa ol Spanish I Frangais French E italiano Italian Nederlands Dutch Each folder lists the
71. 70 cc 1 15 min ffull t Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 113 Searching the Workarea Searching the Workarea You can search any folder to quickly locate content within Ektron CMS400 NET The following sections explains how to use the content search through the following subtopics e Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen on page 114 e The Search Published Tab on page 115 e The Advanced Search Tab on page 119 e Result Display Options on page 127 e Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen on page 128 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen To access the Search Content Folder screen follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder from which you want to begin the search NOTE To search your entire site start with the top level Root folder If you want to limit the search to a folder and its subfolders select it then choose search criteria 2 Click Action gt Search 3 The Search Content Folder screen appears Search Content Folder Search Published Advanced Search Basic Search Search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 114 Searching the Workarea The Workarea search has two tabs e the left tab Search Published is like the Site Search See The Search Published Tab on page 115 e the right tab Advanced Search lets you search by internal properties such as title status and comments See The
72. 735 tasks add button 61 assign button floating toolbar 4 assigning to content block 289 to HTML form 195 615 to user 289 comments adding 306 updating 308 creating via content block 299 via task folder 288 definition 286 deleting 309 due date 291 editing 305 priority assigning 289 redirecting to another user 289 relationship to content blocks 286 start date 291 state assigning 290 toolbar buttons 311 viewing 300 options 301 sorting options 304 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 452 text aligning 640 in columns 722 within a cell 756 direction menu 641 indenting 639 remove formatting 639 replacing 659 searching 659 selecting 632 WeblmageFX command 714 title bar displaying button text 482 toolbars buttons 60 633 collections 430 customizing 645 eWebEdit400 490 floating buttons 3 redisplay 650 restore 650 trademark character inserting 637 toolbar and menu option 637 translate toolbar and menu option 636 twain acquire WeblmageFX command 716 twain source WeblmageFX command 716 U underline toolbar option 643 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 vii undo toolbar option 635 WeblImageFX command 717 uppercase words spell checking 666 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 451 users email address editing 479 language editing 479 profile customizing work page height 481 customizing work page size 481 customizing work page width 481 landing page after login 482 see pr
73. Add Post 1 2 3 5 6 Fi 8 9 10 New Test Post 19 12 d 40 Wa 17 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears 4 Select a Notification Type 5 Check the Unsubscribe check box Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Update Subscription 6 Click Update Subscription A message states that you are now unsubscribed to the blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 339 Blogs Subscribe to a Blog Post To subscribe to a blog post follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog post on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon i for the blog post 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Subscribe Unsubscribe Post Ektron Medical Blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Notification All Comments Type Add Subscription 4 Select the Notification Type 5 Click Add Subscription A message states that you are now subscribed to the blog post You are forwarded to the blog posts page Unsubscribe to a Blog Post To unsubscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog post on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon i for the blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion General Information 12 Edit Permanent link The world s population will exceed 6 5 billion shortly a Census Bureau estimates that each second approxima are born and almost two die The bureau operates a VW 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears
74. Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 207 Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 207 Subject Text that appears in the email s subject field See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 209 Preamble Beginning text of the email See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 209 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 206 Working with HTML Forms SSS Send data in XML A green check means email data will be in a structured XML Format packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format For more information see Sending Data as XML in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Forms chapter Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form In the Mail Properties section of the Edit Form screen you can select email addresses submitted on the form to be inserted into these Mail Property fields e To e From e CC So instead of entering a static email address it can be dynamically retrieved from the user s form submission For example you want to retrieve the from field of an email from the information a user enters when completing the form To do this use the OR to addresses in field dropdown lists circled below These lists contain fields that dynamically retrieve data from the submitted form
75. Also View Pending Colleagues on page 410 and Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 411 To decline a colleague request follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to each colleague whose request you want to decline 3 Click the Decline New Colleagues button U 4 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are declining the colleague 5 Click OK The page refreshes and the users are removed from the Pending Colleagues list and requester s Sent Colleagues Request list Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea The Sent Colleague Requests list allows you to view a list of users to whom you ve sent colleague requests From this screen you can also delete requests that have yet to be accepted See Also Canceling a Colleague Request on page 412 lf a request goes stale and has not been acted upon the by the recipient you can resend the invite and add another optional message See Resending an Invitation on page 412 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 411 My Workspace To view sent colleague requests navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests Canceling a Colleague Request lf you want to cancel a colleague request follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests Place a check mark in t
76. Approving Declining Content Approval Chain Publish to Web site You can approve or decline all content submitted to you from the approval folder Edit Ektron CMS400 NET can automatically send email notification informing users that content workflow events have either taken place or are requested of them For example a content contributor receives an email that his content has been published to the Web site The list of automatic emails and directions for customizing their content are described in the Setup manual section Customizing Ektron CMS400 NET email The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of this content e Approve Decline One Content Item on page 89 e Approve Decline Several Content Items on page 90 e Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 88 Approving Declining Content Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below Mee eet Pies ale baie Click Reports 3 Click Approvals Click the content you want to approve or decline To select all displayed content click Select All at the top of the screen aot All Clear All Title W Contact Ektron WO Gonna Pane 5 The content appears You can view the content summary metadata etc A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content Ry Publish Accept changes to the content and publish it
77. Click Finish You have successfully configured writer to post blog entries Please confirm that vou would like to save these settinas Weblog Provider Custom Metaweblog APT Username admin Homepage Url Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 362 Personalizing a Web Page The Personalization feature lets a signed in typically membership user determine a page s layout and content The user can customize the page displaying whatever interests him in an arrangement of his own design Examples of content that might appear on a personalized page are frequently updated information such as news stories sports scores a calendar and stock market data A user gets his personalized view of the customized page after logging into any computer The customization is tied to the user not a specific computer IMPORTANT The Personalization feature requires Internet Explorer 5 or higher You cannot use other browsers The following topics explain personalization in more detail e Types of Content that Can Be Personalized on page 363 e Which Web Pages Can be Personalized on page 364 e Personalization and Permissions on page 364 e Layout of a Personalization Page on page 364 e Personalizing a Web Page on page 365 e The Personalization Menu on page 366 e Editing Sequence on page 367 Types of Content that Can Be Personalized e Content e Calendars e Collections e Blogs e HTML Forms Ektron CMS4
78. Click the Login button on the screen Login Click here to log in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 11 Logging In and Out 3 The Login dialog box appears Ektron CMS Login Microsoft taf m ed Enter your username and password User po Pwd 4 Enter your username and password If you are using one of Ektron s sample sites you can use any of three standard users that demonstrate Ektron s flexible user permissions model The table below lists the username and password needed to log in as each user type as well as the permissions assigned to each user Standard user jedit jedit Basic for example add edit content manage library files etc Membership user jimember jmember Read only permission to private content 5 Click the Login button 6 The Web page appears You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 12 Logging In and Out Home gt News Our Company Vision Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates o marketplace To be the preferred global standard for Web Content Management Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can preview the Web site as it would appear to visitors or view it in regular
79. Content Summary Comment Category Desktop Name Size My Computer W 20593ABD 8D1E 41B7 A24B FDEC 416 KB Sag My Network Places O 2 22111 Property searches not wor 3KB tag EEC Z 5410_user pdf 238 KB 5 1 online help C 8816665555154180380c5364633 111 KB M 1 e 88ea2e50344668acb958d97a3 25 KB cms400 51 help stationery O Bdp a E corvus O A Z accessibility pdf E i mi The left frame shows folders in your computer The right frame shows files in the selected folder 6 Inthe left frame select the folder that contains files you want to upload 7 Inthe right frame check the box next to each file you want to upload To select all files in the folder check the box in the header circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 234 Using the Document Management System a Schedule Comment Templates wt 20593AB D 0 1E 41B7 A24B F0EC M1 El 77111 Prnerte eearches nnt wor NOTE You can only import files from one folder at a time 8 If appropriate enter the files summary metadata schedule tasks comments or category Any information you enter is applied to all selected files 9 To check in the files click the Check In button Ei from the top left corner To submit the files into the approval chain click the Submit IE or Approve Eo button Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop When using drag and drop you can choose individual files
80. Design a new poll Compose Email ch Ade r mama el E on ll N ee ee Mm a J NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Working With Polls on page 619 and Creating a Survey on page 624 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 577 Working with HTML Forms 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to see it before choosing it Select a sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click Next 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 615 9 Anew screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 579 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a whi
81. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 207 Working with HTML Forms Co Title Compose Email Description Write and send an email message Form Data Mail Database Assign Task To unassigned Select User or Group ID 399 Mail Properties To Jo to addresses in field No field sele Mo field sele From p rom To CC Jr to addresses in field C email addres Meb 2 ee Note that the To and CC fields can accept fields whose validation type is email address or email address list On the other hand the From field can only accept fields whose validation type is email address that is a single email address To set this up follow these steps 1 Add a form field whose Validation type is Email address or Email address list The field prompts the user completing the form to enter his email address Label the field something like Enter your email address TIP If the field allows more than one address add on screen instructions to separate each address with a semicolon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 208 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Name email address Field Name email_address Tool Tip Text emai address Default value Validation Please submit your emal address submit Survey Validation Email address list Error Message E mail address list Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section 3 Move to the fi
82. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 610 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default date enter it here The site visitor can change the value default value while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Custom See Custom Validation on page 599 Error Enter text that appears if a site visitor s response does not satisfy the Message validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion Use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters th
83. Ektron CMS400 NET Web site 2 Right click the poll you want to change and click Edit I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical El New Poll 2 CY edit O Friend Cry vi Hist CoWorker eee i Delete O Newsgroup 3 mea A Other bJ Add Task Properties Submit Form ga amp Workarea Logout 3 Make changes to the poll using the Forms editor 4 Submit the poll to the Approval Process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 219 Working with HTML Forms Creating a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 Note For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 215 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 159 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New gt HTML Form Survey 4 The New Form screen appears New Form Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Ei Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE When you choose Stand
84. Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the poll 8 Click the Next button This screen lets you add a poll question and possible replies Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 216 Working with HTML Forms NOTE This screen allows you to add up to eight replies If you have more than eight replies you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen indicates that you have entered the basic poll information and should click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields 12 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches so you can edit existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NoTE From this screen you can add more replies to your poll by right clicking on the choices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 185 Replacing a Poll from the Web Site When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can right click on a poll and choose New Poll to replace the current one The title of the poll its ID and properties stay the same Only the questions and answers Change To replace a poll follow these steps 1 Log into Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Navigate to the W
85. Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 441 On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 441 You can only add content in the language of a collection So create the content first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists 1 Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed Click View gt Collection The View Collections screen is displayed Select the collection that you want to translate From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection a amp N 6 Using the Add button cf select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection 2 Click View gt Collections The View Collections screen is displayed 3 Click the Add button ca and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 430 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 441 Working with Collect
86. Menu via the Menus Module on page 468 Click the menu you want to edit The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu View Menu ET VIEW l Ha D About E Why Choose Ektron E Business Practices D Company Profile D News L Staff List E 3 Careers E Ektron Medical Blog L Forum LI site Search E Using the Ektron Explorer 4 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 466 Working with Menus 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the menu Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen appears 6 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 Viewing a Menu Just like editing a menu you can view a men
87. Nore You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the __ calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 269 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 280 2 Navigate to the month and day for which you want to add a calendar event Your calendar display is determined by your system administrator June 20 Fa a FE RC International Hosts RC Conference a 3 Click the Add Event EA button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears Sunday NOTE Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has subfolders or content under it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 273 Working with Calendars Add Calendar Event m Far G ba Event Title Event Location One Time Recurring l Os Date Wednesday April 06 2005 Start 12 00 AM a End 12 00 AM a i Display the times for the event Hyperlink l Launch link in a new browser Event Type Svallable Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Company Event zl 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 274 Working with Calendars Field Description Event T
88. Other Applications cccsssecsssseessesseeeenees 658 Finding and Replacing Text cccssscceeseeesseeesseeseeeeeeeeeeees 659 Checking Spelling osc iad cecesteeisecisanesart std ca teesaneenssensaenceesecevensees 663 Editing in MicroSoft Word cscccssecsseseseeseeeeseeeeseeeeeneees 668 Inserting i 2 oe Seeeeerener nee nes here Bae reer eeenrne er eeee Serer creme ener 671 editing Blt hs 6 ck aera eee sa wee mer einen etre ene ce S 687 Specifying Color Depth iniseasencnstenaiconuiarcuvacentiaventeresvbviarenansvns 718 Introduction to TableS ssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 719 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 723 Manipulating Your Table s Forimat cccsssscseseeeeeeeseeeeees 730 Choosing the Number of Rows and Column 730 Specifying Table Width sasnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 732 Specifying Horizontal Alignment ccssssseeessenseeneeeees 737 Table Background Seien 738 Setting Table BOrde rs wesissicissiieieiccsersecoussrewercansswannveneiaeeresennciens 742 Working with Table Cells ccccssseecsssseeseneeseeneeseenseees 746 Specifying the Width of a Cell cscseeeessseeeeeeseeeeeennees 746 tute g tite a ePeereteenc tee steer sina 747 Deleting a oer eeeeee enn seat ce onne oSnise Sapo E 748 Setting a Cell s Border Color cs
89. Personalize Manager Done Add Content Reset To Default Personalization For Current User Public Users Health Centers Select the content you would like to browse Arthritis Center 3 Diabetes Centers 3 aleeip cee Tae Diabetes Centers Diabetes Health Center News What are the symptoms Warning Signs wadd ta In this example the administrator provided three categories of content and each category has several items When you select a category its items appear below 5 Select the items you want to display Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 372 Personalizing a Web Page 6 Select the zone in which you want to place them Click the Add button When you do not need to add more content click Done Add Content Deleting Content You can only delete content that you added See Adding Content on page 371 When you delete content you remove a version of it from its Web part zone But if it exists in another location on the same page or on any other page it remains there And you can still add it to any Web part zone To delete content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will instruct you on how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost siteroot mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode A delete button appears on the personalization menu for any
90. Save button Save When the page refreshes it opens to the folder with changed name Documents nts 1 Workspace New Docum No subcategory exists sample 4 this is a sample content block under the documents sR Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 382 My Workspace Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Documents You can delete obsolete folders from My Workspace gt gt Documents To delete a folder follow these steps NOTE You can not delete the top level folder Workspace CAUTION Deleting a folder permanently deletes all assets and HTML content as well as its subfolders 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Click the folder s Edit button 4 This button is located to the left of the folder s title Documents 3 The Edit Folder box appears 4 Click the Delete button Delete 5 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm deleting the folder 6 Click OK 7 The page refreshes and the folder is removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 383 My Workspace Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Documents Assets are files that are not HTML content such as Office documents and PDFs To add an asset to My Workspace gt gt Documents follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select a folder where the asset will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding
91. Sort tasks by column 303 Managing Tasks Sorting Tasks By Task Type On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task You sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the Workarea Note Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have _ been added to a task Show Task Type jue Date Assidmlal Not Specified l Mar 2005 f Mar 2005 f 1 Mar 2005 To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories Sorting Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Title Alphabetically by title of associated content By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 304 Managing Tasks Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Last Added Comment Alphabetically by the most recently created task comment Create Date By date task was created beginning with dates closest to today
92. Tasks By Task Type on page 304 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 304 Managing Tasks on page 286 emailing Tasks on page 305 Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks ona screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below Change To State a Title CID State Priori Prep to Move Downstairs On Hold Low All tasks assigned to you that are in one Click on task to view it of the following states Add a task not started active awaiting data Sort tasks by column on hold reopened pending Sort tasks by Task Type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 301 Managing Tasks Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or Click on task to view it others Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you Select any user and view
93. User Manual Version 7 5 159 Working with HTML Forms 4 The New Form screen appears New Form iae yas Ths m ST aja Next ae Cancel amp Paor niy i Crab aF at ll a i s a maai Hii _ let a Tey ru Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey E1 Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Working With Polls on page 215 and Creating a Survey on page 220 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Select a sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click Next 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning
94. Version 7 5 535 Table Design Table Properties Cell Properties Lets you adjust the number or row and col umns span rows or columns that is two or more adjacent cells are merged Lets you set the table s width height background color background image alignment cell spacing and padding Id css Class border Lets you set the selected cells alignment background color background image height and width ID css class abbreviation categories Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Working with Tables For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 538 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 562 Specifying Table Width on page 540 Table Backgrounds on page 546 Specifying Horizontal Alignment on page 544 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 568 Setting Table Borders on page 551 Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 564 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 560 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 561 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 560 Spanning More than One Row or Column on page 563 536 Working with Tables Description For more information see Accessibility Lets you assign accessibility information Section 508 Tables on for the table page 5 0 heading rows caption heading columns caption caption alignment caption summary
95. Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site NOTE To learn how to enable eWebEdit400 for all clients that connect to your server see Setting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users on page 487 More specifically eWebEdit400 lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indentation e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions from the toolbar at the top of the editor or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Also if you create and maintain HTML forms this chapter describes how to do that using eWebEdit400 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 488 Introduction to eWebEdit400 Using eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on tt such as spell checking design_mod Normal B Z U A x X
96. Web page to display the collections using the Collection server control or ecmCollection function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 424 Working with Collections NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to work with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics e Finding Collections on page 425 e Viewing a Collection on page 428 e Creating a Collection on page 430 e Editing Content in a Collection on page 438 e Reordering Collections List on page 439 e Editing Collection Information on page 439 e Deleting a Collection on page 440 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 440 e Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features on page 442 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder To find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button E For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 Since collections can be assigned to any content folder the Modules folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page
97. When replying to a message you reply only to the person who sent you the original message A reply contains the details of the original message The details of the original message can be edited or removed from the new message To reply to a message follow these steps l In the Workarea click My Workspace gt Messaging or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message to which you want to reply and click the subject Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 394 My Workspace Click the Reply button S 5 The message editor screen appears with the original message s details in the body of the message 6 Add your reply 7 Click the Send button _ 2 8 The message is sent Forward a Message When forwarding a message you can select to whom the message is sent A forwarded message contains the details of the original message The details of the original message can be edited or removed from the new message To forward a message follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items 3 Find the message you want to forward and click the subject Click the Forward button 5 The message editor screen appears with the original message s details in the body of the message 6 Add any additional information to the message 7 Click the Send button _ 8
98. Whitepaper Request English U S Form Post back message a isplay a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report on the form ki od Ea aa z diui ii aa ja gt e a i Apply CSS Cl Paragrapt ISG s us 1 3 gE il Ls Place post back message here When you click that button a dialog like the one below appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 579 Working with HTML Forms Merge Field k General Select a field to insert pe b survey _id gt O Age_range Age range on Education_Level Education Level Annual_Income Annual Income O Household Income Household Income a Marital Status Marital Status 4 ebal ri lS er es ee All form fields appear on the list In addition the list includes the following fields which can retrieve form information into the postback message e Form title e Form description e Date submitted Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must have the folder and hyperlink name from your administrator to complete this procedure To redirect submit
99. a Poll from the Web Site on page 219 Creating a New Poll in the Workarea To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a poll in another language by copying an existing poll and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 215 Working with HTML Forms NOTE For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 159 For the steps to create a new survey see Creating a Survey on page 220 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the poll 3 Click New gt HTML Form Survey The New Form screen appears New Form a atata m ai 7 pee ee na ITE Acta ne e alae a sate aa en Aa mn y k T il I ALEP La elect a form from below or in with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Ei Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE If you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button
100. a Task to a Form on page 195 9 Anew screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 160 Working with HTML Forms e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 161 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 162 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 163 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 166 Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges the site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the font size style color insert library items etc Inserting Fields into the Postback Message You can also insert fields that retrieve form informat
101. a blog roll and decides how comments are handled Phase 2 A developer adds the blog to a Web form The Developer Manual using the blog server control He then section Introduction to publishes the form Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Blog Server Controls Phase 3 Ektron CMS400 NET users can add Blog Posts on page 341 blog posts either from the Workarea or the Web site Depending on the user s permissions the post is either published immediately or submitted to the blog s approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 315 Blogs pm mn e Phase 4 The blog post is published Now site Blog Comments on visitors can view it and possibly add page 350 comments Depending on the blog s comment settings they either appear immediately or must be approved first The following sections explain using the blog feature in the Workarea e Adding a Blog on page 316 e Blog Properties on page 318 e Blog Subjects on page 322 e The Blog Roll on page 327 e Language Support on page 336 e Searching Blogs on page 337 e Subscribing Unsubscribing to a Blog on page 337 e Deleting a Blog on page 336 e Blog Posts on page 341 e Blog Comments on page 350 e Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer on page 358 Adding a Blog NOTE Tobe able to create a blog you must have permission to Add Folders onthe _ blog s Advanced P
102. a prior version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 222 Using the Document Management System This chapter explains the Document Management Functionality through the following topics e Supported Types of Assets on page 223 e Security on page 224 e Software Requirements on page 224 e Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 227 e Working with Managed Files on page 253 e Asset Workflow on page 258 e Adding Assets to Collections and Menus on page 259 e Asset Reports on page 259 Supported Types of Assets Ektron CMS400 NET can support all file types By default only the following types are supported However your administrator can add or remove any file type via the Asset Server Setup screen EXCEPTION Ektron CMS400 NET does not support double extensions such as filename aspx vb e Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc e Managed files zip files PDFs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg Open Office documents such as odf odt e Multimedia files such as swf mps wav avi NOTE The file types that can be uploaded are determined by your administrator If you try to upload the wrong type of file the following error message appears File Type Not Supported File type not supported x Only file types supported are doc xs ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg txt log vsd
103. add a folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 418 edit a folder s name see Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 418 delete a folder see Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 419 drag and drop an asset see Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 420 move a content item to another folder see Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 422 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 417 My Workspace e select whether to share the folder with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the folder private see Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 422 Photos can be displayed on the site when a developer adds the PhotoGallery server control to a Community Web site For additional information on the PhotoGallery server control see the Developer Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Community Platform Server Controls gt PhotoGallery Server Control Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos You can add subfolders in the Photos area to help you sort images into categories The subfolders represent a taxonomy of the items contained in the Photos area To add subfolders follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Photos 2 Click the Manage Folder Button J 3 The Add Folder box appea
104. aspect ratio Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 700 Editing Images Pye Pyne pou J Maintain Aspect Ratio l rrm h 1 I rie on Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Dialog Box im Dimensions IOJ x Dimensions Mev width ayo New Height 74 Maintain 4epect Ratio Current Width 218 Curent Height pE za Exit Standard Toolbar Button pt Description Save the change in the WeblmageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 701 Editing Images Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button hle Description Ignore changes made to the image in WeblmageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Freehand Standard Toolbar Button A Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To use this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 702 Editing Images Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses an image horizontally l
105. blog post is made up of several sub elements Headline the title of the post Commentary the details of the post Comment Link links to a comments page where site visitors can view or add comments TrackBack URL a URL visitors can use to notify you when they are talking about the blog post on their site PingBack Pings back any URLs in the blog post Images add images to a blog post You add images to a blog post the same way you add them to content See Also Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 314 Blogs eS Blog Comments A Comments link appears at the end of the blog post The link includes a number in parentheses for example 3 This number denotes how many comments have been made Click this link to move to the comments page where you can read comments on the post and possibly enter your own Blog Roll Other blog sites that the blog s creator wants site visitors to view Blog Subjects Subjects associated with the blog If you click a subject links to all posts associated with the subject appear Calendar Indicates when blog posts were made This lets site visitors navigate your blog by clicking a day that has blog posts Blog Workflow The following table explains the workflow of a blog toe on e Phase 1 An administrator creates a blog in the Adding a Blog on Workarea During this phase he assigns page 316 blog subjects creates
106. circled below http icestor rm Lang lype 103 CM5400 Workarea for admin Microsoft sc ektron Cc Mo at At or ne ef H EREN EEEE di so Hanne Ww orkar ea Monday No ove m View Content Sample Content Block Ly Senf Mii Gi ai SS LY ie aa OS Add selec Ektron roomy hemp Server mary setae Developer productivity ts a critical issue among Web teams Faced with the challenge of reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to out new Internet and intranet sites and rich Web applications developers nee every advantage tilted in their favor to help their organizational Web strategie succeed Ektron CM5400 NET delivers that advantage It now offers eight visual drag a drop template development components that enable developers to assemble sites up to four times faster than working In J2EE ii Using Autohide The Workarea screen also provides an autohide feature which quickly switches between full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 24 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top
107. click Save E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 470 Working with Menus Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via e its content folder e menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 467 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 468 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the i
108. columns A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 531 Working with Tables j Rows lt Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the exact number when you create the table estimate how many you need You can easily add or remove rows and columns later There are two ways to create a table If your table will be six rows by six columns or less use the Table Builder See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Builder on page 532 If it will exceed 6 x 6 use the Table Wizard See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard on page 533 Either way once the table is created you use the features described in Modifying Table Properties on page 535 to add borders background color set width and height etc Creating a Table Using the Table Builder To create a table follow these steps 1 Click the table button 3 2 Drag the cursor over rows and column to indicate the size of the table The following example shows a table that is 4 rows by 5 columns Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 532 Working with Tables 3 Click the mouse At this point the table looks like this p I I Lr L I rot poe nt peeF Ota ab In kien win ie p pep ep I I I I I i I ot l l I r I l E E L I E E E E 4 Begin entering text and ima
109. content you can replace the current version with any previous version NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions of content To see a change by change comparison of two content items use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics e Accessing Content History on page 108 e The Content History Window on page 109 e Restoring a Previous Version on page 111 e Comparing Historical Versions on page 112 e Removing Applied XSLT on page 112 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of Ektron CMS400 NET content You can access content history from two places e The Workarea s View Content page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 108 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e A Web page Once you access the history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History from the Workarea To access the history from the Workarea follow t
110. content has a green border it could mean that the content is checked in A checked in content item is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When content is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view Content ktre Title About Us Checked In by Application Administrator Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordable a full featured content management systems address the c organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content mananement Wath Eetron s hroweser haced salitians hrisiness See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Each option you may perform on checked in content is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 800 Appendix A Content Statuses Name Description For more information see Check out and Check content out and save on Checking Out Saving and Save as your computer Replacing an Office Document on page 247 Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 249 E Edit or Edit in Office Check out the content to Editing HTML Content on Editing a Managed File on page 256 Editing an Office Docu ment on page 244 Edit Pro
111. default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 188 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Select List Field Use a Select List field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices Although similar to the choices field when you insert a Select List field the site visitor only sees the first option in a drop down box Age range Payapa He must click the down arrow to see the remaining values and select one ge range Select So the Select List field occupies less room on the screen than a choices field Also the site visitor can only choose on item on the list In contrast you can allow a visitor to select several choices if you use a choices field To insert a Select List field follow these steps 1 Place a Select List field e onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 189 Working with HTML Forms Select List Field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Name Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 List Custom ltem List ltem Value i Text Value Add Change Check tem to be selected by deta Move Up Move Down Remove T First it
112. deleting 284 display times 276 279 editing 282 end time 275 279 insert hyperlink 276 location 275 recurring adding 277 start date 275 278 start time 275 279 viewing 280 screen information on 265 viewing 269 cell properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 toolbar button 642 cells background color 750 background image deleting 753 inserting 752 border color 749 invisible 749 deleting 748 inserting 747 merging 760 padding 762 spacing 762 splitting 759 text alignment 756 width 746 check in toolbar button 61 checked in content definition 800 checked out content definition 802 choose color WeblmageFX command 695 choose font WeblmageFX command 696 cleaning HTML 776 collaboration content 794 collections adding content 434 changing sequence of links 63 compared with menu and List Summary 442 creating 430 creating new content for 436 default template 432 definition 424 deleting 440 editing content blocks 438 finding 425 folder using to find collection 426 information editing 439 multi language 440 removing content 438 reordering content blocks 439 toolbar button 61 62 toolbar buttons 430 using default template or quicklinks 432 viewing 428 color background cell applying 750 deleting 751 table applying 739 deleting 740 cell border 749 default 728 content block border meaning 798 depth specifying 718 font changing 638 picture border 681 table border 742 default 726
113. dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 176 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Hame Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Plain Text Field Dialog SSS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 177 Working with HTML Forms pre ie Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it value here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 178 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is initially surr
114. dot zip swi wma Wav avi mp3 1m wmv ra mov odt odf odp odg ods Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 223 Using the Document Management System security For the purposes of security assets are treated like other content Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the content in a folder For more information see the Setting Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual software Requirements Your production server must run Windows 2003 server or Windows 2000 See Also e Browser Requirements on page 224 e Installing FireFox Plug In on page 225 Browser Requirements Feature Browser Requirements For more information see Edit Microsoft Office Internet Explorer Option does not appear Editing an Office Document on documents within with Firefox page 244 CMS400 NET _ UE EDU Pee Note Firefox users can check an Office document out to their computer edit it using Office then drag and drop the file back into CMS400 NET See Editing a Managed File on page 256 Note If your computer has Windows Vista you must turn off its User Account Control to use this feature For details see http www microsoft com technet technetmag issues 200 7 06 uac default aspx Multiple DMS Documents Internet Explorer Option does not appear Adding Documents Using
115. drag and drop the document back to Ektron CMS400 NET Follow these steps to copy an Office document to your computer edit it then replace the version in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 247 Using the Document Management System IMPORTANT There are several ways to import a document into Ektron CMS400 NET Some methods retain the original file name while others let the user assign a name When you check out and save a document to your computer it is saved under the original file name which may be different from its Ektron CMS400 NET name The original file name is on the screen that appears after you select Check out and Save as circled below Opening Ecommerce_Project_Capabilities doc You have chosen to open srce_Project_Capabilities doc which is a Microsoft Word Document from http icestorm What should Firefox do with this file Save to Disk Make note of the original file name because you use it to identify the file after it is saved to your computer 1 In Ektron CMS400 NET open the folder that contains the Office document 2 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the document and select Check out and Save As You are prompted to open or save the document Click Save Select a folder to which you want to save the document The document s status changes to checked out O Edit the document in Office o pi oe p NOTE If you change your mind a
116. e APEEP EEEIEE EEA EIA E AEA I E EEA E EEA EA tle EA ELERTE Sia See Se ee ae wee hh seas oe ene tye s ob Ves se si Se slut so Soy 9 weet os L oe ee ee SRE Save E Pesce beet t i bj Properties Metadata Subjects Web Alerts Remove Roll Link Link Name URL http www testscottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship Edit Remove Roll Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www _tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship frend colleague 7 Click OK if you want to remove the last blog roll link You can continue to remove subjects at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Subject link 8 Click Save 4 Removing a Blog Roll Link Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 332 Blogs To remove any blog roll link on the list follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button L Click the Blog Roll tab Find the blog roll link to be removed te ee Click Remove Roll Link above the Link Name to be removed Edit Properties for the folder GBNB E Properties Metadata Subjects_ web Alerts Remove Roll Link Link Name Scott s Blog URL http www tes
117. earch Published Advanced Search size assets only Title Last Edr DMS rank assets only Avoid Cancer 3 9 200 ianeuaae Build Health Want To Prevent Or Cure Cancer 3 10 20 How to Spot A Bad Mole 1 5 200 elas The Met Cancer ink B ans en Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen The following column headers describe the information displayed for all content items that satisfy the search criteria Column Description Header Content Title The title of the content item Last Edit Date The most recent date on which content was edited If it was never edited its creation date The folder that contains the content The size of the content item in kilobytes DMS Rank An indication of how well a content item page matches the search criteria using a range of 0 to 1000 The higher the rank the more relevant content is to the search criteria Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 128 Searching the Workarea Column Description Header Language The locale id value of the content s language For a reference list of these values see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Appendix C List of Supported Languages Appendix C List of Supported Languages on page 1015 Status A one character abbreviation of the content item s status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 NOTE If you install Ektron CMS400 NET then later select a different database to search
118. editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Click the library button fi The library opens Navigate to the folder that will contain the file after you insert it From the File types dropdown select the type of file you want to insert Click the Add Library button K 7 Anew screen appears Browse to the file you want to insert 10 11 Hyperlinks Or you can click the search button th to search for a file to insert Enter a Description for the file lf metadata is required for the library item you must complete it Metadata fields may appear in the lower section of the screen Click the Add Library button i The file is inserted into the selected library folder and the content For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 131 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 150 Library Folder Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 141 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlink instead of a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 143 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 145
119. field because the search ignores them For information on managing the noise files see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Query Language gt Rules for Formulating Queries Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the Search Text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched Search Text All the words All the wards Any of the words Title Exact Phrase Content ID Comments Your choices are described below A search returns content that has For more information see All the words all words in the search field All the Words on page 124 Any of the words any word in the search field Any of the Words on page 124 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 123 Searching the Workarea see Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Exact Phrase on page 124 Content ID has the submitted ID number Content ID on page 125 Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the Search Text field e partners e content e Monday e employee e green All the Words All Words is an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be i
120. fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 683 Inserting Images Spacing Horizontal Vertical The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS Ba This image has 20 preels of vertical space no horizontal space This image has 20 pels of horizontal space no vertical space BS BS This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 prels of horizontal space Editing the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 684 Inserting Images Cancel For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that ima
121. form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information on the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 286 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 615 Working with HTML Forms If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information You complete the form and make it available on your Web site A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on p
122. gn Insert column right Delete current row 4 Delete column Delete current column Delete current cell Deleting a Cell on x Delete cell a page 559 Merge current cell with cell to its right Merging Two Cells 4 Merge cells 3 on page 566 horizontally Merge current cell with cell below it Merging Two Cells E Merge cells on page 566 vertically Divide a cell into two After you split each Splitting a Cell on cell occupies one half the size of the page 565 original cell Split cell Adjust a table s properties Modifying Table Properties on page 535 Table properties Adjust properties of current cell Working with Table 4 Cell properties Cells on page 556 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 495 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Display suppress internal table border Setting Table v1 Show hide border Borders on page 551 Form Elements Toolbar These toolbar options appear when you are working with an HTML form poll or survey Mo al t He FF See The Form Toolbar Options on page 587 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 496 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEdit400 and retain most or all of the Original application s formatting In general copying from another application involves these steps
123. has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block des Continue Cancel 7 Click OK to delete the content Deleting One Content Item from the Workarea 1 Access the View Contents of Folder screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Hover the cursor over the triangle Select Delete from the dropdown menu NOTE If you do not see Delete either you lack permission to delete the content or its status makes it ineligible for deleting Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 58 Deleting Content 4 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E x This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request 2 Are yau sure vou wish to submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue 5 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Contents of Folder screen you can delete several Approved content items at once To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the Approved content you want to delete 2 Hover the cursor over the Delete menu Delete 3 Select Content from the dropdown menu Cel 4 Check boxes next to Approved content items you want to
124. how to display the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 139 Search Library Folder Library Folder Mixed Tea F Ceaarch ntinns View Description option If the item is an image display the Title image in the left column If not iy AIM gy DEMA Teaser De ALM on Demand Conference and Exhibil display its title eel To the right display the item s Description Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Display item s title in the left column Title Mi the right AIIM isplay the file type and folder CMs400 Logo name Code CRSM Gilbane Market Cycle Panorama Files Ektron CMS400 Net logo large size Type Folder Name Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Images CMS400Example uploadediImages This section explains how to work with library files through the following subtopics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 140 Library Folder e Copying Files to the Library on page 141 e Viewing Files on page 143 e Editing a File on page 145 e Overwriting Files on page 145 e Library Link Searching on page 147 e Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 For a definition of
125. library folder For example doc and pdf Flle Upload path The folder to which library files are moved when you insert Physical Path them into Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator controls these settings Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 135 Library Folder searching the Library You can search the library to find items when you only know some information about them For example you know that an image s name includes Ektron but dont know its filename or folder To search the library first select the folder in which you want to begin the search The search only considers files in that folder and its child folders To search the entire library begin by selecting the Library root folder Next click the Search button from the library toolbar When you do a search screen appears with two tabs shown below Search Library Folder Search Published Basic Search Advanced Search O The left tab Search Published works the same as the regular search tab of that name See The Search Published Tab on page 115 The right tab Advanced Search provides several fields that let you narrow your search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 136 Library Folder Search Library Folder All types Images only Quicklinks only Form links only Files only Hyperlinks only Please check off the field that you wish to search in addition to the Title De
126. navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 330 Blogs 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Blog Roll tab 5 Find the Blog Roll Link for which the information needs to be edited 6 Edit the information 7 Click Save M NOTE As with adding a blog roll link you can edit multiple blog roll links before clicking Save Removing a Blog Roll Link There are two ways to remove blog roll links e Remove the last link that was added e Remove any link in the list individually The steps to perform each task are documented below Removing the Last Blog Roll Link Using this method to remove the last blog link on the page 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To remove a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Blog Roll tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 331 Blogs 5 Click Remove Last Roll Link Edit Properties for the folder GBNB a Pare 1 aoe IF b an Torie aeni essa ine etare era eira ere eta s r fa sin s rarei ars sare n sigra a wera ta eet fe sra e aon g esii P rm rae i i ci sie a oe PEL Fa ese Pa asta f sat fa PET
127. number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 763 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another place in the content On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 764 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 768 e abookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 771 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark e bookmark the place to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 7
128. of appropriate boxes Same as Choices except options appear in a drop down box and site visitor can only select one choice Lets user insert a date by clicking a calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 For more information see Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 173 Inserting a Hidden Text Field on page 1 5 Inserting a Text Field on page 176 Inserting a Password Field on page 180 Inserting a Text Area Field on page 182 Inserting a Choices Field on page 185 Inserting a Select List Field on page 189 Inserting a Calendar Field on page 192 170 Working with HTML Forms After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 161 Metadata Edit the metadata for the content See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 931 A Submit content into approval process 5l Submit B Publish content to Web site Publish e Note If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to de
129. of 1 Viewing Your Message Board Comments To view comments for a Message Board in the Workarea click the My Workspace folder button Then click the Message Board link A list of comments and a dialog that allows you to add a comment appear Each comment contains the following information Comment Text the message text that s been posted to the Message Board Delete Link click this link to delete the comment from the Message Board Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 398 My Workspace Avatar an image representing the user who made the comment Display Name the display name of the user who made the comment Date Time The post date and time of the comment Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea To add a comment to your Message Board in the Workarea follow these steps a 4 Add Comment O l 2000 character limit In the Workarea click My Workspace gt Message Board In the text box enter a comment Click the Add Comment button The comment appears in the list of comments Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea To delete a comment on your Message Board in the Workarea follow these steps 1 2 Click My Workspace gt Message Board Click the Delete link next to comment you want to remove Message Board Here is the first messagefor 10 10 2007 my Message Board Delete 10 48 10 AM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 399
130. of the Forms Wizard the form includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit bution Tip In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc to the form To lay out fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Inserts this Description For more information see kind of field Checkbox User s response is either checked or Inserting a Checkbox Field on unchecked page 591 Free text field user cannot format Inserting a Text Field on page 592 text Choices Several choices appear on screen Inserting a Choices Field on User checks any number of page 605 appropriate responses Calendar Lets user insert a date by clicking a Inserting a Calendar Field on calendar page 609 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 587 Working with HTML Forms Inserts this Description For more information see kind of field Insert Button Button with no text You can easily Inserting or Editing Buttons on the add text to it Form on page 612 When a site visitor completing the form presses this button the data on the screen is submitted to your Web server Insert Reset Button with Reset as its text Whena Inserting or Editing Buttons on the site visitor completing the form Form on page 612 presses this button the form s field values are set to their state when the form first loaded I
131. of the left frame ix When you do the push pin turns 90 degrees to indicate autohide is on To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin returns to its original position sending Instant Email Ektron CMS400 NET lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below Title Request Type Start Date Submitted by Trinity In Line Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 25 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To jedit ektron com From jeditt ektron cam Subject Content Trinity In Line Fipe Times New Roman 3 12 pt A oy E 7 U T REA John Edit URL http 192168 0 17 CMS300Sampleindex asp tid 22 Send Email Cancel Conditions for Instant eMail e You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 477 e Your system administrator must enable the feature Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several scre
132. p m e New for 7 5 3 The search finds metadata along with other content Previously you had to precede the search text with an at sign followed by the name of the metadata field See Also Searching for Metadata on page 117 e New for 7 5 3 The Document Management Toolbar has been removed It was no longer needed since it has become easier to edit Microsoft Office documents within Ektron CMS400 NET Alternatively users can launch Office edit a file and save it to into Ektron CMS400 NET via a mapped network folder without signing into the Workarea This feature is described in Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder on page 238 The Ektron Explorer has also been removed It s no longer necessary since users can drag and drop files into a mapped network folder without signing into the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 ili What s New in the 7 5 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 iv Securing Ektron CMS400 NET security Checklist The following is a checklist of things an Administrator must do to secure Ektron CMS400 NET O Change Admin user password O Change builtin user password IMPORTANT If you changed the builtin user password during the site setup you do not need to change it again See Editing Builtin on page ii for additional information C Remove Sample Users and Sample Membership Users IMPORTANT Some users in this list might not appea
133. page 43 Viewing Content from the Workarea 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content as explained in Viewing a Folder on page 30 2 The icon to the left of View indicates the type of content being displayed Icons are described below To change the type of content being displayed click View then select a type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 41 Viewing Content w anoun i Ektron Cnllerctinn 3 If your system supports more than one language you can view only content in any language via the View gt Language menu option illustrated below View Contents of Folder Root 2 eee eee Jew e Le ere ACOM z me Th i iu pain a a i ee nes Posh ee he aa a FEN ich a CIG F ee DALES Title Hl All Types m snound HIML Content HTML Form Survey 5 DMS Document Lanquaqge Meny Collection l Deutsch German Espa ol Spanish Frangais French Italiano Italian a Nederlands Dutch 4 Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle and select View from the dropdown menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 42 Viewing Content Alternatively click the contents title 5 The View Content screen appears View Content ee Content Block Content Saas cna Gone Toss ea Ektron pom bap Server Controls Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams
134. page 633 Selecting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it e To select all information on a page press Ctrl A e To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key until the desired data is selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 632 Toolbar Buttons e To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Horizontal Sets the horizontal position of the entire Alignment able Border Color Sets the color of the table borders unless foe Tafani Ciofaric checked Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes e Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute e Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the button again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The toolbar
135. published the updated poll appears on the site I TAKE A SURVEY How often do you visit the Ektron Medical site Daily Weekly Monthly Semi Annually Yearly Vote Editing a Poll from the Web Site To edit an poll on a Web site follow these steps WARNING Ifyou are logged into the site and create a new poll by right clicking on a poll selecting New the existing poll is replaced by the new one 1 Log on to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site 2 Right click the poll you want to change and click Edit I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical El New Poll 2 CY edit O Friend Cry vi Hist CoWorker e J i Delete O Newsgroup 3 Sae A Other bJ Add Task Properties Submit Form ga amp Workarea Logout 3 Make changes to the poll using the Forms editor 4 Submit the poll to the Approval Process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 623 Working with HTML Forms Creating a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 NoTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 619 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 576 1 Consult with your Ektron CMS400 NET administrator about the folders in which you should create poll
136. s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 166 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 221 Using the Document Management System The Document Management System DMS lets you import Microsoft Office files along with other types of files into Ektron CMS400 NET Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are known as assets After being saved to Ektron CMS400 NET assets can be updated and tracked like HTML and XML content If you re familiar with how content is handled most of what you know applies to assets For example assets e can be stored in folders with other content or in separate folders that you create just for them e are assigned content ID numbers e can have summary metadata comment task schedule and taxonomy information e inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties e progress through the workflow check out check in publish e retain a history so you can restore earlier versions e can be searched e support foreign language editions e can have a task assigned to them e appear on content reports e update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire When an asset is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the Document Management server Then whenever a user edits and saves the asset a new copy is stored In this way you can review and if needed restore
137. screen appears for the selected menu 6 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu select language Danish German standard Ibi bbe bE be 7 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 Click the Save button 4 The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yiew Menu Italian menu View In talan Standard Title Language ID URL Link hore Info 10 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 453 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language 11 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 474 Working with Menus These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to translate The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu A Shy Z From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu IbikbieikbLikikkikLik manununnnnnnmnnnn eei German standard 5 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 C
138. screen from the Task Module Toolbar View Content page on page 311 Add Task Access Add Task screen from task Creating a Task via module folder the Task Folder on page 288 Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 309 Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 305 ce Update Save task information View Task View task information Viewing a Task on page 300 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 311 Blogs Blogs short for Web Logs are a form of online information sharing A blog is often set up so a group of people can share their thoughts on a subject One person creates the main post and other comment on post In addition blogs can be used to create an online diary of everyday life In the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea blogs and blog posts have a relationship similar to folders and content The blog is the equivalent of a folder and blog posts are the equivalent of content items While blogs and blog posts have a few unique properties they mostly work the same as folders and content On your Web site blogs are arranged so the latest post appears at the top This differs from paper diaries because you are reading the newest material first instead of the oldest Because blogs are laid out this way site visitors can quickly find the most recent entries Blogs are made up of multiple elements These elements allow site visitors to view or create a blog post add comments and see a ro
139. self Parent Window parent Quick Link select The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current New Window _blank browser In the same position within the browser window Same Window _self The new window replaces the current one Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that Parent Window _parent contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display Browser Window _top area replacing the frames If your page contains frames in the frame with the Enter the name of the frame specified name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 767 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 764 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www extron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump t
140. size when you finish You want to suppress the content for anyone visiting the page For example you are customizing a page for all site visitors and want to temporarily hide a content item To minimize a content item click the minimize button on the personalization menu circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 374 Personalizing a Web Page MainRightZone What are the symptoms E The symptoms of type 1 diabetes are often subtle but they can After you minimize the button changes to a restore button circled below Click it to restore the content MainRightZone What are the symptoms P The Page Catalog lf your Webmaster has placed a Page Catalog on your personalization page it only appears after you enter Add Content mode click Personalize gt Add Content The Page Catalog looks something like the following Select the content control you would like to browse Ektron Catalog Part 73 Page Catalog 1 Ektron Catalog Part Content Block Control Calendar Control Collection Control C Blog Control Form Block Control Threaded Discussion Control ListSummary Control site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 375 Personalizing a Web Page You can do two things from the catalog area e Add to any Web Part Zone items that have been deleted from other Web Part Zones e Add a type of content to any Web part zone As you can see from the illustratio
141. someone searches your Web site However even if content is not searchdisplay e the Workarea Advanced search still finds it See Also The Advanced Search Tab on page 119 e it can appear among Suggested Results See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Suggested Results After you respond to the above fields the following buttons are available Buttons on the Add Content Screen pro rome oar A Submit Submit the content into the approval chain This action also returns the new or updated content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 50 Adding HTML Content fein e ome B Publish Publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button If no approval chain is assigned to the content s folder every authorized user sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor EF Check In Save and check in the document This action returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently
142. table fills the screen except for the browser border Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Shop Table Properties If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved down Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 733 Manipulating Your Table s Format Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help Sf m Reload Home Search Netscape gt Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 734 Manipulating Your Table s Format Insert T able Size Bows 2 2 Columns Layout 100 C Not Specified i Percent i Pixels ri ee E ener te P Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized If the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the b
143. the Option with other browsers Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 233 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 224 Using the Document Management System Installing FireFox Plug In If you want to use the Document Management s drag and drop feature with the Firefox browser you need to install software to enable it You only need to do this the first time on a computer Afterwards the features are available to you with no additional effort Follow these steps to install the Firefox plug in software 1 Launch the FireFox browser 2 In the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea open a content folder 3 Click the Add Assets button circled below Footer d E form data eynort al Drag and drop documents below Click here to install the Ektron Drag Drop Extension 5 Click the word here 6 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 225 Using the Document Management System Opening ekdragdrop xpt You have chosen to open ekdragdrop xpi which is a Netscape Theme or Exten from http icestorm What should Firefox do with this file Open with 7 Click the down arrow next to Netscape default and select Other 8 Browse to C gt Program Files gt Mozilla Firefox gt Firefox exe 9 Click Open 10 Firefox exe appears next to the Open with field 11 Press OK 12 The following dialog appears Ekt
144. the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 300 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 308 Managing Tasks View Task Y 0 mh Se Ibi bbe IRIE I eI RELI Ie IE Pe Re Pe Re Re Pe RR eR Lt Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To f admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blacks on the list Comments Date Timel4added By Comments 1O0 Jun OO4 10 47 Sh Be sure to check this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 300 2 Click the Delete button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 309 IMPORTANT Managing Tasks The Delete button only appears if your system administra
145. the Password Dialog La a Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 181 Working with HTML Forms ae Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation c
146. the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to edit 3 Locate the comment you want to edit 4 Click edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 356 Blogs 5 The Edit Comment screen appears For a description of the fields on this screen see gt The Comment Form on page 353 Note that Edit Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 351 Deleting a Comment Once a comment is deleted you cannot retrieve it From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to delete 3 Click delete 4 Adialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 Click OK to delete the comment Approving a Comment Comments can require approval if e they are submitted from the Web site and Moderate Comments is checked in the blog s folder properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 357 Blogs e auser submits the comment from the Workarea set its state to Pending Only users with permission to edit content posts within the blog folder can approve comments To learn about the approval process for pending comment
147. the new content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 48 Adding HTML Content 2 Click View gt Language and select a language from the list pi Contents of Folder Root ite El All Types uage ID Al Ekron E HTML Content HTML FormSurvey 3 DMS Document Language English U S Deutsch German Espa ol Spanish Frangais French talano Italian 1 Nederlands Dutch 3 Click New gt HTML Content ven Contents of Folder CMS E Discussion Board pat al Community Folder HTML Content 4 The Edit Content window opens 5 Create content in the editor using the following table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 49 Adding HTML Content Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen Field Description Enter a title for the content Add to Quicklinks Table Note This checkbox only appears if you are a member of the Administrators User Group Check if you want to create a Quicklink to this content If you do users can insert links to this content from within other Ektron CMS400 NET content items See Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 132 Content Searchable Note This checkbox only appears if you are a member of the Administrators User Group Check this box if the content should be found when
148. the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 131 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS400 NET library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps WARNING Ektron recommends using the Document Management system to add files Unlike library files DMS files can be part of an approval chain maintain a history are searchable and can have a summary schedule metadata taxonomy categories etc TECHNICAL NOTE Microsoft lets users upload files of any name However Internet Explorer security blocks files whose name contains an ampersand amp colon or percentage sign Source http support microsoft com kb 826437 en us To allow these characters add the following registry key to your Web server then reset IIS Reg Key DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft ASP NET VerificationCompatibility 1 1 Inthe Workarea browse the library folder and select a folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to that folder can insert the file into content 2 A list of files in that folder appears 3 Click the Add Library button FH 4 The Add File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 141 Library Folder Add Library Item to Folder About Us images N FT I y hki er eee eer treet ereeravetrereeter weererrree A I Dl TETIrYETE me
149. to the site Note If there is another approver in the content s approval chain this is replaced by a SUBMIT button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer x This content has been submitted but waiting For completion of associated tasks A The publishing process will not proceed until the task has been completed The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 89 Approving Declining Content Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content live on Web site You are prompted to enter a comment that provides a reason for the decline The author who made the change is notified by email of the decline The content inserted by the last editor remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option Check out content and change it if desired Toggle between published and submitted versions of content This can Published help you compare versions See Also Staged Content on page 806 Staged View Diff View differences between the version awaiting approval and the published content See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 Return to previous screen Approve Decline Several Content Items To approve several submitted content it
150. view Button Description Appearance A Preview Content appears as last edited The advantage of this mode is Mode that you can see a Web page as it will appear when published to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Regular View The most recently published version of content appears In this mode colored borders surround content when you move the cursor over it In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 13 Logging In and Out 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button 2 Click the Preview button preview 3 The Web site is now in preview mode F E SOME WORDS ABOUT US Fo aa i s a global leader ektron fedicafl strives to improve Site Language English U S w regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for underserved populations It 15 a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of the communities in which employees live and work lives in its local and global communities particularly with logout Sworkarea preview I LATEST NEWS Ektron Rated Post Ektron Inc an int Web content man software today a Ektron to Demons Healthcare Healthcare Conte Framework wh
151. when you get to Step 5 click ey an z the image s thumbnail button lls Editing an Image s Properties After an image in inserted you can adjust the following properties for it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 508 Working with Images e border width e border color e alt text e description e alignment e the image itself e horizontal and vertical spacing e width and height Image Properties Image Properties Border Width k ektron Logo 7 http localhost CMS400D To access the Image Properties dialog follow these steps 1 Select the image 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Set Image Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 509 Working with Images NOTE You can also view and adjust some image properties at the bottom of the Edit Content screen as shown below ot BRAG e 7 iat fag Apply cssc x x 3 32 8 2 tit RRR Ss At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most g i di Y J Weer Hy i Ilill hli complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying our expertise in medical devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives With the latest technologies in medical science we are able to nr provide solutions that make a difference in people s lives Our projects have been very successful wit
152. with Menus 2 The Menus Report screen displays all menus Menus Report Title ID Language Description About Us 11 1033 Conditions 7 1033 Contact Information 6 1033 Home 36 1033 3 Click the menu you want to view 4 The menu s options appear View Menu ay About Us E Why Choose Ektron LI Business Practices it Company Profile D News L Staff List ES Careers E Ektron Medical Blog E Forum L site Search E Using the Ektron Explorer View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To access the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on which your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 469 Working with Menus 3 A menu is displayed For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers and Administrator Manuals Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Menu screen for the menu that you want to rearrange See Viewing a Menu on page 467 Move the cursor over the menu and click Reorder The Reorder Items screen appears Reorder tems Contact Information Contact Form Site Map Deweloper Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished
153. work with 5 The Add New ltem screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 460 Working with Menus Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 456 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 458 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 458 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 459 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page NOTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add new content to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 461 Working with Menus Click C Add The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For de
154. you must run c Program Files Ektron releasenumber utilities software searchconfig SearchConfig e xe against the new database This program gets all required data from the new database Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 129 Content Workflow Reports Content Workflow Reports The Reports folder contains various content reports For information about them see the Content Reports section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 130 Library Folder Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 131 Accessing The Library on page 132 Library Folder Properties on page 134 Searching the Library on page 136 Files on page 140 Hyperlinks on page 150 Images on page 151 Quicklinks and Forms on page 153 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common image file extensions are gif jpg tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples
155. 00 NET User Manual Version 7 5 320 Blogs Fea Poseren Tagline A line of additional information that describes the blog It appears below the title if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true For example the title of a blog is John s Blog Page The tag line could be A place to learn about John s past present future and his current state of mind Posts Visible The number of posts visible on the blog page If the number of posts exceeds this number only this many of the most recent posts appear For example if this property is set to 10 and you add 11 posts only the ten most recent posts appear This number can be from 1 to 999 If you leave this field blank all posts made during the current day are visible Comments Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 Update Service Enter a service that notifies a blog search site when blog posts are added to your blog site These blog search sites allow Web users to search content contained in blogs around the world To use this feature check the Notify blog search engines of new posts box and enter a path to a search site An example path is http rpc technorati com rpc ping Style sheet If you want to provide a custom style sheet for the blog enter the path to it filename for relative to the site root For example WworkArea csslib this folder my_cu
156. 00 NET User Manual Version 7 5 363 Personalizing a Web Page e List Summary e Contentlist e Discussion Forum NOTE Assets cannot be personalized Which Web Pages Can be Personalized Your administrator will tell which Web pages you can personalize Personalization can be enabled on any number of pages In the sample Web site provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the http localhost siteroot mypage aspx and http localhost siteroot mypageadvance aspx pages demonstrate how personalization may be implemented Personalization and Permissions To learn about how permissions affect your ability to personalize see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Personalization Feature gt Permissions that Affect Personalization Layout of a Personalization Page A Personalization page consists of one or more Web Part Zones Each zone can contain one or more content items You select the content you wants to see in each zone Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 364 Personalizing a Web Page ektron MEDICAL CARES about our clients Ektron Rated Positive Ektron Inc an innovator in Web content management software today announced Ektron to Demonstrate Healthcare Healthcare Content Indexing Framework which enables hospitals medical groups and health insurers to deliver indexed content via the Web MainLettZone MainRightZone EEEE L_Sz ee 7 What are the symptoms P ff t e
157. 00 NET User Manual Version 7 5 486 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors eWebEditPro XML Toolbar Content Comment BE LABRAS Oo YeR ALANA E Apply Style Normal BIU AA rh nbp TM j fy k a iC e Wiki I HH III Tal gi ul gi Ii I Hl NOTE Your choice of editors only affects the main HTML content editor It does not affect other screens which use eWebEdit400 such as the Task Description Setting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users Each Web server that hosts Ektron CMS400 NET has two editor options one for clients that run Windows and another for clients using Macintosh Your system administrator determines the editor options in the site s web config file using the following settings lt appSettings gt lt EditControlWin may be either ContentDesigner or eWebEditPro gt lt add key ek_EditControlWin value eWebEditPro gt lt add key ek_EditControlMac value ContentDesigner gt lt appSettings gt The table below contains information about both editors Operating Web Config file key Possible editor key values System Windows ek EditControlWin Anam ips cContentDesigner use to load eWebEdit400 content designes use to load eWebEdit400 The following sections explain how to use the eWebEditPro XML and eWebEdit400 editors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 487 Introduction to eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 is a browser based
158. 014 ltem Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 191 Working with HTML Forms SS Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Dowr Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox First item is Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that not a Valid prompts the user to respond to the field An example of such text for a list of Selection states would be Select a state If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Customizing a Standard List You can customize any list of predefined choic
159. 10 The Finish screen appears Dragging and Dropping Assets into a Mapped Network Drive Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 241 Using the Document Management System Use Windows Explorer to drag and drop folders or assets into the mapped network folder WARNING If a Windows folder has more than 1500 files Windows Explorer may time out while trying to open it To remedy this problem divide your files in that folder into several child folders 1 Open Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the left half of the screen Open the folder that contains the folders or assets you want to upload to Ektron CMS400 NET Open a second instance of Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the right half of the screen In that window open My Network Places Under that find the mapped network folder you created in Setting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 239 A login screen appears Enter your Ektron CMS400 NET username and password Click OK Open the Ektron CMS400 NET folder into which you want to upload assets or folders From the left window drag and drop assets or folders into the mapped network folder If any of the assets being uploaded is not supported an error message appears An error occurred copying some or all of the selected files However all supported assets are uploaded See Also Supported Types of Assets on page 223 Viewing Managed Files in a Mapped Network Drive If you want to view indi
160. 16 2006 5 25 35 PM lt Date gt lt User id 1 member false gt lt Name gt lt FirstName gt Application lt FirstName gt lt LastName gt Administrator lt LastName gt lt Name gt lt Username gt admin lt Username gt lt Email gt lt Email gt lt User gt form data id 2350 gt lt ektpol111147612046505 gt Navigation 2 lt ektpol11147812046505 gt lt Data gt lt SubmittedData gt lt SubmittedData gt lt Date value 2006 05 16T16 48 22 55 16 2006 4 48 22 PM lt Date gt lt Data form data id 245 gt lt ektpo111147812046505 gt Everything 4 lt ektpo111147812046505 gt Exporting a Form s Raw Data After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 197 2 Click the Export Reports button aN 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 203 Working with HTML Forms 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Viewing Form Information You can view e information about a form e information about a form s properties Viewing a Form s Information After
161. 22 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains e The Insert Table Menu on page 723 e The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 725 e The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 727 e The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 728 The Insert Table Menu You access the Insert Table menu by clicking on the Insert Table button while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears E Insert Table Tc Insert Aow Inert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells sa Menge ells Split Cell a Table Properties sta Cell Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 723 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Insert Table Inserts a new table where the Creating a Table on page 720 cursor is currently resting Insert Row Creates a new table row above the Adding or Removing Rows and row in which the cursor is currently Columns on page 731 resting Insert Column Creates a new table column next to Adding or Removing Rows and the column in which t
162. 27 Importing Office DOCUMENTS ccceseceeeseeeeeneeseeseeseeeneesees 230 Working with Managed Files csssscesssseeeeseeseeeseneneeeees 253 ASSET ONY idasvestneaeees ra tatcenundocnedenepblvawtsaweisenentanntdacaeueesedanaeye 258 PSS Gi Ot Siipatisaninnsa snietesmmeueeaeuaian saree tacentaapetesnetenanereteaeaisiens 259 Working with Calendals ccsscssseeseeeees 261 Understanding Calendars scccccsssseeeesesseeseesseeeeeeneeesees 263 Accessing the View Calendar SCreen cccssseesesseeeeenees 264 Viewing a Calendar cccccssssececesseeseeenseesensseeeseenseeseonseees 269 Tips on Viewing a Calendar ccccccsssseecssesseesceeseeseeeenees 271 Adding a Calendar Event ccccssssseesceesseseeenseessenseesseeees 273 Viewing a Calendar Event cccsssscccsssseesceesseeseceseesseeenees 280 Editing Calendar Events ccccssseeccsssseeecseseeescesseesseeneeeeees 282 Deleting Calendar EVeNts s scccsssseesseesseeseesseeeseenneesees 284 Managing TaskS scccscsssssssssssesessssesseeessees LOO Creating a Task via the Task Folder sssessssseeceeseeseees 287 Creating a Task from the Web Site cccssssessssseeeesseeseees 299 Creating a Task via the Content Folder ccssssseseeseeeees 299 Ny 2 TISK SEE 300 CIRC a TIS K aAA AA 305 Adding Comments to TaSKS ccccccssssssec
163. 3 Viewing a Task Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 288 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators and users given permission to create tasks only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view it To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Content Folder oe a TS 6 Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea Open the folder that contains the content Click the content associated with the task Click the Tasks tab The page lists all tasks assigned to the content Select a task From the view task page you can add a comment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 306 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 300 Managing Tasks 1 From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 Click the task you want to view 3 The View Task screen is displayed From here you can perform these tasks e Editing a Task on page 305 e Deleting a Task on page 309 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 306 See Also Task View Options on page 301 Sorting
164. 4 Close the editor without saving changes Tabs on the Edit Content Screen Content Insert content For more information about using Ektron CMS400 NET s editors see Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 486 Summary Enter or edit the content summary See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 73 Metadata Enter or edit the content metadata Note All required metadata must be added before content can be checked in or submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 51 Editing HTML Content Comment Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing content The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens Use this tab to set a future publication date time In order to be published this content must be approved and reach its publication date time See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an End Date on Content on page 68 Web Alerts See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Templates This content s folder must have a default template It can also have additional templates assigned When content is created the default template is automatically assigned to it If you want to change the template assig
165. 400 NET Administrator updated by membership as well Manual Section Managing Content as regular users Folders gt Community Folders HTML Content HTML content Adding HTML Content on page 48 HTML Form Survey HTML Form Poll or Survey Working with HTML Forms on page 156 Smart Form Smart Form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms A EEDE Office Document e Working with Microsoft Office Docu i i 227 Managed file any sup ments on page ported type e Working with Managed Files on Multimedia file any sup page cee ported type Multiple DMS Several Office documents Adding Documents Using the Multiple Documents managed files multimedia files DMS Documents Option on page 233 Collection Collection Working with Collections on page 424 View Menu The View Menu provides the following functions All types Displays all content types of selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 33 Viewing a Folder HTML content Limits folder display to selected content tyoe For example choose View gt DMS HTML Form Survey Document and see only managed DMS Document assets in the folder other content types which includes Office e Suppressed Documents Man This is especially helpful if the folder has aged Files Multime a lot of items and you are looking for dia Open Office only one type of content Note that th
166. 400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 291 Managing Tasks SS Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View Task screen circled below view Task Task Title testing self assignment Assigned To a jedit Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Completed Due Date 23 Jun 2004 Start Date 11 Jun 2004 Description testing self assignment Comments Date Time Added By Caomments 4 Click the Save button E If email notification is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting Content for the Task When you click Select Content from the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 292 Managing Tasks Select Content Please select content by navigating the folders below Path 4 im Human Resources i Marketing B Products im Support B Syndication C Contact Ektron Greeting C Home Page Content C Introducing the RC Redstar C new content You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select a piece of content to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the content w Support i Syndication contact Ektron C Greeting 3 Press the Save button fy Ektron CMS400 NET User Ma
167. 400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 492 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only i i Ctrl l Make selected text italic Italic Ul Ctrl U Make selected text underlined Underscore Apply strikethrough to selected text For A Strikethrough example Here s semetedt x Superscript Make selected text appear smaller and above text line Make selected text appear smaller and X Subscript j below text line Relative Font Size Change the relative font size Your Webmaster determines which relative font sizes are available Change the font size in points Your Webmaster determines which font sizes in points are available Change the font color Change the background color of the selected content 10pt i Font Size Font Color TE Background Color i Change the font style Your Webmaster Verdana determines which fonts are available Font Style Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 493 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is _ 2 Number not numbered assign this line 1 e numbered assign a
168. 400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 555 Working with Table Cells Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 719 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 730 eWebEdit400 also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell on page 558 e Deleting a Cell on page 559 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 560 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 561 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 562 e Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 564 e Splitting a Cell on page 565 e Merging Two Cells on page 566 e Word Wrap on page 567 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 568 e Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes on page 572 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells selecting Cells to Modify e Modifying a Single Cell on page 557 e Modifying Several Cells on page 557 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 556 Working with Table Cells Modifying a Single Cell If you want to make any of the modifications described in this section to a single cell follow these steps 1
169. 400 underscores in red each word that s not in the dictionary Then it stops at the first misspelled word and displays your options for fixing the problem Spell checking mode Misspelled words are indicated with a red wave underscore ___ Finis At ektron Medical we focus on EEE people with some of the most complex conditions Some examples are he ting e disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying o a _ f Ignore evices pharmaceutical and biotechnology to make a mea ants lives With the latest technologies in medical scie A Chanre Manali new project management starter LA Addi t ide solutions that make a difference in people s lives Our successful with Ektron s ag u a a a The Spelling Options Option Use this option if you want to One or more similar Replace highlighted word with one from the list To do this click the correctly spelled words correct word Ignore Ignore All Don t want to change the highlighted word nor do you want to add it to the dictionary If the word appears repeatedly in the content Ignore All also appears Use this to skip all occurrences of the word in this spell check session Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 503 Checking Spelling Option Use this option if you want to Change Manually Retype the highlighted word If the word appears repeatedly in the content the following message asks if you want to change all occurr
170. 454 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 455 Click the radio button next to Library Asset 3 Click the Next button The Add New Item screen appears Enter a title for the library asset that will be on the menu Click Browse Library The library screen opens In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission 8 Select a library asset and click the Insert button 1 9 The Add New ltem screen reappears 10 Click the Save button H Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or the Menus module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 458 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 453 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 454 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 455 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink Click the Next button The Add New Item screen is displayed ae w hy Complete the fields as needed in Bc Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL of the external hyperlink For example www example com 6 Click the Save button H NOTE When adding an External Hyperl
171. 62 Assigning Cell Spacing on page 763 726 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cell s appearance Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Cancel Borders M Use Default Color f Mot Specified Border Color C Percent ford wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 727 Field s Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Word Wrap Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Background Color Background Image Use Default Color Border Color Lets you specify If the cell spans two or more rows If the cell spans two or more columns The minimum cell width Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell The alignment of data across a cell The alignment of data up and down within a cell The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the table s background color A background image for the cell Apply the table border color to this cell border Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border The Table Cont
172. 64 Using Bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark text or image Click the Bookmark button Mig 3 The Bookmark dialog box appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp 949 _ Bookmark Bookmark name October_2000_minutes Add elete Rename 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image Click the Hyperlink button jg 7 The Hyperlink dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 765 Using Bookmarks mo z selectii OO OoOO O select link this pagel October 2000_rminutes this pagel Top 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 767 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 766 Using Bookmarks Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears Hyperlink Information 0 Tee Http i Cat Link ipa SSS Bookmark r Test Same Window
173. 7 5 59 Working with HTML Forms Used with calendar Used with text field Characteristics of Valid Response A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Note Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places te 93 A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Note Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 A whole number from 0 to 100 A response is required a a where a is one or more characters a a where a is one or more characters A response is required Several email addresses Each address s format is a a where ais one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Several email addresses Each address s format is a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon A response is required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits If 9 a dash appears after the fifth NNNNN nnnn 5 nnnnn or 9 digits If 9 a dash appears after the fifth nnnnn nnnn A response is required N Social Security US Social Security US required
174. 93 e delete a sent message See Delete a Message on page 396 Viewing a Message To view a message s details click the message s subject link The details of a message include who the message is from to whom it was sent the subject date sent and body of the message Actions you can take from the message details screen include e compose a new message See Compose a New Message in the Workarea on page 394 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 393 My Workspace reply to a message See Reply to a Message on page 394 forward a message See Forward a Message on page 395 Moving to the Next or Previous message See Moving to the Next or Previous Message on page 395 print a message See Print a Message in the Workarea on page 396 delete the message See Delete a Message on page 396 Compose a New Message in the Workarea Clicking the Compose a Message launches the Send a Message screen To compose a message follow these steps 1 ot 2 oO eS SS 9 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Click the Compose a Message button 4 The Send a Message screen appears Click the Browse Users link Select the people to which you want to send the message Add a subject to the Subject field Add text to the body of the message in the editor Click the Send button 2 Reply to a Message
175. A sample calendar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 261 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Bal E a Ee 5 mE 6 Tal z Edel ALIM Trade ALM Trade ALM Trade show in show in show in Miami Miami Miami Ta 6 11 Ed S 12 E E 13 Ga S 14 Ed 6 Company meeting al 6 18 Fal Sl 19 Gal S 20 Ed S 21 Gal S The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics e Understanding Calendars on page 263 e Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 264 e Viewing a Calendar on page 269 e Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 271 e Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 e Understanding Event Types on page 277 e Viewing a Calendar Event on page 280 e Editing Calendar Events on page 282 e Deleting Calendar Events on page 284 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 262 Working with Calendars Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS400 NET supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar Each date can display several events Only system administrators can create a calendar Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 Your ability to view add edit and remove calendar events is determined by
176. Blog Folder Properties The following table shows the fields on the Blog s Properties tab To edit these properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 319 Blogs from the Workarea navigate to the blog folder click View gt Folder Properties then the Edit Properties button L from the Web site log in navigate to the blog right click the mouse and select Properties When you are finished click Save fq To learn about the other tabs on the Properties screen see e Metadata on page 321 e Blog Subjects on page 322 e Web Alerts on page 326 e Smart Forms on page 326 e The Blog Roll on page 327 e Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Breadcrumbs Da Visibility Choose whether the site is a private blog or public Public Anyone who visits the site is able to view the blog Private A site visitor must log into the site to be able to view the blog This could include membership users CMS400 users or both Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site blog It only appears if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true The ID number of the blog This number is assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET and cannot be changed Note ID only appears when viewing the Properties screen It does not appear while editing Ektron CMS4
177. CommunityDocuments server control see the Developer Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Community Platform Server Controls gt CommunityDocuments Server Control Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents You can add subfolders in the Documents area to help you sort assets and content into categories The subfolders represent a taxonomy of the items contained in the documents area To add subfolders follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 380 My Workspace 2 Click the Manage Folder Button 4 3 The Add Folder box appears 4 Enter a Name for the folder 5 Click the Add button Add 6 When the page refreshes it opens to the newly added folder Documents zi Workspace Test Folder 0 No subcategory exists B Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Documents Sometimes it is necessary to change the name of folder in the My Workspace gt gt Documents area To accomplish this follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Click the folder s Edit button yz This button is located to the left of the folder s title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 381 My Workspace Documents Workspace 3 The Edit Folder box appears Documents 4 Change the name of the folder 5 Click the
178. Declining Content on page 87 Asset Workflow An asset proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content A diagram is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 258 Using the Document Management System Check In Edit Approval Chain Publish to Web site See Also IHH e Approving Assets on page 259 e Adding Assets to Collections and Menus on page 259 Approving Assets Assets are placed into the approval chain like other types of content For more information see Approving Declining Content on page 87 Adding Assets to Collections and Menus You can add an asset to a collection or menu as you would any other type of content For more information see Working with Collections on page 424 and Working with Menus on page 444 Asset Reports Ektron CMS400 NET provides several reports that track assets by status Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 259 Using the Document Management System Report Displays assets in this status For more information see CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Approvals Report Approvals Requiring your approval Checked In Content Checked in CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked In Report Checked Out Content Checked out CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report New Content New that is creat
179. Document Menu Options Depending on a document s status your role and position in the document s approval chain any of the following options may be available when you display the dropdown menu for an Office document BPG CMS5 Personnel F ale Sa view in Microsoft Office H 4 View Properties AI Save As F Edit in Microsoft Office ai Edit Properties z Check Out and Save As J Submit J Delete See Also Dropdown Menu Options on page 37 Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents e Prerequisites Your computer has MS Office Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 228 Using the Document Management System Internet Explorer to work with Office documents within Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE While you cannot edit within Ektron CMS400 NET using Firefox you can save an Office document to your computer edit it then drag and drop the updated version to Ektron CMS400 NET e Verify the following settings for every Office document type that you work with Open Windows Explorer Click Tools gt Folder Options gt File Types Click an Office file type you work with for example DOC Microsoft Word Document Click the Advanced button Change the checkboxes at the bottom of the screen so they look like this _ Confirm open after download d Always show extensio Browse in same window Click OK e Problems can arise if you try to open a document created with Office 2007 an
180. ET User Manual Version 7 5 779 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature lt _ e E http 192 168 0 219 editorName J O x E E Ean EEE aE ROMER TCM OnE STS TREE New Content Related Content has 198 Wiki_Example Folder Title Bread crumbs Target Frame Parent Window _parent e Use the New Content tab to create a new content item into which you will add information later The new content item will appear when a site visitor clicks the link text If you want to place the new content item in the folder that contains the text you are editing do nothing To place new content in a different folder click Change and navigate to that folder NOTE Membership users do not have an option to assign a folder The new content is saved to the folder that contains the content to which the wiki is assigned You can also edit the Title and the Target Frame To learn about target frames see Changing the Destination Window on page 767 e Use the Related Content tab to link to an existing content item If you click this tab Ektron CMS400 NET uses the selected text to search the Web site All content with that text then appears on the screen Each content item s title appears followed by its summary Click the radio button next to the content you want to link to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 780 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature Add Edit Wiki Link Total 69 Fage
181. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 252 Using the Document Management System 4 Ektron CMS400 NET s folders appear The folder that contains the Word document is the default folder Select that or any other Ektron CMS400 NET folder 5 Inthe Save as Type field select Web page htm html or Web Page filtered htm html See Also Saving an Office Document as a Web Page on page 250 Click the Save button 7 You may be warned about formatting features not supported in HTML Press Continue 8 Adialog prompts you to enter your Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password 9 The Office document is saved as an html file into Ektron CMS400 NET 10 Close the document and exit from Office The status of the document depends on the approval chain and the user who signed in when the mapped network folder was created e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In I Working with Managed Files Ektron CMS400 NET can also track and manage any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and ZIP You use a host application to create the file For example you might use Photoshop to create a jpg file Next save it to Ektron CMS400 NET using any method explained in Importing Office Documents on page 230 While importing add supporting i
182. Enter report criteria using the following table as a reference ee e Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Specify the format to display the report Select Legacy Specify the version of the form or poll for which to Report get a report Using this option allows you to see the results from previous polls and forms 6 Click the Get Result button to display the report Display Formats The submitted form data can be viewed in any of these formats e Table with Totals on page 198 e Bar Chart on page 165 e Summary of Selected Choices on page 199 e Table of Values on page 200 e List of Submitted Values on page 201 e Submitted Data as XML on page 202 Table with Totals The table of values shows the following information for each completed form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 198 Working with HTML Forms a checkbox that lets you delete the response an internal identification number of the response the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears date response was submitted The name of each field on the survey under each field name is the submitted response for the
183. Faced with the challenge of reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to roll out new Internet and Intranet sites and rich Web applications developers need every advantage tilted in their favor to help their organizational Web strategies succeed NOTE You can also click the content title to access the View screen After you select the content you have the following options Your options depend on your permissions and the status of the content Button or Description For more information see Tab Properties Content View the content s properties Properties on page 45 tab Properties Content tab View Content Displays content pe Summary Edit Summary Edit content s summary Adding a Content Summary tab on page 73 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 43 Viewing Content Button or Description For more information see Tab Metadata tab Edit Metadata Edit content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page Comment View Comment View comments on changes made when editing content This comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Use it to help distinguish one version from another Tasks tab Add edit tasks Add or edit tasks for this content Managing Tasks on page 286 Web Alerts Add edit Web Add or edit Web Alerts for this Ektron CMS400 NET Alerts content Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature fat Templates Add ed
184. Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 380 3 Click the Add Asset button 4 The Add Asset box appears Add Assets Drag and drop documents below 5 Drag and drop an asset in the Add Asset box 6 A status box appears and shows the files being uploaded 7 Once the upload is complete the page refreshes and the asset appears in the file list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 384 My Workspace Documents G ea haen aae lataa eras al Penal Sa aea anal en aas Workspace Docu No subcategory exists sample this is a sample content block under the documents folder Server Control Review Creating HTML Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents To create HTML content in My Workspace gt gt Documents follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select a folder where the content will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 380 3 Click the Add HTML Content button limp 4 The Add HTML Content window appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 385 My Workspace Edit Content in Folder Workspace Tes natish 0 8 1 M Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Seay eee ae B WELLE aajo O ca scr sT AeA mago il Ri Appl Style
185. Hi Asset Management 11 oo EIBlogging Tools 11 Poll and Survey 56 i Multimedia 0 EiMembership 0 MSearch 0 Security 11 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 165 Working with HTML Forms Combined Combines the Data Table and the Bar Age range 4 responses Chart 18 21 50 B 22 25 25 Ei 26 30 o 31 or over 25 M IMPORTANT You cannot chart data that is entered into a text box For example if one of the choices in a poll is Other and the survey has a text box for site users to enter additional information the text in the box is not charted However the fact that the a user chose Other is charted Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 166 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Po Website Email Phone Era State Province Country Comments po Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown list of choices You can learn how to create such a screen by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form e The Form Toolbar Options on page 168 e Inserting Form Fields on page 169 e Form Validation on page 172 Ektro
186. Hyperlink Eha Remove Hyperlink Library i Upload Files a Translate Add Comment Picture 7 Image Editor Table Edit in Microsoft Word Change information about a hyperlink Remove a hyperlink Insert a library file Upload any external files such as images to the server Translate content into another language Insert a comment into the content Insert a picture Edit an image Insert or edit a table Edit content in Microsoft Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Using Hyperlinks on page 68 Removing a Hyperlink on page 3 Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 Moving an Image to the Server on page 685 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Translating Content gt Using Machine Translation Adding Comments to Content on page 95 Inserting Images on page 671 Editing Images on page 687 Introduction to Tables on page 719 Editing in Microsoft Word on page 668 636 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Switches to Data Design Mode Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designer kf Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer f
187. If you have edit permission edit appears on each content item s personalization menu circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 369 Personalizing a Web Page MainRightZone Arthritis Health Center Hews 7v ai eit Can Arthritis Be Prevented Altherigkh it manu nat ha narrihla te 4 Click edit next to any content item 5 The editor zone appears Your system administrator determines its location on the page The fields in the editor zone vary depending on the type of content you are working with Editor Zone Close Modify the properties of the Web Part then click OK or Apply to apply your changes Content Title Home Layout Chrome State one VWlainZone ka Zone Index 6 You can replace the content item with another of the same type In the above illustration you can replace the content block Home To do so click the button to the right of the title When you do a popup window prompts you to select a different item of the same type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 370 Personalizing a Web Page Editor Z F ie ny A CMS400 Select Content Microsoft Internet E a m x Modify the properties of the ot click OK or Apply to ape Select Content Lene Degen epey Deen Danag Dea fee Dogan Depag Depag Danag ayey Doge Depay Degan Depen Depan Dogan Daneg Toney Tayag Dene De Seg Danan Day Content Title Home Layout Chrome State No
188. L of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 769 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the Hyperlink button B The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information OK Tee Http Cancel Link http Bookmark Text Target Frame Quick Link l selectlink 000 o 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears 4 Click an item from the list to select it 5 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 767 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 770 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the New Hyperlink button The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Test Target Frame Quick Link select link 3 Click in the Link field after nttpy Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example
189. MS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 245 Using the Document Management System The status of a document saved to a mapped network folder depends on the approval chain and the user who signed in when the mapped network folder was created e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In I Also if the content s folder requires metadata or a taxonomy category which has not been entered its status is Checked In I Deleting an Office Document NOTES You must have delete permissions for the folder that contains the document Permissions are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting documents See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 59 To delete an Office document follow these steps Navigate to the Workarea s Content folder Open the folder that contains the document Place the cursor over the document NY Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the document and click A dropdown menu appears 5 Click Delete BPG CMS Personnel 4 View in Microsoft Office Hi gl View Properties Save As Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 246 Using the Document Management System NOTE If you do not see Delete either you lack permission to delete the content or its stat
190. My Workspace 3 A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to delete the comment Click OK 5 The comment is removed from the list Colleagues You can associate yourself with other people in the community by adding them as colleagues This allows you to create a network of colleagues and share information with them Once a colleague is added you can visit their profile page and see all their details including their colleagues You can then search through their colleagues list to find people you Know and add them to your own colleagues list Thus growing your social network and facilitating additional information sharing e Ektron CMS400 NET users can manage colleagues from the Workarea or the Web site Membership users can only manage colleagues through the Web site Managing Existing Colleagues on page 401 e View Pending Colleagues on page 410 e Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 411 Colleagues in the Workarea You can manage your colleagues in the Workarea by clicking the My Workspace folder button and expanding the Colleagues items From this area you can work with e Colleagues your colleagues See Also Managing Existing Colleagues on page 401 e Pending Colleagues users who have sent you a colleague request See Also View Pending Colleagues on page 410 e Sent Colleagues Requests colleagues requests you ve sent that have not been accepted See Also Viewing Sent
191. Name or Email See Advanced User Searching on page 406 Performing a Directory Search The Directory tab in a Community Search allows a user to filter the list of users based on the selection of a letter in the alphabet For example John wants to find all users whose first name begin with the letter S John navigates to the CommunitySearch control on his site clicks the Directory tab and selects First Name from the Sort By list Then he selects the letter S from list of letters Next the control displays a list of users who name begins with the letter S lirectory Basic Search Advanced Search Lhck one of the ophons below to filter the User Directory anfa ep EF EEEo ENE sors Frane Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 404 My Workspace Performing a Basic User Search A Basic search is the easiest to perform and returns the widest array of results A Basic search is based on the following criteria e Email e Display Name e First Name e Last Name e Custom User Properties these properties define information about a user beyond the standard Ektron CMS400 NET user properties See Also The Administrator Manual section gt Custom User Properties e Personal Tags tags are keywords that are associated with a user or community group in CMS400 See Also The Administrator Manual section gt Community Management gt Tags e Group Name e Group Description e Group Tags ta
192. Paste Text Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 658 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Launches the Search and Replace dialog Finding and box The dialog searches for and lets Replacing Text on you optionally replace text that you page 659 specify Find next occurrence of the string Finding and Replace g Find Next entered into the Find What field of the Replacing Text on Search and Replace dialog box page 659 E und Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it neg never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action l Seanas Begin spell checker Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 664 Ba Spell Check manual Turn on or off spell check as you type Checking Spelling feature as You Type on page 663 Spell Check automatic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 635 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only we Edit
193. Postal Code Canada Postal Code Canada required Social Insurance Number Canada Social Insurance Number Canada Required Telephone number US and Canada Telephone number US and Canada required Working with HTML Forms Used with calendar Used with text field Characteristics of Valid Response Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required ana nan where ais an alphabetic character and n is numeric ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A response is required A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is required A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnannnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required A web site address Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 598 Working with HTML Forms Characteristics of Valid Response Used with Used with text field calendar field The International Standard Book Number ISBN is a 10 digit number that uniquely identifies books and book like products published internationally Every ISBN consists of ten digits When printed the ISBN number is pr
194. Properties from the menu 2 NY amp Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Basic colors EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 753 Working with Table Cells 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges oo mm Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 754 Working with Table Cells Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell soan more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will soan rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties fr
195. S language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 64 Scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling lets you control when a version of content becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content on a predetermined date and time When used together a start and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long a version of content is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to a content version upon reaching its end date How Does It Work When you create or modify content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century ina month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale The Ektron Windows Service manages these changes to your site See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing your CMS400 System gt Ektron Windows Service This topic is explained through the following subtopics e Setting a Start Date on page 66 e Setting an End Date on Content on page 68 e Setting Archive Options on page 69 Ektron CMS400 NET User Man
196. S400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 125 Searching the Workarea Search criterion Description Title The title of the content You can enter a partial word For example entering Part yields the following results e Multi Hospital Nurse Executive Participation e Ektron Partners and Customers You can enter more than one word or phrase as long as they are in the correct sequence The content s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab Date Created The file s creation date You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all content with that creation date that satisfy the other criteria Date Modified The last date when the file was modified You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that edit date that satisfy the other criteria Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content This is taken from the Last Name field on the User Information screen The search returns all items last edited by that user that satisfy the other criteria Status The content status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 Note Although you can search for content by any status the search results display only the most recently published version If a version has never been approved nothing appears Custom Fields Custom fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or e
197. The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server Files Waiting for Upload Files for Upload Upload Now Papimage 002 ogg piece Laia Cancel Woodgrove Re About Estimated Upload Time 00 00 1 2 If you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at that time Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 669 Editing in Microsoft Word Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button E is disabled lf a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem Edit in ford WARNING This content contains tags that Microsoft Word may not recognize Microsoft Word may corrupt the content introduce invalid tags or may not display it at all Do you want to continue You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 670 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you want the image to appear and click the Insert Picture button l When you click the button one
198. The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Permanent Link If you click this link a new screen appears The new screen indicates the permanent link to this blog post As long as the blog post is active within Ektron CMS400 NET you can access it via the URL in the browser s address bar Most blog pages show only recent posts After a post is moved off the blog s front page it is still accessible via this link Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of comments for a post When this link is clicked a new page of comments for the post appears Also on the page is a form to add comments about the post The comments only appear if a site visitor has logged in or authentication is not required for blog comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 343 Blogs So Editor Information The person who created or last edited the blog post Post Time and Date The date and time a blog post was created or last edited Blog Posts in the Workarea Viewing a blog post in the Workarea is similar to viewing content in the Workarea Navigate to the folder that contains the blog Next in the View Posts in Blog screen click the title of the blog post Below is an example of a viewing a blog post in the Workarea view Posts in Blog Blog 2 oy New jo View b Delete Action ne E gt what is Guillain Barre Syndrome GES
199. The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content To add a hyperlink to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file Images For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 131 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy an image to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 141 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 151 Library Folder Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 143 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 145 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with a new or correct version Overwriting images minimizes disk space and the number of c
200. To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow R to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 6 Click Save 1 Understanding Event Types Your system administrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates If you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwanted events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps 1 Add a calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 277 Working with Calendars Location i One Time Recurring Start End Wednesday April 06 2005 E Ee Wednesday April 06 2005 E Ee Event Will Occur Event times Every Day e Every selected weekday start 12 00 AM Every selected date of ever f Manh l l End 12 00 AM Every first selected week
201. Types ior All Types HT fil Content Office Documents Managed Files Multimedia Open Office LILI 6 Content items in the selected folder appear below any subfolders You can click any subfolder to display its content 7 Check all content you want to add from any single screen to the menu WARNING If you check items on a screen then proceed to another screen before clicking the Add button the items on the first screen are not added to the menu 8 Click the Add button Fr 9 The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content 10 To access the Edit Menu Item screen for the new content hover the cursor over the item then click Edit from the popup menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 457 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 11 The Edit Menu Item screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 12 Continue to add new items to the menu as needed Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 453 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page
202. Verdana Z2 1 Opt 3 3 2 F a A nh RS AG Fa an ne We W I ili Il To learn more about using eWebEdit400 see these topics e Toolbar Buttons on page 490 Copying from Other Applications on page 497 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 498 e Checking Spelling on page 503 e Working with Images on page 506 e Using Bookmarks on page 517 e Using Hyperlinks on page 521 e Inserting email Links on page 527 e Working with HTML on page 529 e Working with Tables on page 531 e Working with HTML Forms on page 574 NOTE You cannot use eWebEdit400 to create or edit Smart Form configurations If you try to Ektron CMS400 NET begins to install eWebEditPro XML If you complete the installation you will use eWebEditPro XML to create and edit Smart Form configurations but use eWebEdit400 to perform other editing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 489 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below ao 6 Fi amp ee W Eee al y design _mode Normal B Z7 U x X Verdana 2 10pt r A IE BSO 1 BERS H The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables Th Wa iii I I Il Il All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which
203. Version 7 5 348 Blogs Deleting a Blog Post NoTE Tobe able to delete a blog post you must have Delete permission on the blog s Standard Permissions screen The following steps explain how to delete a blog post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To delete a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 From the menu click the Delete gt Posts 3 The Delete Blog Post screen appears Delete Contents of Folder Life Story ID Status Date Modified Last Editor _ Title F The Story of My Life 395 Approved 2 1 2006 5 16 58 PM Administrator F Writing a Masterpiece 396 Approved 2 1 2006 1 06 34 PM Administrator 4 Click the check box next to each post you want to delete To select all posts click the check box next to Title 5 Click the Delete Contents button ff A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 349 Blogs 7 Click OK to delete the selected posts Blog Comments WARNING Do not confuse blog comments with history comments You can add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Blog comments allow site visitors to interact with a blo
204. WebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 784 Section 508 Compliance Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 645 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key Eh 2 A menu appears Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted Menus Cut Cnr 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all toolbar menus available to yOu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 785
205. YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2008 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 2 0 What s New in the 7 5 Release What s New in the 7 5 Release e The Document Management feature has been fundamentally improved The way you create edit and perform all other functions with assets has been changed For example Internet Explorer users no longer need to deal with a client installation file Another new feature is the ability to drag and drop assets into a mapped network folder Users of this method do not need to install Ektron CMS400 NET client software nor learn how to use it For full details of the enhanced feature see Using the Document Management System on page 222 e After signing into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site or the Workarea and clicking the triangle circled below any conten
206. You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 184 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices You can allow the site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list of choices and the appearance of the list To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Place a choices field s onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 185 Choices Field Descriptive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text Lis Allow selection f Onl one More than one A selection is required ltem List Working with HTML Forms Field Field Field Custom Appearance f Vertical List Horizontal List i List Box value Change Check tem to be selected by deta Move Up Move Down Remove Ok Fields on the Choices Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 186 Working with HTML Forms s sl Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text d
207. a or the Workarea button in the content s floating toolbar The Workarea appears 3 The following illustrates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your system administrator determines which screen appears for you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 15 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Smart Desktop For admin ern Pa A poe en al ee a Poe oe AE pi ore mere ane re Tre Waal 5 1 Tasks a Reports H Messaging L Content Currently Checked Out 8 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 Forum Topics and Posts 0 i oe Content Reviews 1 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 16 The Workarea and Smart Desktop CMS400 NET view of your Web site You do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS400 NET s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below gt 927 768 G 2 72 COMES a4 Content The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 17 The Workarea and Smart Desktop http localhost Langlype 1033 CMS400 Workarea for admin Microsoft Inter g Z Smart Deskt S Tasks
208. a form is created you can view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps Access the folder that contains the form you want to view Click the form you want to view The View Form screen displays Click the Form Properties tab Ye ey S The following table explains the information on the screen e Description Extended description for the form Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 158 Form Submissions The maximum number of times a user can submit the form This is typically used with polls and surveys to limit one user s influence over the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 204 Working with HTML Forms Assign Task to Users and groups to whom a task will be automatically assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 195 Content Properties Displays the properties of the form s content Title of content associated with form Content Title Note The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content Status The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time when content will go live on Web site if set for future date End Date Date and time when content will be removed from Web site if set for future date Date Created Date and time when content
209. able e ifthe table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table e if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible e you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 752 e make sure the image does not obscure the table s legibility See Steps for Inserting a Table s Background Image To insert a table background image follow these steps 1 Place the cursor within the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 549 Working with Tables Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab oY a D N In the Background Image field click the ellipsis button J to open the Library From there select an image for the table s background See Also Library Folder on page 131 Table Wizard OE aise E Table Properties Dimensions Width 411px px Height 96px px Yo EYT m O Background i Alignment k Cell Spacing 3 Cell Padding ce Background Image Table SS O E O E 6 Click Update Deleting a Background Image Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab wD z Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 550 Working with Tab
210. able Its main advantage is that users are not required to install an ActiveX control file on their computer For more information see Introduction to eWebEdit400 on page 488 Administrators who want to learn how validation is handled with this editor should read the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Validating with eWebEdit400 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 ii What s New in the 7 5 Release e New for 7 5 2 The View Content Difference feature has been enhanced It no longer requires you to install a file on your computer and its display changed For more information see Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 e New for 7 5 2 The options for working with checked out content have changed slightly In 7 5 2 if you are not the user who checked out the content if you are a member of Administrators user group you can either force a check in or request one If you request Ektron CMS400 NET emails the user who checked out content asking him to check it in if you are not a member of Administrators user group but have edit permission for the content s folder you can request a check in if you are a not a member of Administrators user group and lack edit permission for the content s folder you can only view the content e For 7 5 2 Entering start and end times for a calendar event is now optional If the user does not select them they are set to 12 00 a m and 11 55
211. able of Contents What s New in the 7 5 Release csccscsssecsseeenecneeeneneeneees Securing Ektron CMS400 NET ccceseceseeeeseceeeeeneeeeees i Security ChekliS isisisi inanin i Additional Information ccccececeeeeceeeeceeeeceseeeueeeceeeeeeeeseeeaseeees ii Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET 1 What is a Content Block ssissisissiniisisaniesaneiissiamnctiiesseseisiseieesvinnance 1 Working with Content from your Web Site cccssssesseeeeees 2 Types f Content esisiini na 7 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET cccsseccsssseeeseeseenseesenees 8 GE COMEN ceraian aR 9 The Lifecycle of Content cccccsssseesseeseeeeeenseeseeesseesoeeneenees 10 Logging In and Out ccccceeseeeseeeeseeenseeenseeensesensenenseees 11 Fe NS evinin EARE 11 Logging into the Sample Web Site ccccssseeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeees 11 Site PIC y Oi encarta eet 13 Logging Out of the Sample Site ccccceessseseeeeeeeseeeeenseesenens 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 15 Accessing the Workarea cccsesscsesseeesseeesseeeseeeeaneeeaeeeeaneeseees 15 Understanding the Smart DeSktop ccccssssseeesseeseeeeeeneeeenens 17 Navigating Within the Smart DeSktop c cssssseessesseeseeees 20 Sending Instant Email secascinncicissendecdnapccnsedeamstiwicncaereuciraonsindans 25 Working with Folders and Content 28 Viewing a Fo
212. ach other moves the selected image in front of Move to Front the others nee If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the Move to Back others If text overlays an image move the image in front of the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 640 Toolbar Buttons If an image overlays text move the text in front of the image Text Direction Options The text direction menu options allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side T i i T alf a The vertical scroll bar appears on the alll Left Right Eoi right side of the window The vertical scroll bar appears on the left side of the window Right Left Edit Form Elements Toolbar See Inserting Form Fields on page 169 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 641 Toolbar Buttons Table Elements Toolbar Toolbar Description For more information see button Insert table Introduction to Ta
213. age Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink Anchor http ocalhost CMS400Developer WorkAree Existing Anchor None hal Link Text Type http w Target The values you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 519 If you want the destination page to appear In the same position within the browser window The new window replaces the current one If your page contains frames in the frame that contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display area replacing the frames Using Bookmarks Click this in the Target Frame field Same Window Note this is the default Parent Window Browser Window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 520 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word or phrase to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a content block see Using Bookmarks on page 517 For example if your Web page should include a link to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www ektron com When users see Ektron Web Site i
214. age 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse 2 Click Table Properties from the menu Eii Bopp Paste Select All Inzert Aor Inzert Column Delete Howes Delete Columns Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HT RAL View as HTML 3 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigning Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 742 Manipulating Your Table s Format table border Waris checked cell border lf you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 749 To assign a color to your table s border click the Border Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Color aceea aa
215. age 17 f Content Awaiting Approval O Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 z Form Submission Tasks 1 iew All Tasks Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assigned By Last Added Commi Blank Form Not Started Normal Not Specified Everyone E admin Not Specified es Content To Expire D Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 300 and Viewing a Task s History on page 310 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 616 Working with HTML Forms Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information me pe Task Form Submission Task Category Category Task type Form Submission Task Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission An email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 617 Working with HTML Forms e name e value submitted by user Viewing Form Reports See Viewing Form Report
216. age 286 Z O 4 1 Ifyou are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information You complete the form and make it available on your Web site 3 A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form 4 A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 195 Working with HTML Forms Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 iew All Tasks Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assigned By Last Added Commi Blank Form Wot Started Normal Not Specified Everyone admin Not Specified Fe Content To Expire 0 Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 300 and Viewing a Task s History on page 310 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information Fed
217. age 94 Creating Content The first step is to create content To create new content follow these steps Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as a SportsWriter 2 Create content as described in Adding HI ML Content on page 48 3 Click the Submit button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 91 Approving Declining Content 4 The content is placed into the approval chain The next user in the chain receives an email saying the content is ready for approval Request for content approval Ele Edt wew Tools Message Help H e A ea AA F From Webmaster yourcompanv com Dabe Friday May 03 2002 4 16 PM To SportsE ditor yourdomain com Subject Request for content approval The content Red Sox Win World Senes has been submitted for your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submitted content block on the Web site http 192 166 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Note You must loom and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor Editorln Chief Comment NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role in the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of changes in the content s st
218. ages via the Web site My Workspace is a component of the Community Platform This area allows you to manage your community information from the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 377 My Workspace Berg UU Dy canes hai a aan a a AU EEan iMy Workspace Ee Documents 6 Community Groups ae Favorites H Colleagues Pending Groups ae Journal SD Favorites Colleagues Pending Colleagues bam cent Colleaque SS i Requests _ Journal Message Board _ Inbox Sent Messages Photos The following features are included in My Workspace e Documents see Documents on page 379 e Community Groups see Community Groups on page 412 e Favorites see Favorites on page 415 e Colleagues see Colleagues on page 400 e Journal a Journal is a personal blog for a user See Blogs on page 312 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 378 Documents My Workspace Message Board see Message Board on page 397 Messaging see Messaging on page 390 Photos see Photos on page 417 The Documents area of My Workspace allows you to add assets and HTML content to Ektron CMS400 NET and associate it with your profile You can create subfolders to separate content by category Folders and files in the Documents area are separate from the Content folder structure and its files Assets and HTML content in this list have the same properties and actions available to t
219. ailable buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You can also click a button then click lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 649 Customizing Your Toolbar Rearranging the Items on a Menu 1 Click the button you want to move 2 Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps Place the cursor in the editor Right click the mouse A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option gt w pP Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the SE ME E g beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere els
220. an decline the request In this case the user who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Create or edt content Publish to Web site To help track content s position in this workflow Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a status to each content item The status determines what you can do with it and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the Web site For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 10 Logging In and Out Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS400 NET and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics e Prerequisites on page 11 e Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 11 e Site Preview on page 13 e Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 14 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS400 NET you need the following items before you can use tt e URL Web address of Ektron CMS400 NET Web site e Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and begin managing Web site content Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS400 NET sample site follow these steps 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Your system administrator provides this 2
221. an insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from e a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK e the Web server click the Select Server File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 677 Inserting Images Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then click OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML Image Explorer folde Select folder3 indes simlie ipg See Also e The Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 678 e Adjusting a Picture on page 679 e Pixels on page 680 e Setting a Border on page 680 e Aligning the Picture on page 681 e Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment on page 683 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 683 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 684 e The Options Button on page 684 The Picture Properties Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 678 Inserting Images You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box
222. ance hetween wark and nersonal lite Reina nart of ektron Medical means workinn with The options change depending your permissions your mode for example Add Content mode and the current state of the content Also each content item has its own menu So if a Web part zone contains three items you see three menus one in the top right corner of each item The following table describes Personalization menu options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 366 Personalizing a Web Page Button Name Description For more information see Minimize In personalization mode only display the Minimizing a Content Item on content title page 373 To a site visitor suppress the content Restore Undo minimize Minimizing a Content Item on page 373 Close Removes content item from its zone and To remove a content item from its places it in the page catalog From the zone click the close button circled page catalog the content item can be below on page 368 moved to any Web Part Zone See Also The Page Catalog on page 375 Delete Remove content item from its Web part Deleting Content on page 373 Zone Only appears for content you added Sale Edit replace with other content of the Editing Content on page 369 same type move content item to different Web part zone change its width and height Editing Sequence 1 Access the Web page that lets you personalize Your system administrator tells you how
223. ard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 220 Working with HTML Forms e Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the survey 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 161 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 162 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 163 10 Click the Next button 11 A screen indicates that you have entered basic information about the survey and should click the Done button to enter the survey
224. area Toolbar Buttons eee ie e Decline Declines an approval request submitted to you Clicking this button rejects changes and keeps the current version of content live on Web site You are prompted to enter a reason for the decline After you decline e The author who made the change is notified by email e The content is removed from the Approval Chain If the author edited content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option You may be asked to decline both a content change and a request to delete content Deletes selected item See Also Deleting Content on page 57 Delete Content Deletes multiple content items at once See Also Deleting Content on page 57 Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply XSLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area See Also Removing Applied XSLT on page 112 Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into content See Also Library Folder on page 131 Link Check Identifies content with a hyperlink to the current content You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Ima
225. aspects user input e The data type the default types are text URL whole number decimal number floating point number Floating point includes scientific notation so is appropriate for scientific numbers Decimals usually suffice for business numbers date calendars only e The field value has one of the following relationships with another field a number or an expression The default expressions are between two values either another field or a number that you specify less than equal to not equal to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 600 Working with HTML Forms maximum length usually for text responses NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation However the file that maintains custom validation is different for HTML forms it is siteroot workarea ContentDesigner ValidateSpace xml Your system administrator determines if a user can save the invalid data When the Custom Validation option is selected from the Validation field the Custom Validation screen area becomes active Custom Validation Data Type Condition Examples e The Data Type field is the value s basic type for example text number or URL e The Condition field displays the validation logic e The Examples drop down list shows validation expressions that you can apply to the fi
226. at are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Validation Tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 611 Field Descriptive Name Validation Message Working with HTML Forms Description Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 618 Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Custom See Custom Validation on page 599 Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion Use this field to customize it Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Data Style Tab See Fields on the Text Field Dialog Da
227. at it should occupy The number cannot exceed three Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Caption To choose the caption s alignment click the down arrow next to this Alignment field as shown below Heading rows lo Heading columns 0 Select the box that represents the alignment style you want Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears below the table when viewed Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers use the summary to explain the table s contents From http www ws org TR WCAG10 HTML TECHS data tables A summary of the relationships among cells is especially important for tables with nested headings cells that soan multiple columns or rows or other relationships that may not be obvious from analyzing the structure of the table but that may be apparent in a visual rendering of the table A summary may also describe how the table fits into the context of the current document If no caption is provided it is even more critical to provide a summary Associate Check this box if you want to associate the table s data cells with the Cells with appropriate headers See Also htip www w3 org TR WCAG20 Headers TECHS H43 html After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table Section 508 compliant Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviat
228. ate Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to content you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to content via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 290 Managing Tasks f ess Start Date Using the calendar button choose a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be completed The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Ektron CMS
229. ate the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 797 Appendix A Content Statuses Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Border Color Letter fae _ Approved Through the workflow and published on the Web site red Checked Out Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked In Checked in for other users to edit Submitted for Approval green green Saved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 yellow yellow Marked for Deletion Requested for deletion Pending Go Live Approved but the Go Live Date date hasn t occurred yet grey Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks Task s assigned to content are not complete More Information Approved Content on page 799 Checked Out Content on page 802 Checked In Content on page 800 Submitted Content on page 803 Marked for Deletion Content on page 804 Pending Start Date Content on page 805 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 798 Appendix A Content Statuses Letter Border Content state More Information Color Pending Deletion Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only remains until the start date is reache
230. atus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 92 Approving Declining Content First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating content needs his approval He can change and approve the content or decline it Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS400 NET navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval User jedit eas aaha MPL fh AAU HP BARA AS nae eae stat TLE eT ee ee OL eT Eee a ee eS ee eee oe a ee a ee ne a a a ee a ee ee oe a Oe ee ee ee ae ee ee ee ee Smart Desktop for John Edit Content Awaiting Approval 2 5 Content Currently Checked Out 2 Tasks 0 He clicks the link and sees all content awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the submitted content View All Content Approval Content Meta Data A Native NET Contin Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 93 Approving Declining Content The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content At the approval window the Sports Editor has these options Send content to next approver in chain Approve EZ E Send email to creator notifying him her that content was Decline E ma declined 2 Remove content from ap
231. b Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 163 Working with HTML Forms 2 Select Report on the form Edit Content in Folder Content Title Breakroom Survey English U 5 Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page n e came Window 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window 4 Choose the style of the report Edit Content in Folder Content Title Breakroom Survey English l Form Post back message Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page O Report on the form Same Window Data Table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 164 Working with HTML Forms Chart Types The following table describes the types of charts available Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users 50 18 21 who responded to 204 22 25 each item 0 26 30 250 31 or over Age range 4 responses Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are Age range 4 responses displayed with a bar graph Use this chart type when you want a quick visual representation of the responses Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or Poll My favorite feature survey answers are My favorite feature in Ektron CMS400 NET color coded and the S percentage of p B Approval Process 11 people who chose i
232. background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color Sccoor oe W Unassigned Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 740 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cells use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Background Image Select Image Y Your Webmaster determines which images are available to you To insert a background image 1 2 3 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears Click the image of your choice Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 752 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 741 Manipulating Your Table s Format Deleting a Background Im
233. bar 4 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 24 avatar assigning 480 B background color applying to text 639 cell applying 750 deleting 751 removing from text 639 table applying 739 deleting 740 background image cell deleting 753 inserting 752 table deleting 742 inserting 741 bidirectional editing 641 blogs adding 316 categories 322 adding 322 editing 323 removing 324 comments in the Workarea 354 on the site 352 overview 350 deleting 336 overview 312 posts adding 346 deleting 349 editing 348 made from the Web site 342 made from the Workarea 344 overview 341 properties 318 roll 327 assigning link 327 editing 330 link removing 331 searching 337 setting style sheet 321 smart forms used with 326 tagline 321 update service 321 visibility setting 317 workflow 315 blur WeblmageFX command 693 bold toolbar option 639 bookmarks 764 border image color 681 thickness 680 border color cell 749 content block meaning 798 table 742 border size cell 746 table 744 brightness WeblmageFX command 694 broken links finding 59 browser requirements document management feature 224 bullet toolbar option 639 buttons adding to menu 647 rearranging on menu 650 removing from menu 647 text displaying in title bar 482 C calendars add event button 60 authorization for creating 263 button to display in Workarea 63 definition 261 event types 277 events adding 273 assigning event types 277 button for viewing 63
234. bar button 493 size absolute toolbar button 493 style toolbar button 493 form elements toolbar 496 horizontal line toolbar button 492 HTML viewing 529 hyperlink toolbar button 492 hyperlinks 521 creating 521 editing 525 entering manually 522 preventing 526 removing 525 testing 523 to a bookmark in another web page 524 images deleting 516 inserting 506 indent toolbar button 494 insert symbol toolbar button 492 introduction 488 italic toolbar option 493 library toolbar button 492 number toolbar button 494 paragraph style toolbar button 492 paste toolbar button 491 print toolbar button 491 redo toolbar button 491 remove hyperlink toolbar button 492 replace toolbar button 491 replacing text 498 search 498 considering case of search term 501 direction 500 whole word match 501 select all toolbar button 491 spell check toolbar button 491 spelling 503 strikethrough toolbar button 493 style class toolbar button 492 subscript toolbar button 493 superscript toolbar button 493 table add row above toolbar button 495 add row below toolbar button 495 adding columns 539 adding rows 539 alignment 544 iil background color 546 background color deleting 548 background image 549 background image deleting 550 border color 552 border size 553 cell properties toolbar button 495 columns specifying 538 creating 531 delete cell toolbar button 495 delete column toolbar button 495 delete row toolbar button 495 deleting 537 539 i
235. ble Cells 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box on page 753 Basic colors EE EHEHEH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 739 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 750 Working with Table Cells Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color EE W Unassigned 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 753 Color Basic colors EE 8 6616 Oe EE HEHEHHE EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 751 Wo
236. bles on page 719 Add row Inserts a new row below the last one Add column Inserts a new column to the right or the right column Insert row Inserts a new row above the current one Insert column Inserts a new column to the left of the current one Insert new cell Inserts a new cell to the left of the current one an H E epe pe a Deleting a Cell on page 748 Memeo Merging Two Cells on page 760 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 730 Working with Table Cells on page 746 WP cr Ei EH Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 642 Toolbar Buttons Miscellaneous Toolbar Button Equivalent Function Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ga Open File o o FA Display hide Display or suppress table and cell borders Borders Open local file and copy it into CMS content While you can open any file type Ektron CMS400 NET S editor only works with htm and xml files When you open a file into a content block the new file replaces any content currently in the block Save CMS content as file on your computer or network Since Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files you should save the file using one of those extensions Display or suppress formatting characters that do not appear when content is published c gt Display hide Invisible Elements Display a dialog that lets you change the appearance of the HTML source code View Prefere
237. buttons and drop down lists on the default toolbar are explained below Five optional toolbars are also available To display one place the cursor on the standard toolbar right click the mouse and select it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 633 Toolbar Buttons Content Summary Metadata La RRMA Oa ys CEM AYA Ei Appl Style Normal Verdana 2 10 pt Eciit View 45 Ta al Special Characters Format nl A Native NET Content Manage Pras rh foma Improve Table ektron O O with dra Position Objects gt N for temp Text Direction C MS a nN ef e enn Miscellaneous denloym Form Elements Ektran CMSA MET ic a nanwerfiil SMil conmtant mz The optional toolbars are explained in these sections e Form Elements Toolbar on page 641 e Table Elements Toolbar on page 642 e Position Objects Options on page 640 e Text Direction Options on page 641 e Miscellaneous Toolbar on page 643 Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 634 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl C Copy j l V E
238. cccccssssseeeeseseesseeeseeeeeneeeseeenaes 556 Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell cssceeseseeees 558 DGlSTING BGO R E E E 559 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccccssseesseeeseeeeees 560 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell cccsssseeeeeeees 561 Spanning Rows or ColUMnS ssssssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne 562 Aligning Text Within a Cell cccssssseeesesesseeeeseeeesseesseneeneeees 564 lt clel i a a Coll sasssiuenanninsnna a iaaa 565 Merging Two Cells ssssriisininnncnnonninnninanus annaa iaa 566 Or N D a AE Oe 567 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing cccccssssseeessesseeeeesseeeees 568 SECUN DOG Fap S sss 570 Working with HTML FOrims cccccsseessseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaeeeeees 574 Overview of Form Processing ssssccssssseeeeeesseeseeeeeenseeees 576 The Structure of Form Data ccccseseecessessseeeseseenseeeseeennneees 576 Creating a New FOrim ccssccccssssseeeccesseeseeeneeeseesseeeseenseesenaes 576 Creating a Form s Conte nt ccccccssssesseeeeseessneeeseeeesneeesseeeass 585 Fomm vValdat i esn 590 DEE E e TEAPA TEE E A A E PPE E ETT 590 Inserting or Editing Buttons on the FOrm cccsssesseseeeeees 612 Implementing a Form on a Web Page ssscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 615 Assigning a Task to a FOr sasssssssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 615 Viewing Form ReportS viincnsccsenccascesnnsesenseere
239. ccccsssseecsssseeeeenseeseeeees 749 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccssssseeseeseeseesees 750 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell cscsseeseeeees 752 Spanning Rows or Columns cccssceeeesesseeeeeeneeeseeeseeeseeees 754 Aligning Text Within a Cell cccccecssssseesceeseeeeeeseeeseeeenees 756 Sae es A E E E E A E A AA 759 Merging Two Cells asnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 760 E a O E rename re spears sy 761 Setting Cell Padding and Spacingd ccssssseesseesseeseeeeees 762 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 viii Using BOOKIE S vcictesceceseneseectenweccesesceccescncteestupsacravnseeentenues 764 Using ty IBIS ctvievncssepadamnarapdcnyapanieunin uses entinbinaauaneavennanseatanl 768 Working with MIM Gec 774 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature 778 Creating a Wiki occu exensisnmyeenaaseamauakgrerkscapmaveraseeesae sername 778 Section 508 COMpliance ccccecceseeessseeeenseeeneesenseneeees 784 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XM L 00008 784 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse 000000 785 Section 508 FASS wxcrcascreawovcsieaoasenbaspussaceonsccccaweieaevepekeasavseaneavs 787 Inserting Comments within Content csseesseeeeees 794 Appendix A Content Statuses 798 Approved Content seicsicssentstencseiiassasantecennass
240. cent I Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment x Vertical Alignment ki 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split Ae Row after split Ce To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 759 Working with Table Cells 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table 4 Click Split Cell from the menu Insert Table Add Row Add Column Insert Row Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells spilt Cell Tahle Prarnerties 5 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cell After Merge To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 760 Working with Table Cells 2 Click the Insert Table button E3 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the colum
241. cess the Edit Content screen from a Web page follow these steps Browse to the content you want to edit Click Edit from the menu options The Edit Content in Folder screen appears From here you can eedit content ecreate or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content eenter or update a comment eenter or update start and end dates ereview and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 53 Editing HTML Content eif manual aliasing is enabled an Alias tab appears To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section URL Aliasing gt Manual Aliasing e assign or change available templates To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates eassign taxonomy categories To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Taxonomy e save changes echeck in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 4 Edit the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 633 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen o
242. check automatic tooloar and menu option 635 manual toolbar and menu option 635 spelling check a single word 665 check as you type 663 check on demand 664 check selected text 665 checking file addresses 666 checking Internet addresses 666 checking uppercase words 666 checking words with numbers 666 fix errors 664 split cell toolbar button 642 splitting a cell 759 staged content block viewing 64 start date content block setting 66 setting results 67 start time event calendar 275 279 Strikethrough toolbar and menu option 639 style class assigning to text 638 submenus adding as menu item 459 adding items 460 definition 446 deleting 472 submit toolbar button 63 submitted content definition 803 Subscript toolbar and menu option 639 summary adding 73 content creating for existing content block 75 creating for new content block 74 editing 76 Superscript toolbar and menu option 639 surveys creating 214 220 618 624 T table insert toolbar button 642 table properties toolbar button 642 tables alignment 737 background color applying 739 deleting 740 background image deleting 742 inserting 741 border color 742 invisible 743 size 744 columns adding 731 deleting 731 spanning 754 specifying 730 creating 720 deleting 721 inserting within a table 722 locking in position 640 rows adding 731 deleting 731 spanning 754 specifying 730 section 508 787 width setting by percentage 733 setting by pixels
243. columns eWebEdit400 table deleting columns 539 table adding 731 deleting 731 spanning 754 specifying 730 comments adding another 796 adding to a task 306 inserting into content 794 updating 796 viewing 796 Compare source code field eWebDiff 105 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 105 comparing content 98 100 content area explained 106 Diff tab 106 how status affects comparison 102 published tab 107 setup window 104 staged tab 107 toolbar 103 view tabs 106 when available 100 101 window explanation 102 content see also content block active definition 799 adding 48 adding as menu option 456 adding to collection 434 approval process 91 archived toolbar button 61 archiving see archiving area expanding 46 awaiting approval 18 border hiding and showing 5 checked in definition 800 checked out definition 802 collaboration 794 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 comparing see comparing con tent creating 48 currently checked out 18 declining 90 declining see declining content deleting 57 difference view button floating toolbar 5 viewing 98 100 editing 52 editing toolbar button 62 end date setting 68 folders see folders history accessing from Web page 53 109 accessing via Workarea 54 109 marked for deletion definition 804 metadata see searchable proper ties pending start date 805 previous version viewing 108 properties 45 publish see publish restoring previous version 108 scheduli
244. comments NOTE To learn about recognizing unapproved comments and approving them see Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 See Also Adding a Comment on page 355 Editing a Comment on page 356 Deleting a Comment on page 357 e Approving a Comment on page 357 Adding a Comment NOTE To be able to add a comment you must have Add permission on the blog s Standard Permissions screen To add a blog post comment from the Workarea follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post that you want to comment on 3 Click New gt Comment The Add Comment screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 355 Blogs Add Comment Gal SoM Lo E e Comment Display John Wiliams Name Email jwilliamst exarmple com URL http Post 370 What is Guillain Barre Syndrome GBS state Approved s Pending Comment For a description of the fields on this screen see gt The Comment Form on page 353 Note that Add Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 351 Editing a Comment From the Content area navigate to
245. comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button a Save and check in content This button does not submit the Eil Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mj Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This button appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Close the editor without saving changes x Cancel Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eo The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form ona Web Page on page 615 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 589 Working with HTML Forms Form Validation You can apply validation rules to text or calendar field types Validation rules ensure that the information entered by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule specifi
246. content Title ID f URL Link Home Page Content 1 CMS400Demo index asp id 1 Support Page 8 CMS400Demo index asp id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 CMS4000Demo index asp id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS400Demo index asp id 5 RC Redstar Fi CMS400Demo index asp id 7 17 New Content Block CMS4000Demo index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 CMS4000Demo index asp id 15 NOTE lf a collection item is a form ekfrm is used instead of id to denote form block To toggle between a default template and Quicklinks follow these steps 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save E button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 433 Working with Collections Assigning Content to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content to it To do so follow these steps NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published version of content appears If the content has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 428 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content Title ID Date Modified New Collection 21 8 17 2005 10 25 28 AM 4 The View Col
247. content folder that contains the content Click the content item id Eu 2 3 Click the History toolbar button 4f 4 Select an historical version of the content 5 Click the View Differences button R The historical and the current versions are compared To learn more about the comparison see Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of XML content If you remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags The following table compares the views Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 112 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content With XSLT Product Name RC Redstar Description The RE Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is for beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to have fun with The Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Specifications Alrfoil Low Wing Overall Length 57 In Wingspan YLiIn Weight 7 8 lbs Engine Size 60 70 ce Fuel Tank Size 12 pz Engine Run Time 15 min full tank Pofill Tirnea 17 core Without XSLT Content RC Redstar The EC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This nev beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Low Wing 57 imn 7111n 7 8 lbs 60
248. create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Creating polls and surveys e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Toolbar buttons for working with forms are circled Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 574 Working with HTML Forms gt amp amp BMD H 7 inh te Bf U x Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paper example com This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics Overview of Form Processing on page 576 The Structure of Form Data on page 576 Creating a New Form on page 576 Creating a Form s Content on page 585 Form Validation on page 590 Form Fields on page 590 Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 615 Assigning a Task to a Form on page 615 Viewing Form Reports on page 618 Viewing Form Information
249. created in Step 1 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed You can update the following information by following the procedure below e the form fields e post back message e metadata e schedule e comments e Web Alerts However to edit a form s Title Description form data or task values use the Edit Properties screen To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 2 Click the Edit button L Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 210 4 5 Working with HTML Forms The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 159 Make the necessary changes to the form Click the Save button 1 See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 156 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 a SS N Access the View Form screen for the c
250. ct a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 426 2 The View Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 428 Working with Collections View Collection About Us Title Home About Us Awards and Honors Board of Directors Products m fn fi fi Ga More info Title About Us ID 8 Template Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last Edit Date 2 13 2007 Date Created 3 3 2006 Description Status A Include Subfolders Approval is required Quickdeploy This Collection Title ID Language ID URL Link EB Home 33 1033 CMS400Demo dynamic aspx 7id 33 E About Us 35 1033 CMS400Demo aboutus aspx id 35 The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section of the screen displays the following information about the collection e title e description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 429 Working with Collections e ID number e template e last user who edited it e last date when it was edited e date it was created e whether or not the content folder s subfolders can be included e for each content item in the collection a link to the content click this to view and edit the content ID number quicklink Collections Toolbar T
251. cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Bullet Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin m Begin the line on which the cursor rests Number with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 639 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Align paragraph so that it is arranged e evenly on the left side uneven on Left Center i the right Justify in the center of each line e evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side E About Display a dialog box that shows your eWebEditPro XML version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatible with all browsers z Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Locks selected table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again i Lock Ty If two or more images overlay e
252. d At that point the content is deleted Approved Content lf content has a green border it is live on the Web site Title Login Lee Published L gin il of CME 200 is controlled trom this workarea Tee sc wae Se ee ewe leba edie eeen a ie ce Elves ebara we When content is approved you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions Button Dropdown Description For more information see Menu Option Check out and Check content out and save on Checking Out Saving and Save as your computer Replacing an Office Document on page 24 7 Save as Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 249 Edit or Edit in Check out the content to Editing HTML Content on Office change it page 52 Editing a Managed File on page 256 Editing an Office Docu ment on page 244 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 799 Appendix A Content Statuses Dropdown Description For more information see Menu Option Edit Properties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Delete Submit a request to delete the Deleting Content on page 57 content If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Checked In Content lf
253. d the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 710 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button tw Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top A Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button R Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 717 Editing Images Description Increases an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 718 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 10 Zoom Out Ey Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 717 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 10 specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from the bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 2 colors 256 colors 16M colors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 718 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs B
254. d below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item List area to do this See Also Item List on page 609 Languages A standard list of languages Countries A standard list of countries U S States and Territories A standard list of United States of America states and territories Canadian Provinces A standard list of Canadian provinces Age Ranges A standard list of age ranges Numeric Ranges A standard list of numeric ranges Years A standard list of years Gender Male or female Marital Status A standard list marital statuses Allow Click More than one to let a site visitor select more than one item for this Selection field Otherwise click Only one to limit the user to one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item First item is not a valid selection You can use the first list item to prompt the user to make a selection instead of being a valid response For example the first item may say Select from the list To do so check this box If you do the site visitor must choose any selection except the first item If he tries to file the screen without choosing a different item this error message appears First item is not a valid selection Note This option is only available if Appearance is set to Drop List Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 607 Working with HTML Forms SS Appearance Click Vertical Li
255. d guide to Ektron CMS400 NET navigation see the Best Practice Navigation for your Web site pamphlet available from http dev ektron com uploadedFiles Resources navigations20best 20practice pdf Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 443 Working with Menus Working with Menus IMPORTANT Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu In this example delivered with Ektron CMS400 NET the menu appears when a site visitor moves the cursor over About Us on the home page However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS400 NET then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding content If you chooses to hide the border that appears around content when you are logged in the Add and Edit options are also hidden This allows you to view the page as it appears when you are not logged in See Also Hiding and Showing the Content Border on page 5 If the page is set to show borders and you still do not see the Add and Edit buttons the feature may be turned off Ask your Administrator or Web site Developer for additional information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 444 Working with Menus NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding HTML Conten
256. d using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 576 Working with HTML Forms screen See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 Notre For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 619 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 624 1 Consult with your Ektron CMS400 NET administrator about the folders in which you should create forms See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New menu gt HTML Form Survey The New Form screen appears New Form T ieweo ec Wa dano aa a T Ca f step 1 of Chose the ol i ge Pe Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey A Design a new survey O Standard Poll
257. d your computer has an earlier version of Office The best solution is to upgrade your computer to Office 2007 If you cannot do this the next best option is to install Microsoft Windows Compatibility Pack See htips www microsoft com downloads details aspx Familyld 941B3470 3AE9 4AEE 8F43 C6BB74CD14668displaylang en Once installed you can successfully work with Microsoft Word 2007 documents even though you have Office 2003 Office XP or Office 2000 At this time there is no Compatibility Pack that lets you work with other Office documents such as Excel or Powerpoint Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 229 Using the Document Management System Importing Office Documents DMS can store and help you manage Office documents This section explains how to import any document into Ektron s Document Management System NOTE New gt DMS Document from View Contents of Folders screen New gt Multiple DMS Documents from View Contents of Folders screen Ektron CMS400 NET provides five ways to import Microsoft Office documents They are described below Only users with Add permission for a folder can import documents into it See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Setting Permissions Advantages Can enter Sum mary Metadata information etc for each document Can create unique title for each docu ment You can check in or submit document for approval Can upload several fi
258. dard Toolbar Button Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 706 Editing Images Dialog Box Attributes Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an area of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WeblmageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button Ka Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 707 Editing Images Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it This command is a toggle which means the first time you click it it is on and the next time you click it it is off Polygon Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps Click the polygon command Drag the line in one direction as far as you want Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon oe ee To change the polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the rig
259. day of every Month Yearly every selected date of 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields 1 Se Start Date Click the calendar icon 8 to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user End Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from among the choices Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 278 Working with Calendars 4 Finish your edits For documentation of See Start Time Click the clock icon to display a clock From it select a start time End Time Click the clock icon E to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Display the times for the event Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end times illustrated below Coa E company meeting Location montreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 PM The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked T Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM
260. de and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example Check if you are over 65 7 To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place the cursor where you want the check box field to appear 2 Click the Checkbox field button 3 The following dialog appears Checkbox Field Feld Name Default value True checked False unchecked canton ot Fields on the Checkbox Dialog C a Descriptive Enter a descriptive name for this checkbox Name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 591 Working with HTML Forms SSS Field Name Enter a name for this checkbox This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen first appears value click True Otherwise click False A site visitor can change the default value while completing the screen Caption Enter text to guide the user s response to this field The caption appears on the screen to the right of the checkbox To continue the above example the caption would be Check if you are over 65 Inserting a Text Field Us
261. ded by small squares as shown below 2 Below the editor screen several fields appear as shown below O O O Submit jo O d O a Name With Value Classname Apply CSS Cl 7 a eight 22px Tom 3 Update the button fields as needed Field Description 0 Give the button a unique name If needed give the button a unique ID Width Enter or change the button s width in pixels Height Enter or change the button s height in pixels Enter or change the button text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 614 Working with HTML Forms pe i Tooltip Enter or change the button s tooltip that is text that appears in a small window when someone hovers the mouse over the button Enter or change the style sheet class assigned to the button Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form Note While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a
262. dentical The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 99 Comparing Versions of Content e When Can I Compare Content on page 100 e Accessing the View Content Difference Feature on page 100 When Can Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is available when e you are viewing a version of content e a staged version of that content is available See Also Siaged Content on page 806 Learn About Accessing the View Content Difference Feature Accessing the View Content Difference Feature To Access the View Content Difference feature follow these steps Navigate to the content whose versions you want to compare 2 Click View Properties 3 Click the History button Gey The View Content History screen appears See Also Comparing Historical Versions on page 112 4 Click a version that you want to compare with the most recently published version 5 Click the View Content Difference toolbar button ER The View Content Difference Feature NOTE Use this procedure if your computer is 32 bit and the Ektron CMS400 NET server is 64 bit The View Content Difference feature highlights changes that were made to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of content The changes are indicated by e redlining deleted content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manua
263. der Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Subjects tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 325 Blogs 5 Click Remove next to the subject to be removed Edit Properties for the folder GBNB ij 0 a Subjects Add New Subject Remove Last Subject Remove Remove Education Remove 6 A confirmation box appears 7 Click OK if you want to remove the subject Nore You can continue to remove subjects from the list by clicking the Remove link next to each subject 8 Click Save M Web Alerts Web Alerts notify users when a blog post is published This feature is explained in the Administrator Manual Section Web Alert Feature gt Assigning Web Alert Information to Folders and Content Smart Forms Use a Smart Form when you want to create structured blogging Structured blogging provides a form for the blogger to fill out instead of free form writing For example you create a blog for book reviews You want to make sure that when someone submits a review he provides the following information e Book title e Author e Date of review Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 326 Blogs e Review text For information on working with Smart Forms see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Unlike the Smart Forms you can assign to regular folders you cannot require the NOTE u
264. ding on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 728 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 654 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 85 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on page 658 where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Paste Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all
265. disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 143 2 Click the Delete button i 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button i Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to content See Adding a Library File to Content on page 149 You can also insert an item into the library while adding it to content See Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content on page 150 If you insert an image file it appears within the content If you add any other type of file the file name appears as a hyperlink within the content When a site visitor viewing that page clicks the hyperlink the inserted file is launched Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 148 Library Folder Adding a Library File to Content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Place the cursor within the content where you want the library file to appear Click the library button i The library opens Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to in
266. ditor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The custom search fields appear below the Status field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 126 Searching the Workarea Result Display Options At the top of the Advanced Search Tab a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the search results Search Content Folder Text View Description option If the item is content or a form Sample HTML content display a thumbnail of it If the item is an asset display a generic icon that indicates asset wh a Th flaca l Come Ype C8400 ner Last edited by Appli In both cases to the right are 12 2 2005 12 56 Ph the item s CMS Developer title summary last edited user date and time You can click the title to display Sample Microsoft Word document the item inside the View Contents screen From there CMS400 Replication 4 doc you can perform all available i functions on the item ia Last edited by Application Adr on 12 2 2005 12 36 PM Note Graphical search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 127 Searching the Workarea View Description option Text Display item s title in the left To the right display th tee COIN HOS t nt Cepia ile Search found 5 result s that matched your keywordc last edit date time S PT R AN EE ANE N te N SA N E ARE A S Sc Opermame
267. dow These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen on page 51 Translating Content to Another Language NOTE The following procedure only works with HTML or XML content You cannot translate other file types as described below Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language content item with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 55 Editing HTML Content For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained NOTE Ektron CMS400 NET also has a Language Export feature copies content into XLIFF files for submission to a translation agency For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Using the Language Export Feature To copy content into new content block of a different language follow these steps 1 Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate See Also Viewing Content on page 40 2 Use the Add dropdown list in the upper right corner to select the language into which y
268. dth there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s height and width follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 558 Working with Table Cells 1 Place the cursor in the cell whose height or width you want to set Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu n e w P The Cell Properties dialog appears Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment Background 4 Dimensions Additional C No Wrapping Background Image pO cell CS5 undefined CSS Class Clear Style 7 Abbreviation Go Categories ee 6 Enter the cell width and height in the fields circled above You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 540 7 Click Update Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell you want to delete 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Delete Cell from the menu Cells to the right of the deleted cell shift l
269. e 6 Select a folder on your computer in which to save the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 256 Using the Document Management System Open the host application Edit and save the file Return to Ektron CMS400 NET and open the file s folder 10 Click the Add Assets button circled below 11 Drag the changed file to the Assets area in the middle of the screen Deleting a Managed File NOTES You must have delete permissions for the folder that contains the document Permissions are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting documents See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 59 From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the managed file s folder Find the managed file you want to delete e oh z Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the file and click 5 Click Delete from the dropdown menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 257 Using the Document Management System Ls d PaA ee ed ie T 2 TCPIP props hd i View E Save As Replace Check Out and Save As Submit 6 You are asked to confirm the deletion Press OK 7 The asset enters its approval chain Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving
270. e Specifying a Search Word or Phrase on page 122 e The Noise File on page 123 e Specifying Match Criteria on page 123 e Additional Search Criteria on page 125 e Custom Fields on page 126 Each feature is explained below NOTE To help track search activity the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all words and phrases searched within a date range In Ektron CMS400 NET this report is available from the Smart Desktop gt Reports For documentation of this report see Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports Search Phrase Report Using the Advanced Search When performing a search enter one or more words into the text box select search preferences then click the Search buiton You can use an asterisk as a wildcard character in other words to stand for any character For example the phrase CMS 00 returns topics that include the following text CMS400 CMS300 CMS200 and CMS100 Your system administrator can add custom search fields that only appear if a user is logged in For more information seethe Metadata section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 121 Searching the Workarea Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search M Content W Forms M Assets M Incdude Archived NOTE Assets only appears if your organization has i
271. e editor View Content About Us LY oS U aa fs ea al cy y English U S Add select language Content 7 ean Ta category Asa FEY leader ektron aE strives to improve nee In its local and global communities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for underserved populations It is a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of the communities in which employees live and work The editor resembles popular word processing software You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling See Also ntroduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 486 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 9 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET The Lifecycle of Content After you edit content you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notifying you that content needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you do not agree with the changes you c
272. e from the list to apply a style to selected Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Heading Size Norrral Change the font style Your Webmaster Times New Roman determines which fonts are available Font Style Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are available lanzo Size Font A Font Color Change the font color Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 638 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only h h k d color of the text WSipackground Color Change the background color of the tex Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button A I B Make th Id T Ctrl l Make the text italic Italic Apply strikethrough to selected text For example Here s semetexdt Remove all formatting from selected text ae Make selected text appear smaller and above text line Strikethrough x Superscript Subscript Make selected text appear smaller and below text line Begin the line on which the
273. e 242 e Removing Mapped Network Drives on page 243 Language Restrictions on Content in a Mapped Network Drive You cannot choose a language for assets in a mapped network folder they are automatically assigned the Ektron CMS400 NET default language set in the siteroot web config file at the ek DefaultContent Language element And you cannot work with assets of a language other than your computer s default language For example if your computer s default language is English and your version of Ektron CMS400 NET has Spanish content you cannot edit that content ina mapped network folder Setting up a Mapped Network Drive Prerequisites e The path to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site It is something like thiS nttp server23 cms4oo If you do not know the path ask your system administrator e an Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 239 Using the Document Management System 1 Right click the Windows Start button Open Add to VLC media player s Playlist Browse with Paint Shop Pro Studio Browse with Paint Shop Pro X Explore Play with VLC media player Search Properties Open All Users Explore All Users co 2 Choose Explore Windows Explorer opens 3 Click Tools gt Map Network Drive Start Menu File Edit View Favorites ieee Help Address ES C Documents and 5 AME enue Ute Disconnect Network Drive
274. e 249 Check Out Change a managed file s status to checked out Checking Out Saving and and Save As and save a copy to your computer Replacing an Office Document on page 247 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 254 Using the Document Management System Menu Description For more information see option Note These sections describe working with Office documents Everything works the same with managed files Edit Overwrite a managed file in CMS400 NET with a Checking Out Saving and version on your computer Replacing an Office Document on The file name can be different but its type must page 247 match the file being edited A file s type appears after you click Edit on the Edit Content in Folder screen circled below Edit Content in Folder Root Title Align Center Content Sched Currently uploaded file Align Cente gif Please select a file to upload Check In Change a checked out managed file s status to checked in Useful if you checked out and saved a managed file then it became lost or corrupted This option lets you change its status back to checked in Submit Submit managed file into approval chain Asset Workflow on page 258 Publish Delete Delete managed file deleted file cannot be Deleting a Managed File on retrieved page 257 Creating a New Managed File You cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead create it on your computer using the ho
275. e 287 2 Click the Add button cH Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 288 Managing Tasks IMPORTANT The Add button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 The Add Task screen appears Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears e f you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redirect permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone else click Select User or Group and choose a user or group The user to whom the task is being assigned must have permission to edit the con tent When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of the assigned task Note email is only sent if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS400 NET Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a piece of content select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to fi
276. e BEM AZE veo Normal gt a2 10 pt Am BFAA x alli J fab lab e e EE Ta Select Button Place form elements here Checkbox Field Plain Text Field Hidden Field E Fassword Textarea Choices Field Select List Field 2 Done loading Calendar Field gl Inserting Form Fields The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange the screen so that it collects exactly the information you want To create the screen you insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 169 HE Working with HIML Forms information Then add buttons that let the user submit the data on the screen If you chose a sample form at the beginning the screen includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit button NOTE In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc onto the form screen If you want to place fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Inserts this kind of field Checkbox Hidden Text Field Text Field Description User s response is either checked or unchecked Information a site visitor doesn t need to know about Free text field user cannot format text A password field Same as Text Field except field scrolls vertically to accept more text Several choices appear on screen User checks any number
277. e Spelling amp Grammar Spelling I Hide spelling errors in this document M Always suggest corrections T Suggest From main dictionary only I Ignore words in UPPERCASE I Ignore words with numbers i Ignore Internet and file addresses Custom dictionary custom DIC T Dictionaries Grammar Check grammar as you type Writing style I Hide grammatical errors in this document Technical Check grammar with spelling R Show readability statistics SINS Recheck Document _Recheck Document Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore e words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC e words with numbers for example mp3 e Internet and file addresses for example http www example com As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to reference The spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 667 Editing in Microsoft Word lf your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word See Also Working with Microsoft Office Docum
278. e Text field and clicking Add remove any term by selecting it and clicking Remove modify any term by selecting it It appears within the Text field where you can change it Then press the Change button restore the terms to their default settings by pressing the Default button change the sequence of terms by selecting one then pressing the up and down arrows 4 e f related content metadata is available for the content its name appears followed by None Selected ID Change Clear Click Change to display a window of choices For example if the related content type is a collection all collections appear in the popup Select the appropriate data for this content Selected items appear in the bottom of the screen You can reorder them by selecting an item then clicking the up and down arrows To remove items from the bottom of the screen select them and click the delete 1 button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 82 Adding or Editing Metadata Select Collection Title ID Description Fath Homepage Ads 4 Y Homepage Mews 6 Y About Ws 3 Y List of contacts at Ektron CMS4000Demo54bout contacts 10 Medical Ls Statt Select Metadata ere v Title o a ee e About Us Homepage News lf the related content type is either content item or library image hyperlink or file the following window appears when you click Change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Adding o
279. e a text field when you want the user to enter a free text response or to display text on the screen There are many variations you can apply to such a field such as e a default value e text can be read only or hidden e the field can expand to accommodate user input e validation requiring user input to meet criteria such as a non negative whole number or a zip code To insert a text field follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Name 2 Place the cursor where you want the text field to appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 592 Working with HTML Forms 3 Click the Text field button abl 4 The following dialog appears Text Field General Validation Data Style Tool Tip Text Options LI allow multiple lines L cannot be changed L invisible d Fassword field Fields on the Text Field Dialog General Tab NOTE If you are using FireFox you cannot enter text into a text field while creating or editing the form If you need to prefill a text field with text use the field s Default Value property Ca Ea Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 618 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt in
280. e browser address bar says http www example com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Set smart desktop as If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you enter the the start location in the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Inherit Task This area indicates your task permissions and whether you inherit them Permissions From from user groups to which you belong User Groups For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions User Properties See Custom User Properties in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 482 Online Help Online Help Online help provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS400 NET Help is provided in two formats e online help accessible from most screens by clicking the help button amp it provides information about the screen you are currently viewing Online help is in HTML format so it opens in the browser you use to surf the internet After viewing a help topic you can browse to related topics as well as access a table of contents index and search to expand your quest for inf
281. e data is a list summary that includes a photo of every item on the list For example your site promotes a soccer team The list summary shows every player on the team To the left of each player s name is a thumbnail of his image Metadata is more fully explained through the following topics e Entering Custom Metadata on page 78 e Entering Title and Keywords on page 85 Entering Custom Metadata Your system administrator defines the metadata that can be added to content The metadata being collected can be customized for each folder When you create or update content you can define metadata using fields that the administrator specified NOTE In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content For example each document stored in the Document Management functionality has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add a document to Ektron CMS400 NET you access the content s metadata and insert the correct part number for the document illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 78 Adding or Editing Metadata Edit Content in Folder Content Tithe Sample Content Block English U 5 9 Content Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title Sample Content Block D
282. e icon for the selected type appears to the left of View as illustrated Language Limits display of content within folder to one language Also sets language of new items you create or upload into the folder Menus Lets user view and work with menus Working with Menus on assigned to this folder page 444 Collections Lets user view and work with Collections Working with Collections on assigned to this folder page 424 Archived Content Lets user view and work with content that Setting Archive Options on passed its scheduled End Date and page 69 whose archive option is either Archive and remove from site or Archive and remain on Site Folder Properties Only system administrators see this The Ektron CMS400 NET option It lets you assign folder Administrator Manual section properties such as which users can edit Managing Content gt a folder s content Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties Delete Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 34 Viewing a Folder Menu option Lets you For more information see Delete this Delete current folder and all of its content Deleting a Folder on page 40 folder Note You cannot delete the Root folder Delete content Delete one or more content items in Deleting Content on page 57 folder Action Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Export for Prepa
283. e image to appear Click the library button W Make sure Images is selected in the content type dropdown circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 506 Working with Images Quicklinks 4 From the folder display in the left panel select the folder that contains the image you want to insert CMS400 Library For admin iy CMS400Demo G Developer B ImageGallery Starter Apps gt Wiki_Example If you don t know the image s folder use the search button ih to find the image by title description or internal file name 5 Select the image you want to insert Click the insert button The image is inserted into the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 507 Working with Images Inserting an Image Thumbnail As an alternative to inserting an image you can insert a thumbnail a miniature version of the image When the thumbnail appears on a Web page a site visitor can click it to see a full sized version of the image See an example of both below Syringe Pumps The InfusO R Pump is a syringe infusion device that will a inesthetic Pharmaceuticals administration of many intravenous agents given during ar tegional Anesthesia procedures It provides for the convenient delivery of nar muscle relaxants and vasoactive drugs through the SMAF System To insert an image thumbnail follow the steps in Procedure for Inserting an Image on page 506 but
284. e ktro n What do you want your website to do Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Revision 9 Ektron Inc 542 Amherst St Nashua NH 03063 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright June 2008 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 7 5 Revision 9 For updated versions of this manual please visit http www ektron com web content management solutions aspx id 4020 EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for use only in delivered c
285. e on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead it will move down to the next row 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Creating a New Menu 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 650 Customizing Your Toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears oolbar Customization View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements T able Position Objects C Test Direction 5 Click New Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 651 Customizing Your Toolbar 6 Anew menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 Toolbars Comm Toolbars eent git 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 649 Moving a M
286. e pke We mi esd a r Ve ac cen 10 Ld i oe E Pn PLT TET Gn TT TEET s ia ete ie Link oes ee Schedule Comment Web alors Templates Categor ERAMAN SE ELA T EL ESEE aly Style Normal i BZU A eX nbsp TM Sii Bese Boe lobal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global AL Tal yi i lli li I Click the down arrow to return the content area to normal size The top row of buttons and title return Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 47 Adding HTML Content Adding HTML Content You can only add content to a folder if you have permission to do so The following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content Check In Eciit Approval Chain Publish to Web site After you create content you or your system administrator typically make it available on the site For example you can add a hyperlink to it from another page or place it in a collection or menu Your administrator can add it to a list summary or content list iHi NOTE Only users with Add permission for a folder can add content to it See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Setting Permissions NOTE This section only explains how to create HTML content The procedure for creating uploading other types content are listed in the table below To add HTML content follow these steps 1 Browse to the folder where you want to create
287. e the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox INESE TIES are not required CMS400Example Image Link l l Use image instead of a title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 450 Working with Menus Pitt Powerpton URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template When a site visitor reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the site visitor moves the cursor over Products Product Support Hews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page siteroot products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to siteroot products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path is relative to the site root For example siteroot jobs aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as wellness aspx id 40 amp wellness Hemophilia Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 451 Working with Menus Pitt Deserta Template Link
288. e view modes explained below Diff Compares published version of content to staged version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 106 Comparing Versions of Content Published Displays currently published version Staged Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 691 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation program is performed Click Yes when the following screen appears Security Warning x Do you want to metal and run Ektron ewebDitf signed on 1 9 2004 2 40 PM and distributed by Ektran Ine Publisher authenticity verted by YenSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Ektron Ine asserts that this content is safe you should only install view this content if you trust Ektron Ine to make that assertion C Always trust content from Ektron Ine More Info When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 107 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Past versions of published content are available unless your system administrator purged them Your ability to view a content item s history is determined by your user privileges After viewing a previous versions of
289. each user the bottom line sums the numerical and percentage totals for each response Sample of Table with Totals Format General Demographic Survey Delete Submitted ID By F 22 Member John C 23 anonymous F 24 Edit Jahn Submitted Gender Age range Ed Date H Male Female 22 25 26 30 31 40 Echa 12 6 2005 4 18 50 y yi Fi 12 6 2005 4022558 nf wf PP 12 6 2005 4 23 40 nf wf PP Total 2 1 1 1 1 Average 3 rows 66 67 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 66 Summary of Selected Choices This format totals for choice and select type fields the number of times each choice was selected Only choices that were selected at least once appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 199 Working with HTML Forms Sample Summary of Selected Choices Format General Demographic Survey Field Yalue Count Age range abe 26 30 31 40 Annual Income 30 000 39 999 40 000 49 999 70 000 79 999 Education Level High School GED Masters Degree Fathers Education Level High School GED Masters Degree Some College Gender Female Male Household Income 100 000 149 000 30 000 39 999 60 000 69 999 Marital Status Legally Separated Married Single Mothers Education Level High School GED Masters Degrees Face African American e e lM PlRPo Pl re Pl RP Marele re rle Pf Po rere rae re Native American White Table of Values The table of values shows the following infor
290. ears Microsoft Internet Explorer e x WARNING You are about to overwrite a library file 2 The filename of the local file will be changed to match the existing filename This will ensure that web links to this library item do not break 11 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content that includes a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 143 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 147 Library Folder 2 Click the Link Search button 3 A list of all content that references the library item is displayed You should edit that content before deleting the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce
291. eating forms with eWebEditPro XML If you are using _ the eWebEdit400 editor see Working with HTML Forms on page 574 Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Creating polls and surveys for a Web site e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 156 Working with HTML Forms Re AA oo Se BEM EZE emp e m E i Normal p 2000 Ady BF A Al h 35 PE tee Jw fab fab e e EE Te Select Button Per gi 1 1 gi WW I ih Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e maill white paperd required fields IMPORTANT to avoid delays please provide accurate informatio EE Company Personal Website Eee cil LR ii We A H This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following
292. eature Switches to Data Entry Mode Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designer iar Data Entry Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature E y Display the page content as WYSIWYG ae What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page Display the page content as HTML Viewing and Editing lt 3 a View as HTML HTML on page 774 Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser el Copyright Registered Insert registered trademark symbol Trademark Insert copyright symbol a Insert trademark symbol Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 637 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only i Insert special characters such as and a NN from a drop down list Special Characters To view the list click the black down Remove all style information applied to selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before Fi Remove Style lt P class note gt This is initial content lt P gt lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Style Display a list of styles Users can select f4poly Styl
293. eave the word as is continue spell checking the page ignoring all other occurrences of the word Stop spell checking Click Cancel Click Ignore All Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of words follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check button 7 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 665 Checking Spelling 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in the dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see The Spelling Dialog Box on page 665 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker Setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML can use Microsoft Word s spell checking feature your Webmaster makes this decision lf your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 666 Checking Spelling Track Changes User Information Compatibility File Locations View General Edit Print Sav
294. eb page that hosts the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 217 Working with HTML Forms 3 Right click the poll and choose New Poll I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Conine E newna Friend C edit coWorke TA view History O Newsgrat belete Hother Add Task Submit For Properties eS Whorkarea 4 The Workarea opens indicating you are at step three of the Poll Wizard Continue to define the Poll Enter a question and all possible responses Leave unused responses blank Question oe Choices 5 Add anew question to the Question text box 6 Add possible responses to the Choices text boxes 7 Click Next 8 Click Done 9 The form editor launches allowing you to edit the fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 218 Working with HTML Forms 10 Once published the updated poll appears on the site I TAKE A SURVEY How often do you visit the Ektron Medical site Daily Weekly Monthly Semi Annually Yearly Vote Editing a Poll from the Web Site To edit an poll on a Web site follow these steps WARNING Ifyou are logged into the site and create a new poll by right clicking on a poll selecting New the existing poll is replaced by the new one 1 Log on to the
295. eceded by the letters ISBN The ten digit number is divided into four parts of variable length each part separated by a hyphen The four parts of an ISBN are e Group or country identifier identifies a national or geographic grouping of publishers Publisher identifier identifies a particular publisher within a group Title identifier identifies a particular title or edition of a title Check digit the single digit at the end of the ISBN which validates it Above copied from www isbn org The ISSN International Standard Serial Number is an eight digit number which identifies periodical publications as such including electronic serials The ISSN takes the form of the acronym ISSN followed by two groups of four digits separated by a hyphen The eighth character is a control digit calculated according to a modulo 11 algorithm on the basis of the 7 preceding digits this eighth control character may be an X if the result of the computing is equal to 10 in order to avoid ambiguity Above copied from www issn org Custom Validation The Text and Calendar field dialog s Validation tab features a validation area illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 599 Working with HTML Forms Calendar Field General Validation Validation Custom pm Custom Validation Data Type Condition PO Examples The validation feature can ensure the following
296. ection for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inserted into content it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon 2 7 BE Ha A ID BAe FEBE SSSse2ze come to RC International RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra las become one of the leading manufactures of RE racing 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To comment on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 796 Insert the comment Click the Insert button The comment is saved and added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 796 Inserting Comments within Content 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit Date Time Added By Comments now here s a comment on that cor Application Administrator 2004 09 54 AM here s my comment Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt A De E 7 U TERLARI 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Upd
297. ection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the root folder 4 The Add Collection screen appears Add Collection as T e Rad Titles O Template cm5400Demo o Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Include Subfolders L Approval is required C Quickdeploy This Collection 5 Complete the screen using the following table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 431 Working with Collections Field Description Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective Quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 432 Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Subfolders Check if you want to add to the collection content in subfolders of the content folder Approval is Required See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Web Site Navigation Aids gt Collections gt Setting up Approval for Collections 6 Click the Save button 5 You can now assign content to the collection See Assigning Content to the Collection on page 434 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collec
298. ed and saved CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt but never published Content Reports gt New Content Report Submitted Content Submitted for publication CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Submitted Report Pending Content Approved and pending a start date CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Expired Content Expired date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report Content to Expire Will expire within specified number CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt of days Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 260 Working with Calendars Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include e company meeting e reserving a conference room for an interview e company holidays e deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs
299. ee Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 173 Working with HTML Forms Checkbox Field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Name Field_1 Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value C True checked f False unchecked men Fields on the Checkbox Dialog De Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 174 Working with HTML Forms pe i Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen first value appears click True Otherwise click False Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Inserting a Hidden Text Field When the form is submitted this field can pass information that the site visitor doesn t need to know about such as a tracking number This is typically data to be stored in t
300. ee ee eee ee nan en aaia 400 Communly GrOUDS siccis 412 BA ON Nl G saidina aeia 415 P O Seen a E A 417 Web Site Navigation AidS ccsseeseeees 424 Working with Collections cccsseeesseceeeeeeseceeesenees 424 Finding Collections snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 425 Viewing a Collection wevensesinssencarnicasdcunspssispeesussinecsancunseastveseuseisss 428 Creating a Collection ccccccsssssseecesssessseeeseesseeeeseeesneeesseneass 430 Editing Content in a Collection c ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeees 438 Reordering Collections LisSt ccccccsssssssseessssesseeeeseeeeneeeees 439 Editing Collection Information c sssseeeesssesseesseeeenseeeeees 439 D let ng a mOxe e1 0 eee ee 440 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 440 Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features ssi vetessastevesectenesiitenanesdcucceserccratadaieesntenidess 442 Working with Menus ccscesceseeeeeeseeseenseneenseeseenees 444 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items c00esseee 446 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 V Access to the Menus Feature c cscsceeeeeeeeeeeececececeeeeeeeees 446 Managing FCT Sis siicsicaciesssiew syncs nee iecapnncaenecasbamabenceaneceamaceseoceare 447 Ektron CMS400 NET System Management 477 Updating Your User Profile
301. efaut current character count 20 500 max Collection None selected ID Change Clear keywords document management web content management l Text o OS content management F Search Data Part Number Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part number using your Web site s search screen NOTE When your system administrator sets up metadata he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search screen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea If the data is not publicly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering or Editing Metadata To enter or edit content s metadata follow these steps WARNING You may only edit metadata of content that is published checked in or checked out by you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 79 Adding or Editing Metadata 1 Access the Edit Content screen for the content whose metadata you want to enter or edit as described in Editing HTML Content on page 52 2 Click the Metadata tab Edit Content in Folder Root Ca E Ll y Fr OTe ae a T Title Sample Content Block English 0 5 Summary metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title anne Content Block 3 The Edit Metadata screen opens with the current metadata displayed In order to add metadata to content an adminis
302. eft to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 559 Working with Table Cells Before specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 739 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties Click the Background dropdown YS Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment Dimensions het Background Image Doo E Add Custom Color Add Hex Color Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 560 5 6 Working with Table Cells A color selection box appears Click a color to apply to the cell s background Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the square in the top left corner of the Background area circled below Background Addition E Id o LI E Specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Table s Background Image on page 549 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a background image to a cell To insert an image into a cell follow these steps 5 Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse S
303. eft to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 703 Editing Images i Description Displays information about an image e image name e height and width in pixels e bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 718 e file format Line Standard Toolbar Button nn Description Draw a Straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 704 Editing Images Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing The image can be on your computer or a local area network Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 705 Editing Images Load Image Look ir E eweblmaget cit Cancel 2 Files of type JPEG Files ipg ipeg My Network F E Open as read only To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Oval Stan
304. eld Example of Creating Custom Validation As an example of custom validation assume that a field collects telephone numbers and you want to make sure the user enters 10 digits To accomplish this follow these steps 1 Insert a Text Field 2 Complete the Text Field dialog s General tab 3 Click the Validation tab 4 In the Validation dropdown list select Custom Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 601 Working with HTML Forms Text Field Validation Data Style General Must equal another number X 5 Inthe Data Type field select Whole Number from the drop down list This ensures that the user can only enter digits Text Field General Validation Data Style Validation Custom a Message Custom Validation Data Type Whole number Plain text URL Decimal number Floating point number 6 Click the down arrow to the right of the Examples field to see sample logic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 602 Working with HTML Forms Custom Validation Data Type Condition Number between two values QX lt and lt y Must equal another number X Must not equal another number Maximum text length string length lt 47 7 Click Maximum text length This option lets you specify the length of the user s response 8 string length lt x appears in the Condition field 9 Since you want the user s input t
305. eld labeled From At the dropdown list following OR to addresses in field select the field you created in Step 1 Now when a user completes the form the value he enters in the field created in Step 1 is used for the email s From address Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields You can retrieve data from a submitted form directly to the form s Subject and Preamble fields The subject is a standard mail field and the preamble is text that appears at the beginning of the email For example the form may provide a list of your products While the user is completing the form he selects a product that he is interested in The product then becomes the subject line of the email Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 209 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Since a Textarea field can span multiple lines it can only be used with the preamble However a plain text field can be used with both the subject and preamble To retrieve data dynamically from a form field into the email s subject line or preamble follow these steps 1 Adda form field that collects the information you want to insert into the email s subject line or preamble See Also Inserting Form Fields on page 169 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section See Also Editing a Form on page 210 3 Move to the field labeled Subject or Preamble 4 At the dropdown list following OR use text in field select the field you
306. eld when you want a site visitor to select from a predetermined list You can allow a site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list s items and appearance To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Country Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 605 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click the Choices field button See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 587 3 The following dialog appears Choices Field General Data Style List Custom Allow Selection Appearance O Only one Vertical List More than one Horizontal List _ A selection is required List Box First item is not a valid selection Drop List d Item List iaee e EE l eo O sai Ee e ee ee O Option Fields on the Choices Dialog SS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 618 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 606 Working with HTML Forms SS Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in re
307. elect Set Cell Properties In the Background Image field click the ellipsis button to open the Library From there select an image for the cell s background See Also Library Folder on page 131 Click Update Note that when you apply a background image to a cell If the cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell lf the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 561 Working with Table Cells Deleting a Background Image Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Cell Properties Delete the value in the Background Image field Click Update ae YY Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the Sports Teams row spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges C Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 562 Working with Table Cells Colleges C
308. em is not a valid selection For example Select men Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Fie a Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 190 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this See Also Customizing a Standard List on page 192 Languages list of languages supported by Windows Countries list of all countries in the world U S States and Territories list of all states and territories that make up the U S Canadian Provinces list of all Canadian provinces Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Years list of calendar years ranging from 2004 to 2
309. ems without reviewing them follow these steps 1 Select the submitted content you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Item on page 89 Click the Approve All button IA The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer ee x E This action will approve all the selected content changes awaiting your approval ws This may cause some content blocks to become published or deleted Do you wish to continue Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 90 Approving Declining Content 4 To continue click OK 5 The approved content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain e Sports Writer creates sports content e Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles e Editor In Chief edits and publishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to explain a typical approval chain e Creating Content on page 91 e First Approver on page 93 e Second Approver on p
310. en you insert the image into the content WeblmageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a New Image If you create an image in WebImageFX and then exit WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg lf you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 712 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed description of each function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 689 Editing Images File Menu Options Brief Description For more information see Toolbar Command Button Create New Creates a new image Create New on page 699 Open Selects an image to edit Open on page 705 Save Saves changes to an image Save on page 711 Saves the current image under a Save As on page 712 different name or format Save As Performs a single page scan Twain Acquire on Twain Acquire Before scanning you m
311. ences to the fixed version This word occurs more than once in the text Would you like to replace all instances Add to Dictionary Add the selected word to the dictionary Do this if it is correctly spelled and you expect to use the word in the future Once you add a word to the dictionary it will no longer be highlighted by the spell checker The word can also now appear on the correctly spelled words list Technical note Words added using this option are placed in a txt file located in the host server s site root Workarea Foundation RadControls Spell TpF folder The file s name begins with the selected language and ends with custom txt For example if the language is U S English the file is en US custom txt Using the Spell Checker e As soon as you select an option the spell checker moves to the next misspelled word and displays its options e If you finish spell checking all words you return to edit mode e Instead of stopping at every misspelled word you can place the cursor on any highlighted word When you do its spelling options appear e lf you are done before fixing every misspelled word click Finish spell checking from the toolbar circled below If you do your changes are saved and you return to edit mode ve focus on asisting people with some of the most complex 3 nples are hemophilia cancer immune disorders and kidney he J r y applying our expertise in medical devices pharmace
312. ens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 26 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Source of Default Information Editable User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message appears If desired you on the screen see below If you then insert a valid can add email address the email is sent recipients by Ss typing them ae tence a ese ess immed into this field x Administrater Ektron com If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Subject If the email message is linked to content its title appears If the email message is linked to content a link to the message content appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 27 Working with Folders and Content Working with Folders and Content Every content item resides in the Content folder or one of its subfolders So to wo
313. ent e last user who edited content e comments entered by user to describe nature of changes made To view any version click its title When you do the Content History window appears for that content The Content Version Number Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a unique number to each saved version of a content block The number is increased by one tenth if the content is checked in but not published If the content is published the next whole number is assigned For example if the current version is 1 0 and you check in that content the new version is 1 1 If the next editor publishes it the new version is 2 0 lf the content is purged the numbering scheme restarts with the remaining content The Detail History Window After viewing the View Content History window you can click any version to see the detail for it The detailed History window has two sides e The left side redisplays the information in the content history window See Also gt The Content History Window on page 109 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 110 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e The right side displays the selected version of the content After viewing a version of content you can perform these actions on tt Restore Restore historical version of Restoring a Previous content Version on page 111 View Difference Compare historical version to Comparing Historical current version Versions on page 112 View History Vie
314. ent action as if it ngo never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Begi ll checker Checking Spelling Insert a bookmark anchor Using Bookmarks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 491 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Change information about a hyperlink Using Hyperlinks E Add edit Hyperlink pae Remove a hyperlink Removing a Hyperlink on page 525 Remove Hyperlink Insert a library file Adding a Library Library File to Content on page 148 Create a wiki link Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature on page 8 A Translate Translate content into another language Translating Content aS to Another Language on l Add Wiki Link Insert a horizontal line Horizontal Line Insert symbols and special characters Display a list of style sheet classes Users can select from the list to apply a class to selected text The list can change depending on the selected text Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Insert Symbol Apply CSS Class Apply CSS clr Display a list of paragraph styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected text The list can change depending on the selected text Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Paragraph Style Normal B Bold Ctrl B Make selected text bold Ektron CMS
315. ents on page 227 NOTE Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Press the Word toolbar button f The following dialog may appear warning you that some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word Edit in ford i ou are about to edit your document in MS Word Due to the limitations of HTML there may be a loss of formatting when returning the document to the editor Do you wish to proceed 4 Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word Edit content as desired Press File gt Close 7 Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 668 Editing in Microsoft Word 8 When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Word toolbar button again 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button 13 lf you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears
316. enu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the a WE fe dh beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 652 Customizing Your Toolbar Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below ee EBM om Ye wee 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below 25 Bae F lt 5 T m mi A 2 kj Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 653 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mouse within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key Eh Because this menu can change depen
317. er Click OK The page refreshes and the folder is removed ot oe oS Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Photos To add an image to My Workspace gt gt Photos follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Select a folder where the image will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 418 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 420 My Workspace 3 Click the Add Image button 4 The Add Asset Photo Data box appears Add Assets Photo Data Fill out the description and then click next to drag and drop image s Fill in the description of the image optional 6 Select a Maximum Width Choices are 250 800 1000 1400 or 1600 pixels 7 Enter a map address associated with image For example 542 Amherst Street Nashua NH 03036 8 Click Next 9 The Drag and drop upload box appears 10 Drag and drop an image in the box 11 A status box appears and shows the file being uploaded Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 421 My Workspace 12 Once the upload is complete the page refreshes and the asset appears in the file list Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos You can change the folder where images are stored in My Workspace gt gt Photos by moving the content from one folder to another In addition to moving images you can copy them to another folder T
318. er needs permission to add content to the folder that contains the content being edited There are two ways to create a wiki link They are contrasted below Advantages For more information see Surround text with square Creating a Wiki Link brackets Using Square Brackets on page 782 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 778 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature Advantages For more information see Use the wiki button a e Can link to existing content or create new Using the Wiki Button e Can choose new content s folder Note Membership users cannot choose a folder The new content is created in the same folder as the content being edited e Can change title of new content e Can select new window s target frame Using the Wiki Button To create a wiki link using the wiki button follow these steps 1 Begin editing a content item For CMS users this is explained in Editing HTML Content on page 52 For membership users this is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Community Folders 2 Select the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink It can be one or several words 3 Click the Wiki button l NOTE The Wiki button only appears if you have permission to add content to the folder that contains the current content 4 The Add Edit Wiki Link screen appears It has two tabs Ektron CMS400 N
319. eral our responses t ID 119 Size 17 KB Last Author Application Administrator The Diet Cancer Link 8 30 2006 T 2034 AM The Diet Cancer Link By Simon Mitchell Attitudes to the link between diet and cancer are changing fast The World Cancer Research Fund was founded specifically to fund and sponsor education and research into the diet cancer link There is mounting evidence that the high fat intake in a typical WCancer ID 89 Size 16 KB Last Author Application Administrator As you can see content on the search results screen begins with the title and last edited date time Following them is either an abstract or the summary of the content This is determined by your web developer in the Web Search server control Following the abstract is additional information such as content ID number size last author etc Search Result Ranking Each content item found by a catalog search is given a numerical rank between 0 and 1000 Search results can be sorted by rank Criteria used to calculate rank include the e number of occurrences of the search term Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 118 Searching the Workarea e proximity of search term to beginning of file e proximity of search term to other occurrences of the term e whether the term is in the title The Advanced Search Tab The Advanced Search within the Workarea finds content that satisfies these criteria IMPORTANT The Advanced search finds content w
320. ermissions screen To add a blog follow these steps 1 Go to the Workarea s Content folder 2 Click the folder in which the blog will reside 3 Click New gt Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 316 Blogs 4 The Add a Blog screen appears Add a Blog to folder Blog Ty a Blog Name S Blog Title 6 visibility Comments Enable Comments Moderate Comments Require Authentication 5 Fill out the Properties tab according to the table below Field Desorption Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site Visibility Choose whether the site is private or public Any site visitor can view the blog Private A site visitor must log in to view the blog This includes membership and Ektron CMS400 NET users Comments Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 6 On the Subjects tab add subjects to the blog For more information on blog Subjects see Blog Subjects on page 322 7 Onthe Blog Roll tab add blog sites that you want blog readers to visit For more information on blog rolls see The Blog Roll on page 327 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 317 Blogs IMPORTANT See Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 318 for additional properties that are only available
321. erts Office documents to HTML format which means they are formatted to display within a browser As a result anyone visiting your site can view the document whether or not Microsoft Office is installed on their computer WARNING Only Microsoft Word and Excel documents can be published as HTML Ektron CMS400 NET does not support saving Powerpoint or Visio documents as HTML There are two ways to save an Office document in html format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 249 Using the Document Management System Method Advantages For details see Drag and drop Office document into You don t need to know the path Saving an Office CMS400 NET to your Web site s root folder Document as html from Use Edit in MS Office option to Ektron CMS400 NET on save it in html format page 251 Open an Office document on your You don t need to drag and drop Saving Office Document computer document to CMS400 NET as html from Your Save it in html format to the Computer on page 252 ekdavroot folder in your Web root Warnings About Saving in html Format Regardless of how you save Office documents as HTML be careful to set up procedures that prevent HTML content from being overwritten For example 1 You save a Word document as html 2 Someone edits the html version 3 You save the original Office Document as html again In this scenario the edits made in step 2 are overwritten by step 3 It is important to e
322. es For example you can change the calendar years so they begin in 1995 and run through 2020 To do this follow these steps Choose the standard list that you want to customize Change the value of the List field to Custom All of the predefined choices appear in the Item List box To e add new items use the Item Value and Text fields gt D N z e delete an existing list item select it and click Remove e rearrange the list use the Move Up and Move Down buttons e edit a list item select it and press the Change button Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 192 Working with HTML Forms 1 Place a Calendar field Fg onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Calendar Field Descriptive Hame Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value oy Validation Validation No validation v Eror Message crcl Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Se Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters
323. es for newly added metadata to be available to the search e Searchable metadata field names must not include a space If they do the search cannot find the metadata e To find content with searchable metadata whose style is yes or no enter true OF false Display of Published Search Results Below is an example of the Search Published results screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 117 Searching the Workarea Search Content Folder oa Ar EE tee ed Pn ee Ba Sik ee ie PE ele CT ee ne ne ee me re ee me ee ee howe hime et Bessa Bes Bess ea Beatie Respect T Aa T eer T aa T aaa E a T a T ET Ba peat n ET A i Sah han TAR P LE T rae E A r a A mAn i PM ta eni aa soa Ped aa Doe ta Bed aia tE a PUNi oe ad ta eL r aieri Baa etat KA Patatai BA Batat DA aan Ball Datin all fe a wave olis e CIN wat he ae ee a ne ae Ge a Dah te ca e p the ie E eee ee x 7 i j EITAN L Sag ra eT FNE ca a a hah fishes 2 Mai eS See ee ee ee kania ha as Daan a one a 1 a a se a cee sa a oe aoe ra t t earch Published Advanced Search Basic Search Search Site Results 1 10 of 12 for cancer 0 23 seconds Avoid Cancer 3 9 2006 11 23 52 AM In general our responses to cancer are converging but very slowly Presently all cancer authorities are agreed on only one thing cancer cannot take hold in a healthy immune system Avoid Cancer Dont Get Cancer by Simon Mitchell One antidote to cancer is information In gen
324. es that a response to the Telephone field is 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message indicates the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 596 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits an entire form not when the input is entered If an invalid response is found the error message that you define appears The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc TIP If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after a form is submitted If the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields You can insert the following types of fields onto an HTML form e Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 591 e Inserting a Text Field on page 592 e Inserting a Choices Field on page 605 e Inserting a Calendar Field on page 609 See Also Inserting or Editing Buttons on the Form on page 612 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 590 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is one character wi
325. escribed in Viewing a Collection on page 428 Click the Reorder button The Reorder Collection screen appears Reorder Collection Support Packages LJ ht Bee Cnternal Support Policies RC International Support support Request Form 4 gt 5 Click the content whose order you want to change Click the up or down arrow to move the content in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button i Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 428 3 Click the collection whose information you want to change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 439 Working with Collections 4 Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 431 Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page
326. escribes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this Note If after seeing the following predefined choices you want to customize the choices available to site visitors return to this field replace the value with Custom then define the ranges you want in the Item field Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Gender Use the predefined choices for gender You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Marital Status Use the predefined choices for marital status You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Allow Click More than one to allow the site visitor to select more than one item on Selection the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one
327. esssesseeesseeeesseeeseeeeenes 306 PILING a laS Kunssu aA eesaeeeeeans 309 Viewing a Task s History cceeseceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeneeens 310 Task Module Toolbar cccssecssseccesecenseecnseeceneeseneeseneesees 311 le E 312 Adm A BIOD dentate ccetonimnarancsyaegayeucsrcninnaeerainnan tua esieiauneeoies 316 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 iv Biog ProperlioS ee er eee ose ee nee eer er eee ene eee 318 Language SUD DON sacsosccaninescsccsracestansnsssencosestsennsnanatntecnmasessnceass 336 Deleting a BlOg 336 Seal China BIOS sarreria 337 Subscribing Unsubscribing to a BIOG cscccssseeseeseesesees 337 BIO Sle aatateaatcete tones haccepasce cet nenetcamenseces detec apacucaneeeeuneeacienecens 341 Blog Comments wd saictcnicesdeeninan nan iastncrnerssracuaeariarentiossionigumarunaene 350 Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer 358 Personalizing a Web Page scescsees 303 Layout of a Personalization Page ccccsssscseeeseeeeneeneeseeees 364 Personalizing a Web Page cccsssssseeessesseeesenseeseeesneeseeeneeeees 365 The Page CAG Oy eatcisvasntiaisinceeedtaniviansdetcessawsseesesd enetemncurasceoxsias 375 My WorkSpace sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn OFC a E E A AOT 379 Mes Sagi a sctsamte sa can ame tene maaa aaia 390 Message Board casadcwewncaaspcsavncsannesavnasedmontnavaaimensnarcudneswomineues 397 Coleg ane een een
328. example below Cost USD Number of Days Costa Rica 3450 14 1835 To assign the color of your table s border follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Click the Border Color drop down circled below 1 a Ye YS Ed Table Properties Aek Des Border l _ Add Hex Color 6 Acolor selection box appears Click a color to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 552 Working with Tables 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Color Basic colors EE 61 Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 553 Working with Tables The border size only adjusts a table s exterior border it has no effect on the border between cells To assign a border size to your table follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Tab
329. ext Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Spanning Rows or Columns on page 754 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 754 Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 746 Word Wrap on page 61 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 756 Setting Vertical Alignment on page 757 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 50 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 752 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 749 728 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus EUD aan eo ee ete Te Wells All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 654 except Tables which is described in The Insert Table Menu on page 723 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 729 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying e anumber of rows and columns e awidth e horizontal alignment e a background color or image e border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these properties to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 746 for details e Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 730 e Specifying Table Width on page 732 e Specifying Ho
330. f event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All select Event Type To View oh aw All Company Holiday Trade Show Pesos ee Se coee ee ES eek Your system administrator can change this text Long Description Lets the user enter additional text while adding a calendar event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 268 Working with Calendars SS Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder The View Calendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks View Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on E Calendar page 269 e Back Return to previous screen Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section explains how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 264 2 Click the View Calendar 31
331. fication Zoom In on page 717 ao zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out on page 18 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 691 Editing Images Image Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see image info Displays information about an image pen dimensions Modifies an image s width and 7 height color depth Changes the number of colors available to an image e eee Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 713 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 694 Image Info on page 03 Dimensions on page 00 Color Depth on page 697 Blur on page 693 contrast Changes the difference between Contrast on page 698 light and dark areas of an image dh horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left Horizontal Flip on to right page 03 tz vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to Vertical Flip on bottom page 717 c5 rotate Turns an image a specified number Rotate on page 711 of degrees Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 692 Editing Images Annotation Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection on page 707 E choose color Sets the color for an annotation Choose Color on before you insert it page 695 AA c
332. file Be sure to place the cursor where you want the quicklink or form to appear before inserting it When the quicklink or form is inserted the title of the jumped to content appears in the content To test the quicklink or form select the newly inserted title and double Click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 143 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a file The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display Field Desorption Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 153 Library Folder Feld Description Last User to Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS400 NET library To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the bottom of
333. following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Height If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 481 Updating Your User Profile Fd Powerit Display button text in Check this box if you want any button s caption text to appear in the screen the title bar title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after If you want one page in your Web site to appear after sign in enter the login URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS400 NET resides For example if th
334. following information about its content Field Description OO The name of the content The language of the content The number assigned to the content by Ektron CMS400 NET Itis used to retrieve the content from a database Status The status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 Date The most recent date the content was added edited or Modified published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 31 Viewing a Folder p as Last Editor The last user who accessed the content The following menus and button appear across the top of the View Contents of Folder screen View Contents of Folder Root 2 NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all menu options e New Menu on page 32 e View Menu on page 33 e Delete Menu on page 34 e Action Menu on page 35 e Add Asset button E See Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 235 e Content Dropdown Menu on page 35 New Menu Menu Option Lets you create or upload For more information see this new item into folder Discussion Board Discussion Board Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Discussion Boards Discussion Boards on page 471 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 32 Viewing a Folder Menu Option Lets you create or upload For more information see this new item into folder Community Folder Folder whose content can be Ektron CMS
335. g access to high quality heal for underserved populations 6 T Enter summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup file When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for Existing Content 1 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Navigate to the folder that contains the content Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle 4 and select Edit or Edit Properties from the dropdown menu The View Content screen appears Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen When done click the appropriate button The View Content page reappears Z9 Adding a Content Summary NOTE When you enter or edit existing content s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content that is published checked in or checked out by you To edit a content s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40
336. g by adding their thoughts about a blog post The blog administrator controls commenting by deciding who can add comments and if they require approval for publication See Also e Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 e Comments on the Site on page 352 e Comments in the Workarea on page 354 Controlling Blog Comments Ektron CMS400 NET provides three properties for controlling comments Use the Blog Properties screen to set them See Also Blog Properties on page 318 The following table describes these properties Ca aaa Enable Comments Allows user in Workarea and site visitor to add blog comments Also displays comments on site and in Workarea Note A member of the Administrators group can always add comments regardless of how this checkbox is set Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 350 Blogs aS Moderate Comments Determines if comments must be approved before they appear on site If this field is checked only users with permission to edit the post can approve comments see illustration of this permission below View Permissions for Folder Blog Allow this object to inherit permissions _ The content in this folder is private and can only View Advanced Permissions User or Group Mame Read Only Edit Add Delete F bob K HOO N H If users without this permission add comments they only appear on the Web site after being approved by someone with permission to edit
337. ge 287 e Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 294 e Creating a Task from the Web Site on page 299 e Creating a Task via the Content Folder on page 299 NOTE Tasks can also be created automatically when forms are submitted See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 195 e Viewing a Task on page 300 e Editing a Task on page 305 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 306 e Deleting a Task on page 309 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 286 Managing Tasks Viewing a Task s History on page 310 Task Module Toolbar on page 311 Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of the following subtopics Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 287 Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 288 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 294 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame O Smart Desktop BE Tasks H Reports Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else Created By Me tasks you created Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started Active tasks whose state is set to Active Await
338. ge must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that includes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 685 Inserting Images Files Waiting for Upload al Hone wnet 13 KB Estimated Upload Time 00 00 05 Files for Upload Upload Now Upload Later beanie Preview All inserted files appear in the dialog which also estimates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user reading the Web pages moves the cursor over the image Deleting a Picture lf you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 686 Editing Images WebImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as e brightening e rotating e changing the color depth
339. ge your password you do not need to log out then log back in However the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS400 NET Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices User Language English Ls E Mail Address Disable E MaF Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification email is sent to this address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 25 Forum Editor Determines which editor will be used when this user replies to a Discussion Board See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Discussion Boards gt Using Discussion Boards on your Web Site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 479 Updating Your User Profile Fed Powerit An image or icon to represent you on the Web site Type in a web path to image For example http www example com smileyface gif Posted Tuesday 0 This is a test repl John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Address The address used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Lati
340. ges on page 152 Previews item that was or will be added Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 62 bale hl eli eli el ie Workarea Toolbar Buttons Name Description Publish Save and publish the content Removes items from folders and lists in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also Working with Collections on page 424 Restore Restores previously published content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 108 Saves content that was modified Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 136 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea See Also Working with Calendars on page 261 Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated View all calendar events for a selected day View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 View History View history of selected content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 108 View Published Displays currently published version of content e eee ee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 63 Workarea Toolbar Buttons Se View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page 806 Selects the language of the content being displayed JEW E Engi US
341. ges into the table cells To further modify the table see Modifying Table Properties on page 535 You can also select the table and drag its right border to the right and or down to enlarge it for ease of use Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard 1 Click the table button gt 2 Click Table Wizard circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 533 Working with Tables 3 The Table Wizard dialog appears Table Wizard x HA Table Design iF E Table Properties Y go Cell Properties kd Accessibility Columns Z Column Span Hi sse a 3uuMson 4 To change the number of columns or rows click the plus or minus signs next to Columns and Rows The image adjusts to show the number of rows and columns 6 Press OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 534 Working with Tables 7 Begin entering text and images into the table cells To further modify the table see Modifying Table Properties on page 535 Modifying Table Properties To modify a table s properties follow these steps 1 Click inside the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Set Table Properties 4 The Table Wizard dialog appears Table Wizard X HA Table Design F E Table Properties Y go Cell Properties kd fe Accessibility Columns Column Span H mesoa t JauuMmson The dialog has four tabs described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual
342. gs are keywords that are associated with a user or community group in CMS400 See Also The Developer Manual section gt Community Management gt Tags To use the basic search enter a name email group name or tag into the text box Then click the Search button Any matches appear in the results See Also Using Community Search Results on page 408 You can also perform wildcard searches but the wildcard must appear after the first letter in the search For example you can search for J but not J J returns all users and community Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 405 My Workspace groups that start with the letter J or have a word that starts with the letter J in their email tags or description Advanced User Searching The Advanced tab lets you filter search results for users and community groups based on selected criteria The filters to select from are the same criteria as a basic search But with advanced searching you select which filters you apply to the search results For example you can select the Tag filter and the Display Name filter and you will only see results that have Tag and Display Name information that match the given criteria See Also Performing a Basic User Search on page 405 Basic Search Advanced Search Add Filter Groups Add Filter If you apply several filters they work in an and fashion where results must match each filter For example if yo
343. h Ektron s new project management starter application aoe Bo J O O JCONDMIONS O J d O Width 50 Alignment Classname Apply CSS Cl Set Image Properties 23 Height ii Border color lt b Border Width ToolTip The following explains the fields on the Image Properties dialog ic Ion Border Width Set the width of the image s border in pixels See Also Setting a Border on page 513 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 510 Working with Images See Border Color To set the color of the image s border click the X circled below When you do a palette of colors appears Click the border color from the palette Image Alt Text Long Description EGnE EEE S BUBERE SE BUBEHEEOD EHEHEH Add Custom Color Add Hex Color If a color has already been assigned it appears next to this field label To change it click down arrow next to the color to display the color palette Image Alt Text The image s title is used as the default alt text Change if desired The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image does not display Examples of when an image does not display include a speech browser for example a visually impaired person a text only browser for example browsing from a mobile phone a graphical browser with images turned off Image Alignment The alignment of the image relative to adjacent text and images If you choose left or right alignmen
344. has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 4 The Add Task screen appears The content you were viewing is assigned to the task 5 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 288 The only differences are e the content s ID number and title appear on the screen e the language of the content is the default language Creating a Task via the Content Folder The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder You can also assign task via the content folder as illustrated below View Content ASP NET Unleashed Ly EEr aA BAe e viewJEngishUs gt Content SERS Meta Data Comment Task Title ASP NET Unleashed pie Subject Computer Programming ISBN 067232542 Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 299 2 Managing Tasks Access the View Content screen for the content to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Click the Add Task button CA IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions
345. hat message appears See Also A new screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are on page 160 e Content is found by the search Workarea and site Content is visible within its taxon omy display Content is visible if site visitor enters exact path such as http localhost CMS400Developer dynamic aspx id 1014 amp _ taxo nomyid 14 Can users view and edit content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Yes within its folder by clicking the View gt Archive Content option Also can be found via Basic Search and Advanced search if the Archived check box is checked Yes in the active area of its folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Restoring Content from Archived to Active State Navigate to its folder Options on page 69 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 To restore content from archived state to active follow these steps 2 Click View gt Archived Content See Setting Archive 71 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 3 Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle 4l and select Edit from the dropdown menu The Edit Content in Folder screen appears Click the Schedule tab Remove the End Date or change it to a future date eo 2 ol gt Submit the content for publishing When the conte
346. he Built In User field N Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password 5 Click the Update button NOTE If you cannot sign in to Ektron CMS400 NET because the builtin user password was changed and you don t know the new password use the BuiltinAccountReset exe utility This resets your Ektron CMS400 NET user Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Reference Manual Version 7 5 Rev 7 ii Securing Ektron CMS400 NET password to Builtin Builtin This utility is located in c Program Files Ektron CMS400versionnumber Utilities ServerControlWS asmx Best Practice For improved security Ektron recommends renaming or removing the Web services file when you move it to your production server After installation this file is named ServerControlWS asmx and resides in the webroot siteroot Workarea folder ServerControlWS asmx is the Web service that lets the server controls talk to Ektron CMS400 NET The path is coded in the web config file This is how it appears lt Web Service URL for Server Controls design time gt lt add key WSPath value http localhost CMS400Developer Workarea ServerControlWS asmx gt You will need to edit this line if you change the location or name of the ServerControlWS asm x file Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Reference Manual Version 7 5 Rev 7 ili Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Reference Manual Version 7 5 Rev 7 iv T
347. he Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 10 Move the cursor to the Link field 11 Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 12 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Select the hyperlinked text Right click your mouse Click Set Link Properties The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears Ce Se YS Edit the fields as needed Several fields are explained in Entering a Hyperlink on page 522 6 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink If you want to remove a hyperlink from text select the text and press the Remove Link button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 525 Using Hyperlinks Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink If you enter a URL or an email address into ewebEdit400 it automatically becomes a hyperlink To avoid this select the text and click the Remove Link toolbar button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 526 Inserting email Links You can easily insert email links into your content Such links provide an easy way for your site visitors to communicate with your organization An email link resembles a hyperlink But when a site visitor clicks the link instead of opening a different Web page his email application is launched At ektron Medical people with some off conditions Some ex g cancer
348. he checkbox next to each colleague whose request you want to cancel Click the Cancel Colleague Requests button oO A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are canceling the colleague requests Click OK Resending an Invitation To resend an invitation follow these steps 1 4 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests lf necessary add a message to the Optional Message box Place a check mark in the boxes next to the users that you want to re send an invitation Click the Resend Invitation button The pages refreshes and returns to the My Sent Invites screen Community Groups Another aspect of a community site is the concept of Community Groups Being a part of a group allows you meet people with a similar interest for example car racing You can access your community group information in My Workspace gt Community Groups This area allows you to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 412 My Workspace e view community groups to which you belong see Viewing Your Community Groups on page 413 e remove yourself from a community group see Remove Yourself from a Community Group on page 413 e view the different community groups to which you have asked to join but have yet to be accepted see Working with Pending Community Groups on page 414 e view and accept invitations for any groups you have been invited to join see Working with C
349. he cursor is Columns on page 731 currently resting Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 731 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 731 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells a Merge Cells Combines the contents of two or Merging Two Cells on page 760 more selected cells into one Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell Splitting a Cell on page 759 occupies one half the size of the Original cell Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table The Table Properties Dialog Box on properties such as the number of page 725 rows and columns cell padding and borders Cell Properties Displays and lets you edit cell The Cell Properties Dialog Box on properties such as width and page 727 alignment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 724 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance Insert T able Size Rows E 4 Toe Cancel ib ae x Columns Layout Borders Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background
350. he database and or emailed along with the rest of the data To insert a hidden text field follow these steps Place a hidden text field fab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 The following dialog appears N Hidden text field Descriptive Name Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 Value coe Fields on the Hidden Text Field Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 175 Working with HTML Forms ree p Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Value Enter the value that will be saved with this field when the form is submitted Inserting a Text Field Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted free text response To insert a plain text field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following
351. he following table describes the collection toolbar buttons Add Add new collection or add items to a Creating a Collection or collection on page 430 Remove Remove items from a collection Removing Content from the Collection on page 438 Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 439 Edit Edit collection information Editing Collection Information on page 439 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 440 Return to previous screen Creating a Collection Creating a collection involves two steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 430 Working with Collections e Adding a Collection on page 431 e Assigning Content to the Collection on page 434 The following sections explain each step Note This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 440 See Also Working with Collections on page 424 Adding a Collection To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder in which you want to create the collection 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 440 3 Click New gt Collection NOTE If you access the coll
352. he next available number appended to it For example mypicture 2 Adding Documents Using the DMS Document Option To add a new Office document to Ektron CMS400 NET via the New gt DMS Document menu option follow these steps From the Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 3 The default language icon appears next to the screen title To create a document for a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click New gt DMS Document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 232 Using the Document Management System 5 The following screen appears Edit Content in Folder Root Tile nats 0 5 9 Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Templates Please select a file to upload fs Browse 6 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import Click OK 7 Enter a Title NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc 8 Use the Content Searchable checkbox to determine if the content should be searchable See Also Content Searchable on page 46 9 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Sched
353. hed or staged content m Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server Note The save option saves the version of the content you are viewing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 103 Comparing Versions of Content ioe vom o a Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 104 a p Displays additional information about the compare feature Exit Closes the window EBH Setup Click the Setup button to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings w Ektron eWebDittf f Compare visual aspect f Compare source code Whitespace Other C ignore All f Smart Detect f Detect All ignore Case lgnore format m attributes Cancel You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option Description Compare Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 104 Comparing Versions of Content ee Compare visual aspect Compare source code Whitespace Options Ignore All Smart Detect Detect All Other Options Ignore Case Ignore Format Attributes Compares content as it would appear on a Web page Displays compared content as source HTML
354. hese steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content whose history you want to view 2 Click the item whose history you want to view 3 The View Content Screen appears 4 Click the View History button Ta Accessing the Content History from a Web Page To access the history for content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view Click the View History menu option Oi view History The Content History window opens The Content History Window Yiew Content History Yersion Last Edit Date published date Content Tite Last User To Edit 2 0 40 2007 Welcome to Devycenter Community Administrator Applic daa 4 10 2007 Welcome to Deycenter Community Administrator Applic 1 0 3 22 2007 Welcome to Devcenter Community Administrator Applic 0 1 sfeef200 Welcome to Deycenter Community Administrator Applic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 109 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content The View Content History window lists every version of the content available in Ektron CMS400 NET The window displays the following information for each version e version number See Also gt The Content Version Number on page 110 e agreen circle indicates a version that was published Versions without a green circle indicate content that was checked in but not published e date and time when a version was checked in or published e title of cont
355. hether or not it is marked Searchable e user must have read only or greater permission for content s folder e matches selected language if site is multi lingual e satisfies criteria entered on the screen see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 119 Searching the Workarea Search Content Folder Search Published Adwa nced Search Content lForms M Assets J Include Archived All the words Match Partial Words oe Date Created between None and None Date Modified between None and None Status Any The Advanced Search Tab helps you find Ektron CMS400 NET content by specifying the following criteria All fields are optional However the search only finds content that satisfies all criteria e the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content forms assets e asearch word or words Unlike the Search Published tab you cannot use a query e how the search words must match the content in order for a document to be found e whether the title is searched e whether the comments are searched Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 120 Searching the Workarea e arange of created or modified dates e the editor who updated the content most recently e the content s status e any searchable metadata assigned to the folder See Also e Using the Advanced Search on page 121 e Specifying the Kind of Content to Search on page 122
356. hey appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 680 Inserting Images dialog box Layout width Height Border Thickness p Alignment Mot set Reset Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border lll Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel vena Mel lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width fi B Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Y Reset When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 681 Inserting Images e baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline e bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends e top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extend
357. hoose font Sets the color of text before you Choose Font on insert it page 696 ae freehand Draws a line in any shape that you Freehand on want page 02 Draws a straight line Line on page 704 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure Polygon on page 708 surrounded by straight lines rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 09 Blur Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from O through 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 693 Editing Images If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box men Brightness Standard Toolbar Button S Description Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32 darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area NOTE You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 718 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 694 Editing Images w Brightness JOf Brightness Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button pes Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box
358. hose found in the Content folder structure For example you view edit delete and copy content and assets From the Documents area you can add a folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 380 edit a folder s name see Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 381 delete a folder see Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 383 drag and drop an asset see Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 384 create an HTML file see Creating HTML Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 385 move a content item to another folder see Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 38 7 select whether to share the folder with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the folder private see Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 389 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 379 My Workspace E Documents Eil ly Workspace J UPSPACE re aaeeei orkspace Requirements 1 0 Community Groups 44 Favorites No subcategory exists H Colleagues ae Journal S Message Board ae Messaging ing The requirements of the project will be announced soon 44 Photos HTML Content and Assets can be displayed on the site when a developer adds the CommunityDocuments server control to a Community Web site For additional information on the
359. ht mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 708 Editing Images Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this command click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangles line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 709 Editing Images Attributes Redo Standard Toolbar Button Description If you use the Undo command and then decide that it was a mistake use this command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 717 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 717 Zoom Out on page 718 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 710 Editing Images Rotate Standard Toolbar Button GI Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image e left or right e 90 180 or 270 degrees e any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Dialog Box w Rotate Of x fc 180 C 270 jao 1 353 ro Save Standard Toolbar Button m Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this
360. ibrary item s description when returning search results Otherwise the search ignores the description For example if you enter Ektron into the keyword field the search returns all library files that include that string Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 138 Library Folder SS Filename Search If you check this box the search considers the file name when returning search results Otherwise the file name is not considered by the search For example if you enter ppt into the keyword field the search returns all files that include that string Such as all Powerpoint presentations Only search items The search only considers library assets that were last modified by last edited by myself you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Metadata Definitions screen NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles while others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a Square you can choose as many as you want The search displays library items that meet the search criteria on the search results screen You can click any item to view its properties such as Library ID number Last Edit Date and Description Displaying Search Results Search results appear in this order e images e files e hyperlinks e quicklinks e form links Result Display Options At the top of the library search screen a pull down list lets you choose the
361. ic Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A required response is required Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn Canada Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is Canada Required required Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada required The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required Inserting a Password Field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry appears as dots instead of characters This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password A user s password entry cannot exceed 18 characters To insert a password field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 180 Working with HTML Forms Descriptive Hame Field Field Name Fed Tool Tip Text Field Default value Validation validation No validation Error Message Fields on
362. ic Guitars Rock amp Roll When a person visits a blog search site and searches for Rock amp Roll music your blog post appears Some blog search sites have a page specifically for searching blog tags Editing a Blog Post NoTE Tobe able to edit a blog post you must have Edit permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to edit a blog post IMPORTANT If another editor changes a blog post the posting information reflects the new editor the date and the time the information was changed This is important to remember if you want the original person who posted the blog to get credit for the post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the blog post title you want to edit Click the Edit button 3 4 Change the blog post 5 When the blog is published the changes appear in the blog post on the Web site Approving a Blog Post If someone who is not a member of the blog s approval chain creates or edits a blog post its status is set to Submitted It will only appear on the Web site after a member of the chain approves it While its status is Submitted it has yellow border on the View Posts in blog screen To approve a blog post see Approving Declining Content on page 87 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual
363. ic and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to follow operating instructions ili negligence or accident or iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails
364. ice like Windows Live Spaces If you do not already have an account with an existing blog service create one now Edit Proxy Settings Click Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 360 Blogs Stee Windows Live Writer Setup Screen In the Select Provider widow Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta choose Custom fc Metaweblog AP An Select Provider from the Type of ae weblog that you are using dropdown Windows Live Writer was not able to automatically detect your blog box settings Please select the type of blog that you are using to continue Type ht ea catia In the Remote posting URL for Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta your weblog Ka textbox add a link to W gy Select Provider the xmlrpc aspx file a for the site The default location for Windows Live Writer was not able to automatically detect your blog the file in the demo settings Please select the type of blog that you are using to continue site is http lt your site gt ee espa sesame Workarea Blogs xmlrpc aspx Click Next emDogs CMS400Demo Workarea Blogs xmirpc aspx Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 361 Blogs Step Windows Live Writer Setup Screen When the Weblog r Configuration Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta Complete window a appears Addablog MA A Weblog Configuration Complete name in the Weblog TE we Name field Thank you for using Windows Live Writer
365. ick hospitals medical health insurers to Indexed content w H id 4 To turn preview mode off click the preview button on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Click the Logout button in the content s floating toolbar or click the Logout button 4 loseut on the Web page 2 The Logout confirmation box appears 4 Ektron CMS Logout Microsoft Select Logout to logout of the system LOGOUT 3 Click the Logout button You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in standard view not Ektron CMS400 NET view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you perform all Ektron CMS400 NET activities From it you can e access the Smart Desktop e view the system s top level folders e navigate through the folder structure e perform actions on content This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics e Accessing the Workarea on page 15 e Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 e Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 20 e Sending Instant Email on page 25 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click the Workarea button at the bottom of the screen lt workare
366. ick OK The page refreshes and community group is removed from the Group Invites page and now appears in My Groups See Also Viewing Your Community Groups on page 413 Declining a Community Group Invite To decline an invitation to a community group follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group 3 Click the Decline Invitation button 1 4 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are declining the invitation 5 Click OK The page refreshes and community group is removed from the Group Invites page Favorites The Favorites area in My Workspace allows you to manage content you have designated as your favorite content From this area you can e Adda Folder see Adding a Favorites Folder on page 416 e Remove Favorites see Remove Favorites on page 416 e Move a favorite from one folder to another Moving Favorites to a Folder on page 416 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 415 My Workspace Adding a Favorites Folder To add a favorites folder follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites 2 Click the Add Folder button 3 Enter a Name and Description for the folder in the provided text boxes 4 Click the Add link to add the folder The folder appears in the list of Favorites Remove Favorites To remove a fav
367. ick the Manage Folder Button q amp 3 The Add Folder box appears 4 Click the Share Folder button qj 5 The Share Workspace box appears Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues Private Documents O O Requirements O O Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 389 My Workspace 6 Select with whom to share your folders The table below describes each option Viewer Type Description Public All people viewing your profile page can view your documents Colleagues Only people who are your colleagues can view your documents See Also Colleagues on page 400 Selected Colleagues Only colleagues who are marked as selected colleagues can view your documents Private You are the only one who can view your documents 7 Click the Share button Share 8 Documents in the folder are now available for viewing by the selected viewer type Messaging The messaging system allows you to send messages to other CMS400 and membership users Messages are similar to email The difference is messages are sent and received within CMS400 Web site or the Workarea When sending a message users can send it to multiple recipients The recipients can then read reply or forward the message Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 390 My Workspace ektron s Ee W 1 are a i Tere 4 Wy Jed din E G Documents Community Groups Content Project 10 10 2007 9 21 53 AM a Favori
368. ick the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit oe I Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 6 As necessary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 7 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Click the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 463 Working with Menus 3 The menu appears Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen for the menu appears Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit ot oY or oS Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 8 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 9 Update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 10 Click the Save button 3 Editing a Menu Item This section explains how to edit the following types of men
369. ield Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Allow maximum of 1000 characters Site visitors entry cannot exceed 1000 characters If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose
370. iew this list navigate to the Workarea gt My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Pending Groups Deleting a Pending Community Group lf a community group has not accepted your request to join you might want to delete the request Follow these steps to delete a pending community group request 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Pending Groups 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group 3 Click the Cancel Request button oO 4 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm the cancellation of the pending request 5 Click OK The page refreshes and the pending community group is removed from the list Working with Community Group Invites Members of a community group can invite people to join the group The Workarea allows you to view accept and decline pending group invites To view pending community group invites navigate to the Workarea gt My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites Accepting a Community Group Invite To accept an invitation to a community group follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 414 My Workspace 3 Click the Accept Community Group Invite button G3 4 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are accepting the invitation 5 Cl
371. iginal post any comments that have been added and a form to post new comments Depending on how the page is designed the calendar and blog roll can also appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 352 Blogs The Story of My Life This is the story of my life And I write it everyday I know it isn t black and white Eon And it s anything but gray a Slog Post T know that no Tm not alright But TE be OK cause Anything can everything can happen That s the story of my life epee spr ey eih Administrator at Original Blog Can t wait to read it 1icComment I i Posted by John Smith email visit on 7 02 14 2006 01 55 PM Scott s Blog Toby Tyler s Blo sans Music Artist of the Week John Smith Name required Best Week Ever Heare a comment F mail required URL The Comment Form NOTE See Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 to learn about how an administrator determines if and by whom comments can be submitted Site visitors regular users and Membership users can add comments by filling out the form on the comments page The form has five fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 353 Blogs Se The person submitting the comment This information is required Note This text box appears only when a site visitor who is not a regu
372. ign a new form Blank Survey A Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE If you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 4 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Click the Next button 6 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 620 Working with HTML Forms e Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the poll 7 Click the Next button 8 This screen lets you add a poll question and possible replies NOTE This screen allows you to add up to eight replies If you have more than eight __ replies you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button 9 Click the Next button 10 This screen indicates that you have entered the basic poll information and should click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields 11 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches so you can edit existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NoTE From this screen you can add more replies to your poll by right clicki
373. in the folder that contains the source content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 782 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature its name is typically the selected text However if the user used the wiki button he can modify the new content block s title on the Add Edit Wiki Link screen its initial text is New Content content for selected text Fill in the topic text as you or other collaborators have time gets the quicklink for the newly created content block 5 opens the original content and replaces the lt span gt tag with the quicklink to newly created content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 783 section 508 Compliance IMPORTANT This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act To learn about how the alternative editor eWebEdit400 complies with Section 508 see Section 508 Tables on page 570 This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifically this section explains the following topics e Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML on page 784 e Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 785 e Section 508 Tables on page 787 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Internet Explorer If the e
374. include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 131 Library Folder Library Folder Content hyperlinks m La e ei hyperlinks Tithe ID Date modified Ektron Inc 23 05 Sep 2002 05 46 PM Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the Web address www ektron com e A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Whenever content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table box is checked a quicklink is created for it Edit Content in Folder Content Title Jy Add to SLs table Content Searchable Content Summary Metadata Schedule Comn RBRMA OY mw Bi Apple Style Normal verdana e A formis a quicklink to HTML form content Whenever content is created a form link is automatically created for it Accessing The Library 1 Click the Workarea button or icon 3 2 Click the Library folder i
375. information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 711 Editing Images Dialog Box Save Image As Save Ir ADOBEAPP ima ge Gear Program Files BDE CH Inetpub CI PSFONTS CFUSION Install L System Volume Config Msi OnE dit_M anual Tech Pubs der Documents and Settings mspclnt Temp EktronD ey MSSOL Unzipped ewebeditpro biy Music y file drop Norton Systemworks 001 401 voroker framemaker test portutility WewletBuilderz eel 7 My Compute Dake ee File name JUntitledt Ps oa Save as type GIF Files gif Cancel A History My H NOTE The dialog box only appears the first time you save the image If you later want to save it to a different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button j Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 712 Editing Images Dialog Box See Save on page 711 Select Standard Toolbar Button Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button
376. information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 6 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page ora Using Hyperlinks on spot within the current page page 68 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 775 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the Inserting Source on cursor location page 775 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 655 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft Checking Spelling on WORD spelling list page 663 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 774 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 671 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 656 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold button B However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several decisions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 657
377. ing 151 viewing 151 preventing 773 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 removing 773 testing 771 to a bookmark in another web page 1 to content block finding 62 using a Quicklink 769 Ignore All field eWebDiff 105 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 105 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 105 image extensions library setting 135 image info WeblmageFX command 703 image upload from Microsoft Word document 669 inserting picture from computer 676 media file selection 673 images adding space around 683 aligning 681 background cell inserting 752 table inserting 741 border color 681 thickness 680 deleting 686 deleting from server 675 editing 687 inserting 671 from server into editor 674 inserting from your computer 676 library adding to content 152 editing titles 152 overwriting 152 uploading 151 viewing 152 locking in position 640 moving to server 685 scanning 716 specifying color depth 718 indent toolbar option 639 insert column toolbar button 642 library item toolbar button 62 new cell toolbar button 642 row toolbar button 642 table toolbar button 723 inserting cells 747 HTML 775 instant email see email instant Internet addresses spell checking 666 italic toolbar option 639 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify toolbar option 640 L landing page after login customizing for user 482 language user editing 479 library accessing 132 add items button 61 asset
378. ing Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 287 Managing Tasks e Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened e Complete tasks whose state is set to Complete You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you 1 x View Tasks Assigned By and To John Edit rot oO Fg oad Std Ceci od luc Sled eo Salata EE A E oe Sloe Seed SC E A E Guilt Ould A EE Ould E Ge Solute Ost AT E AA ch cals oe Show Tas Assigne Me litle CID State Priority Due Date As Prep to Move Downstairs Not Started Low 4Mar 2005 Edit Greeting Content Block 24 Not Started Normal 7 Mar 2005 Assigned To User Review Task section Not Started High 11 Mar 2005 Not Started Active Awaiting Data On Hold 7 4 D ig A aTi Me From this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 300 To learn about sorting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 304 Creating a Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 311 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on pag
379. ing is a separate step Cannot assign lan guage to content or work with content in a language other than your com puter s default lan guage How Imported Documents are Named When you use the New gt DMS Document file import option you enter an Ektron CMS400 NET title for the file For more information see Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 235 Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder on page 238 When you import an Office document or managed file into Ektron CMS400 NET using any other method its name is the file name without the extension So a file named mypicture jpg becomes mypicture in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 231 Using the Document Management System While it may appear that the file extension was removed it is retained and reappears for assets when you use the Edit option on the View Contents of Folder screen circled below Edit Content in Folder Root Eel Cj fa x mer PRPA ENEAN AOR TT AREN ION EEA Content Summary Schedule Comi Currently uploaded file Align Centef aif Please select a file to upload ae The original file extension also appears when you check out File Download Do you want to open or save this file gt Ps Name help syster al Type Paint Shop Pro X Image From icestorm If you import a file of the same name but a different extension into the folder the new file s name has t
380. ing with HTML Forms To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Redirect to an action page and forward form data Edit Content in Folder Content Form Post back message Schedule Comment Web Alerts Display a message Redirect to a file or page OBRedirect form data to an action page x D a z us j J IND R eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee See ee ew ee es ee wee ee eee Report on the form File or page l 3 Click the icon next to File or page The Hyperlink manager dialog appears 5 In the URL field enter the path to the custom action page For example site root folder customaction aspx Do not get a quicklink from the library 6 Press OK Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to display the results after site users submit data The results can be displayed in the same window or output to a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Types on page 165 To show site visitors the results follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message ta
381. ings gt User Profile 3 Your user profile appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 477 Updating Your User Profile View User Information jedit Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit Display Name JE User Language App Default E Mail Address jedit example com Forum Editor eWebEditPre System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Enabled Avatar http 192 168 0 82 CMS400Demo Images smiley Forum Signature John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Work Page Size Width 790px Height 580px Display button text in the title bar Landing Page after login Refresh the login page Set smart desktop as the start location in the workarea This User currently belongs to these User Groups Everyone User Properties Wellness Articles Subscriptions j Notification will send in user language 4 Click the Edit button in the top left corner 5 The Edit User Information screen appears The following table explains fields you can edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 478 Updating Your User Profile Field Description Display Name The name that is used to identify you on the Web site This can be different from your Username which is the name you use to log into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Important This name needs to be unique inside Ektron CMS400 NET and it cannot be blank Password If desired enter a new password inio this field If you chan
382. inition 444 deleting 471 editing 462 via content folder 462 via menus module 463 via navigation link 463 items adding content block as 456 external hyperlink as 458 library asset as 458 submenu 459 to submenu 460 via content folder 453 via modules folder 454 via navigation link on Web page 455 definition 446 deleting via content folder 472 via menus module 472 editing via content folder 465 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 via menus module 466 via navigation link 466 rearranging 470 moving from toolbar 652 multi language issues 473 rearranging on toolbar 650 removing from toolbar 646 structure 446 submenu definition 446 template link field 452 translating 473 URL link field 451 viewing via content folder 467 via menus module 468 via navigation link 469 merge cell toolbar button 642 merging cells 760 metadata definition 77 Microsoft Office documents importing 230 Microsoft Office document checking out saving and replacing 247 deleting 246 saving 249 saving in html format 249 Microsoft Office Documents adding via drag and drop 235 adding via mapped network folder 238 adding via Multiple DMS Docu ments option 233 Microsoft Office documents adding via DMS Document Option 232 edit in mapped network folder 245 editing in Office 244 imported how named 231 Microsoft Word editing in 668 editing XML documents 669 inserting content from 777 uploading image from 669 multi language menus 473 Mu
383. ink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 453 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 454 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 455 Click the radio button next to Submenu The Add Menu screen is displayed Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 as a reference 5 Click the Save button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 459 Working with Menus Adding an Item to a Submenu From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a folder icon next to them Wine English Us ow rapes k AntiBody Therapy E Hemophilia Therapy D Renal Therapies ATT ea ee ee 4 Move the cursor over the submenu and click Add from the popup menu View Menu Therapies E AntiBody Therapy NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to
384. ion Start Time Label Start End Time Label End Table Properties Display Weekends Forward Only 5 Show only events that tall after the viewing day Event Types Event Type Label Bob s Event Type Event Types Available Event Types Required Instructions Ctrl Click to Show Event Type Show All Label Show All Long Description None Folder Name Content Folder Path Y The following table explains the fields on the View Calendar screen ed pe Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 266 Working with Calendars SS ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Description given to the calendar Location Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event Pu Su YYTE LI Ta El 1 E E Company meeting Location New York conf room Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is assigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Table Properties Display Weekends A green check means the calendar displays every day of the week A red X means the cale
385. ion ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 572 Working with Table Cells Select one or more cells Right click the mouse Select Set Cell Properties aN The Cell Properties dialog appears It includes the Abbreviation and Categories fields see illustration below Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment Background Update Dimensions Additional width C No Wrapping Background Image Cell CS5 C55 Class The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog Lc Eins Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms533058 aspx Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms533489 aspx Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 573 Working with HTML Forms NoTE This section explains how to create edit HTML forms using eWebEdit400 If your editor is eWebEditPro XML see Working with HTML Forms on page 156 Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to
386. ion 7 5 781 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature lf you applied a link to related content a regular hyperlink appears Creating a Wiki Link Using Square Brackets To create a wiki link using square brackets follow these steps 1 Begin editing a content item For CMS users this is explained in Editing HTML Content on page 52 For membership users this is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Community Folders 2 Move the cursor to the left of the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink It can be one or several words 3 Insert two open square brackets Move the cursor to the end of the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink Insert two close square brackets 6 Save the content Effect of Linking to Existing Content If you link to existing content the link is the same as quicklink See Using a Quicklink on page 769 Effect of Linking to New Content If you are creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a lt span gt tag to the selected text See example below lt Span class makelink gt selected text here lt span gt When the content is published Ektron CMS400 NET 1 detects the lt span class makelink gt tag 2 finds text surrounded by the lt span gt tag 3 creates a new content block in the selected folder NOTE Membership users cannot select a folder The new content is created
387. ion and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 143 2 Click the Overwrite button 3 The Overwrite File screen appears Overwrite Library Item in Folder Root images a Title Filename Ektron CMS400 NET Logo Reflection CM5400Developer uploadedimages ektronlogo gif Please select a replacement file Browse Current library ttem CM MS400 N et Description b a o ah Normal BZA Ve Qe 1 E E a II u i iil uFi iiil WW I Ht Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 146 Library Folder Click the Browse button A window lets you navigate to the new file Click the file then click the Open button You return to the Overwrite File screen with the path to the new file in the Filename field oO ol e Filename CMS400Sample uploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lis C Tech Fubs depttConventions Terminaloc Browse Please select a replacement file 8 If desired enter a Description for the new file 9 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version click the Update button l 10 The following message app
388. ion upon its submission Use the Insert Fields pull down to do this illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 161 Working with HTML Forms Business Phone Home Phone All form fields appear on the list In addition the following fields can be used to insert form information into the postback message although they re not completed by the person submitting the form e Form title e Form description e Date form was submitted by site visitor For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must obtain from your administrator the name of the custom action page and its folder to complete this procedure To redirect submitted form data to an action page follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 162 Work
389. ions 4 The View Collections in Folder screen appears Click the collection you just created 5 From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection 6 Using the Add button cf select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features A menu a collection a taxonomy and the ListsSummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one is best suited to your needs NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Collection List Taxonomy Summary Display all content in a folder X X X As folder s content changes folder items display changes appear ona menu Can display all content in a folder s subfolders Display external hyperlinks amp library assets Display content summary X X X optional Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 442 Working with Collections Collection Display additional content X information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root List Taxonomy Summary Can be multi leveled ee Main purpose is navigation LX Main purpose is classification ee X For a detaile
390. ions When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Multi Language Support gt Additional Multi Language Topics gt Working with Menus in a Multi Language System You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu its a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link this content to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below By Navigating the Site Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET select the menu s current language Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate a Click the menu and the Edit Menu option Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 473 Working with Menus The View Menu
391. ions you can perform on library items within the folders Button Description For more information see Search library Searching the Library on page 136 View the library s properties Library Folder Properties on page 134 screen Add an image file quicklink or Copying Files to the Library on hyperlink to the library page 141 3 Select the type of Library file to A Images ME work with Library Folder Properties To view the library folder s properties follow these steps 1 Click the Properties button E 2 The Library Management screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 134 Library Folder Library Management Oo ay tos Image Extensions gif Jpeg Jpg bmp png Image Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS400Demao uploadedImages Physical Path c inetpub wwwroot CMS400Demo uploadedImages Verified File Extensions ppt pdf xls doc File Upload Path This path ts relative to the site CMS400Dema uploadedFiles Physical Path c inetpub wwwroot CMsS400Demo uploadedFiles Verified 3 The screen displays the following settings Se Image Extensions File extensions of images that can be copied to the library folder For example gif and jpg Image Upload path The folder to which library images are moved when you Physical Path insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET File Extensions Extensions of files that can be copied to this
392. ips on Viewing a Calendar e The monthly calendar displays the current month In the intranet sample today is highlighted in yellow illustrated below At the top of the calendar are the previous and next months Click them to view those months lt lt March April Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday aa all birthday party Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 271 Working with Calendars e Where an event appears move the cursor over it to see a popup box with the event name location and start and end times lf a Web page is linked to the event you can click the event name to jump to that page e Click the number that represents any day to view detail for that day illustrated below an 3 31 2005 Friday April 01 2005 As f l 00 AM 0 00 AM 2 00 PM birthday party 00 PM 00 PM e From the daily view you can see all events and the hours they span proceed to the previous or next day click a date in the upper left or right corner return to the month view by clicking on today s date view detail about an event by clicking on it e From the event view illustrated below you can view the event s location and start and end times Click the date to return to the daily view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 272 Working with Calendars birthday party Friday April 01 2005 Location my house Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Adding a Calendar Event
393. ipt blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps 1 Launch Norton Antivirus 2001 2 From the first window click Options 3 On the next window click Script Blocking 4 On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking 5 Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type feature click the automatic spell check button 5 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 663 Checking Spelling When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space character after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line e Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word e If you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand If you do not want to use the s
394. iption for the menu Folder Seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Menu Feature gt Associations Implementation of the Menus Feature gt Effect of Assigning a Folder to a Menu Template Seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Menu Feature gt Associations Implementation of the Menus Feature gt Effect of Assigning a Template to a Menu 6 Click the Save button H With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 453 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 452 Working with Menus Adding a Menu via the Menus Module 4 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the Add Menu button qq The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu Title English U 5 Advance Settings To complete the fields on the Add Menu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 453 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS400 NET also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu items See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 446 Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add ite
395. it The template currently assigned The Ektron CMS400 NET Templates to the content Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Add edit Any taxonomy categories The Ektron CMS400 NET Taxonomy currently assigned to the Administrator Manual section Category content Taxonomy Edit Content Open content for editing Editing HTML Content on page 52 View History View older versions of content Viewing and Restoring restore older version Previous Content on page 108 View Staged Displays staged content Staged Content on page 806 View Difference Category tab Compares current and earlier Comparing Versions of versions of content Content on page 98 Delete content Deleting Content on page 57 Check for Identify all content with Checking for Broken content linked to Quicklinks to this content Quicklinks on page 59 this content i eed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 44 Viewing Content Button or Description For more information see Tab Add Task Attach a task to content Task Module Toolbar on page 311 Go back to previous menu View View If you can view content in more language than one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current content Translating Content to Another select select into a new item and translate it Language on page 55 language language to selected lang
396. iting Metadata See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Entering Tithe and Keywords After you create or update content it is typically published Programs that search the Web look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page To improve search results Ektron CMS400 NET provides two fields within Metadata by default NOTE Your system administrator may enable or disable these fields for each folder e Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page 4 Adding Metadata to a New Content Block ficrosoft Internet Explorer right 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site formation in the sample site is fictional appear on the Aa esa Metadata to a New Sb diss uae Sle ccoT AR tel bes Copyright 2002 Ektron duni e s Seer pe e Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title After content is published you can view the page source to see its metadata Below is an example Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 85 Adding or Editing Metadata E www ektron 1 txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help HTTP EQUIV Content Type gt CONTENT text html charset 1s0 8859 L gt kmeta name robots content index follow kmeta name rewisit after content 15 days gt EMETA JHTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no gt ETitlegektron Inc web Content Management and Document Managemen
397. itle Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a Quicklink in the Hyperlink field the Quicklink s content title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria Event Location One Time Recurring If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading If you want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 277 Date Click the calendar icon 8 to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Start Time If you want to enter a start time click the clock icon ED to display a clock From it select a start time End Time If you want to enter an end time click the clock icon S to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 275 Working with Calendars a Display the times Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end for the event times illustrated below company meeting Locationimontreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 Pim The time also appears on the event detail if this bo
398. itors and save it in an XML format Online forms polls or surveys designed to collect information from site visitors and save itin an HTML format See details below Files normally created and edited using Microsoft Office Files created outside of Ektron CMS400 NET such as PDFs and jpeg files You cannot create or edit these files within Ektron CMS400 NET you can only store them Files that run in a media player such as sound and movie files For more information see For information on using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 626 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Working with HTML Forms on page 156 Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 227 Working with Managed Files on page 253 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Assets gt Managing Multimedia Assets When creating new content you must assign a type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET s Discussion Board i Community Folder E HTML Content HTML Form Survey DMS Document Collection 1 Menu As you can see the New menu lists all types of content you can work with Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They also
399. ize and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 730 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 746 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 4 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it Gi Co 3 Press lt Delete gt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 721 Introduction to Tables Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 3 Click Insert Table from the menu Insert Table Inzert A or Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 7
400. kLiLkiLiLkeiLiLkeiLIiLkeliLiLkilikbLikbLkeliLiILhkeiLILkeILIkLI Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To E admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blocks on the list Comments Date Time Added By 10 Jun 004 10 47 Sh Comments Be sure to check this list every day for content blocks needing approval John Edit Several comments can be added to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps NOTE When an approver approves declines content from the Content Awaiting Approval screen if the content has an active task the Add Comments to Task screen appears The screen lets the approver insert comments about the task associated with the content 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 300 2 Click the Add Comment button b4 3 The Comments window appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 307 Managing Tasks Comments Times New Roman 3 12 pt hi A oy E 7 UA bamo a A Insert Close 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at
401. ks to move to the bookmark e bookmark the destination to which the cursor jumps when a user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps 1 Select the bookmark text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 517 Using Bookmarks 2 Click the Insert Anchor button 43 3 The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears with the Anchor tab selected Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink E mail Enter a name for the bookmark Click OK 6 The editor screen redisplays The bookmark does not appear on the page 7 Select the source text 8 Click the Hyperlink Manager button 9 The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears with the Hyperlink tab selected 10 Click the down arrow below the Existing Anchor field and click the bookmark you created in Step 4 Hyperlink Manager Anchor E mail URL http Existing Anchor Target 11 If desired use the Target dropdown to change the destination text s window For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 519 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 518 Using Bookmarks If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 12 Click OK Changing the Destination Window Use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink Manager dialog to change the window that displays the destination p
402. ktron Medical we focus on assisting people e e y Br a gals with same of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia Cancer Immune disorders and kidnev disease We do Personalizing a Web Page Your system administrator gives you permission to personalize a Web page Several permission levels are available listed below You may have any combination of these permissions e moving content among zones e editing a content item e adding new content e globally changing the page So anyone visiting the page sees your content and arrangement Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 365 Personalizing a Web Page NOTE While the first three permissions affect your ability to personalize a page the last one lets you design a page that anyone browsing to it will see If you have any permission you can also perform these actions on a personalization page e remove content from a zone temporarily close e remove content from a zone permanently delete e suppress content from a zone minimize These tasks are explained in more detail below The Personalization Menu The top right corner of any content item contains a menu of options you can perform on it circled below 3 Why Choose Ektron Medical 4n Exciting Environment ektron Medical is a fast paced technology driven company that provides its employees with opportunities for professional growth as well as the flexibility to achieve a bal
403. l Version 7 5 100 Comparing Versions of Content e highlighting in yellow added content A CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC internNational EC ational is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve EC ra EC ational has become one of the leading manutactures of RC racing and flying vehicles sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO community We wil improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC international member Diff Published Staged Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics e When Can Compare Content on page 100 e The Compare Content Window on page 102 e First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 107 When Can I Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when e you are viewing an historical version of content e a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 691 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 101 Comparing Versions of Content The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared Content Status Compares current published version with Published Historical version stored in the c
404. lack Hawks This section explains e Creating a Table on page 720 e Deleting a Table on page 721 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 722 See Also e Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 723 e Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 730 e Working with Table Cells on page 746 e Section 508 Tables on page 787 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 719 Introduction to Tables Creating a Table To create a table click the table button E3 then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert Table dialog box appears Insert T able ib an x Cancel Borders E 3 75 Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color ff Unassigned Background Image From File You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 720 Introduction to Tables When creating a table you can specify the e number of rows and columns e width e horizontal alignment on the page e background color or background picture e border s
405. lar user or membership user is adding a comment If a regular user or membership user adds a comment their name and email address is taken from their user profile Email The email address of the person submitting the comment This information is required Note This text box appears only when a site visitor who is not a regular user or membership user is adding a comment If a regular user or membership user adds a comment their name and email address is taken from their user profile A URL for the person s web site Comment Section A text area to insert comments about the post Post Comment Button Post a comment by clicking this button Depending on the comment s settings it either Post Comment posts immediately or is submitted for approval See Also Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 Comments in the Workarea In the Workarea you can add view approve edit and delete comments for a blog post The comment link illustrated below indicates the number of comments To work with comments navigate to the blog folder and click the comment link next to a blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 354 Blogs View Posts in Blog Blog 2 T I Fal CTO ent B Welcome to ektron Medical Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 1 2006 3 46 59 P E Status 4 Comments 1 This leads you to View Comments screen Here you can view approve edit delete and add new
406. lder etccstacsscsauesciasobiners encsecsncasasenmusaeineenesudne 30 New Menu cccecececeecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesuseueeeeeueuseueeeueuseueueuseeuseneesueas 32 View Menu 2 1 cecececcecececeeeeceeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeususaseeeeeusaseueeeusaseueeeesasenens 33 Delete IO cscs ediecteccehcinct caine dicadauca cutee menewensinecedasaedecbcdeandacecaesnceaic 34 Action Menu 2 cccccccecsenenscecscnenececncneeeeecncneeseeencnscsenenensnsensnensens 35 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 i Content Dropdown Men cc cccceeseeeceesseescenseeseeeneeeseennees 35 Adding a Subfolder cares cei tees eee 40 Deleting a Folder ccccecceseceeeceeeseneeeneeesecneeeneeeeeeoeees 40 VIEWING Content cceeeceeeeeceeseeenseeensesensesensesensenensenenes 40 Viewing Content from a Web Page scssssssesseesseeseeeseeenes 40 Expanding the Content Area ccccsssseeessesseesessseeseenneeseoees 46 Adding HTML Content sicece cance orceccecdecuninscacecimeceetianeecsesceiass 48 Editing HTML Conte nt cccccesscceeesenseenseceneseneeeees 52 Deleting Content cccesecceseeceneecnseeensesensencnsenenseseneeees 57 Workarea Toolbar Buttons ccscceseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 60 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 2 000 65 SO CRIES a Start Dale iiaa 66 Setting an End Date on Content ssssssssssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 68 Setting Archive OptiOns
407. le Properties Click the Table Properties tab Enter a number of pixels into the Border field circled below Ed Table Properties id z1 Cell Properties Y Accessibility Border px Yo LIL px Yo If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view boundary lines while editing see Assigning an Internal Table Border on page 551 Determining Which Table Border Lines Appear You may want to suppress some table borders For example the table below only shows horizontal lines TW LW Title Studio Weekend Gross 1 N Jumper Fox 27 225 000 2 N StepUp2 the Streets BV 19 666 000 To modify which border lines appear follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab wW mP z Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 554 Working with Tables 5 Use the icons within the Border area to indicate which border lines should appear Each icon has tooltip text that explains its function NOTE In order to view the selected borders on the dialog a border color must be assigned See Assigning Table Border Color on page 552 Border Note that if a table already has border lines but you want to start fresh it is a good idea to remove all borders using the icons indicated below Then you can begin adding new ones Ed Table Properties Mates tes Border px Yo px Yo Ektron CMS
408. le number required Decimal number or blank A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Decimal number required A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 That is 12 is 12 0000 Percent 0 100 required A whole number from 0 to 100 a a a where a is one or more characters email address list Several email addresses Each address s format is a a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Zip code US 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn Zip code US required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnNNN nnnn A response Is required Social Security US required Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 179 Working with HTML Forms Option Characteristics of Valid Response Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numer
409. lection screen appears 5 Accept or change the language view Collection New Collection German Standard French Standard 6 Click the Add button 2 7 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying e all subfolders within the selected folder Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders checkbox was checked for the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 434 Working with Collections e content in the selected folder that is not part of the collection Note that the file types selection remembers your most recent choice and can filter which files appear You can change the selection if desired Add items to Collection New Collection All Types bd ag een ener All Types a dnt TML Content Office Documents l Wlanagqed Files io Books mn Calendar E Language B CenturyMedicalServices 5 Contacts io Dynamic Content In Content fag D Form Example O IntranetBasic D Press Releases m Purchase Orders CO B AddOnRegistrationProcess doc 381 1033 8 Check boxes next to content to add to the collection You can only add content from the selected folder or its subfolders Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders checkbox is checked for the collection Click a subfolder to view its content To return to the parent folder click the folder with the up arrow W NOTE If you select content from a subfolder click the Add button to add
410. left panel 23 toolbar buttons 60 add 60 add calendar event 60 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 add content block 60 add content folder 60 add library items 61 add task 61 approvals 61 approve 61 approve all 61 archived content 61 calendar 61 check in 61 collections 61 62 delete 62 delete content 62 delete folder 62 do not apply XSLT 62 edit 62 insert library item 62 link check 62 overwrite 62 preview 62 publish 63 remove 63 reorder 63 restore 63 save to database 63 search 63 show calendar 63 submit 63 view date 63 view difference 63 view history 63 view published 63 view staged 64 WYSIWYG view as toolbar and menu option 637 X XSLT removing from XML content block 111 Y yellow content border color meaning 798 Z zoom in WeblmageFX command 717 zoom out WeblmageFX command 718 viii
411. les 5 Select the value in the Background Image field 6 Press lt Delete gt 7 Click OK setting Table Borders A table border consists of the lines that separate a table s cells form each other and the table from the rest of your Web page There are two types of table borders Border Used by this type type of user internal content author TW LW Title Studio Weekend Gross 1 iN Jumper Fox 27 225 000 2 N Step Up 2 the Streets BV 19 666 000 external site visitor TWILW Title eekend Gross 3 N jumper _ si Fox_ 27 225 000 2 N Step Up 2 the StreetspV 19 666 000 Assigning an Internal Table Border A table s internal border is either on or off You cannot specify other attributes To turn a table s internal border off or on follow these steps NOTE If the table s border is on these steps turn it off If it is off they turn it on 1 Place the cursor inside the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Show Hide border Assigning External Table Border Attributes You can modify these external border attributes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 551 Working with Tables e color see Assigning Table Border Color on page 552 e size thickness see Assigning Border Size on page 553 e line selection see Determining Which Table Border Lines Appear on page 554 Assigning Table Border Color This section explains how to change the color of a table s border see
412. les at once so it s faster than New DMS Document option More efficient when same summary metadata sched ule etc apply to many documents You can check in or submit document for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Disadvantages Slower when importing several Office documents Cannot maintain Windows folder structure Document title taken from Windows file name Requires Internet Explorer and MS Office For more information see Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 233 Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 233 230 Drag and drop into CMS400 NET from View Contents of Folders screen Drag and drop into a mapped network folder Advantages Can upload several files at once so it s faster than New DMS Document option Can drag drop folder structure CMS400 NET rec reates it in Workarea More efficient when same summary metadata sched ule etc apply to many documents User doesn t need to install or learn CMS software Can drag drop folder structure CMS400 NET cre ates it in Workarea Using the Document Management System Disadvantages Content is in checked in status submitting it for pub lishing is a separate step Document title taken from Windows file name Document title taken from Windows file name Content is in checked in status submitting it for pub lish
413. lick the Save button M The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yie Menu Italian menu aw In italian standard Title Language ID URL Link hore Into 8 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 453 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 475 Working with Menus Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps 1 Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language ID Description 3 Create the menu See Adding a Menu via the Menus Module on page 453 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 476 Ektron CMS400 NET System Management Ektron CMS400 NET System Management Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Sett
414. link cascssisse sisacssiecassieneasiecaxyntnsswsssswtaespeassesenswnaniweues 523 Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page 524 Editing a Hyperlink sacscsnsinantnssicesssieteccesantasectesinsandisastiaascecmesecansis 525 Removing a Hyperlink ssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 525 Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink 00 526 Inserting email Links cccccsesseeesseeeseseessenseeensesenseoeeeseneees 527 Working with FA WM scevaiiceaaesbireteptivpisisatinsinasideddessinsaeeeevsbieneets 529 Working with ADIOS occcccnsicnecccseusnrncccsinnneseceanedatssentestencseueseie 531 Creating a Tabie sasson 531 Modifying Table Properties cccsssessesseceeneeseeseeseseeseees 535 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 vi Deleting a Table aeeeesop ep ere me renin ent res beslenunte onsuneenuesntner sre nee env ere i 537 Inserting a Table Within a Table ccccccssseceeeseeeeeneeneeneeseees 537 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns cs0000 538 Specifying Table WidHtn csccccsssseessssseesceesseesseesseeseeneees 540 Specifying Horizontal Alignment sccscssseesseeeseesseeees 544 Table BACK OF OUNGS sessinum iani aa 546 Setting Table BorderS ssasusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 551 Working with Table Cells cccccccessseessseeseeeeeesseeseeeseenees 556 Selecting Cells to Modify cc
415. ll call of associated blogs In addition if a blog calendar is present on the blog site visitors can see which days have blog posts Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 312 I m gonna write the melody That s gonna make history Yeah and when I paint my masterpiece I swear Til show you first There just ain t a way to see Who when why or what will be Til now is then it s a mystery A blessing and a curse Or something worse yeah Posted by John Edit at 02 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments o a F Se ey FF LFF oly Sea Posted by John Edit at 02 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments 2 cee February Blogs 2006 i 3 u 15 18 2s 3 fooks good Make sure you show first Posted by John Norman Howard 2 on 02 09 2006 01 57 PM Heave a comment Application Administrator http Vour Comment Post Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Name required E mail required URL E li H 313 Blogs Blogs in the Workarea appear as a language bubble in the folder structure This distinguishes a blog folder from a content folder E Folders E i CMS400Deme 9 _Rotatingl mages C About Us C Book Store 9 Conditions lt iii The following table lists elements commonly found in a blog Daaa Gaona Blog Title The name of your blog as you want it to appear on the site For example My Life Story Blog Post The main entry for each topic A
416. llaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to content follow these steps 1 Create new content or edit existing content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 2 Inthe editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button The Ektron CMS Comment window opens Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the text if desired Click the Insert button The comment is saved Click the Close button The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content oe ey a ae Om 7 es 7 a G E M H gt E k T 1 E icome to RC internation 2 AC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra qas become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing ill tH Ml hll il Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 795 Inserting Comments within Content Each comment appears in the table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next s
417. lleagues on page 410 Until the user accepts the colleague request he appears on your Sent Colleagues Request List See Also Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 411 5 Once a user accepts the colleague request he is added to your colleagues list and you are added to his Colleagues list Removing Colleagues If you would like to end your association with another user you can remove the colleague To do that in the Workarea follow these steps Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues 2 Click in the check box to the far left of each colleague you want to remove Selecting the check box in the title row selects all colleagues My Friends nj J s Colleague Avatar ie First Name Last Name F 2 JE John Edit 3 Click the Remove button 0 A dialog box asks you to confirm that the colleague is to be removed 5 Click OK The page refreshes and the user is removed from your colleagues list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 409 My Workspace Selected Colleagues You can designate any user as a Selected Colleague This means he can view documents in your favorites that regular colleagues cannot view To make someone a Selected Colleague follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues 2 Place a check mark next to any user you want to make Selected a Friends a Selected Colleague Avatar i ee First Name La
418. locks of content For example the home page from one of Ektron CMS400 NET s sample sites is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Home gt News Our Company Gala Delwer world class quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates our company in the marketplace To be the preferred global standard for Web Content Management gt Company Directory of Services You can work with content from the Web site or after logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea See Also e Working with Content from your Web Site on page 2 e The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 15 Working with Content from your Web Site After signing in to Ektron CMS400 NET you can do your work from two types of dropdown menus e Content menu lets you work on content when it appears on a list See Also Content Dropdown Menu on page 35 e Control menu lets you work on any of the various Ektron CMS400 NET controls that appear on a Web page A control can display content a list of content items etc See Also The Control Menu on page 2 The Control Menu After you sign in notice that most areas of the Web page are surrounded by a border or display a gray circle in the top left corner The border might only appear as you move the cursor over it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 2 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET A
419. log box Click OK 5 The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 679 e Setting a Border on page 680 e Aligning the Picture on page 681 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 683 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Deleting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Delete button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 675 Inserting Images Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer and any network folder available to your computer into the editor To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description tor the file NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to upload files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bit
420. logs and blog posts work the same way as it does for folders and content See the Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content for an explanation on working with multiple languages Deleting a Blog NoTE _ To delete a blog you must have permission to Delete Folders onthe blogs Advanced Permissions screen Deleting a blog removes the blog and all posts comments and quicklinks for the blog WARNING After a blog is deleted you cannot retrieve its posts comments or quicklinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 336 Blogs The following steps explain how to delete a blog 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog and click Properties NOTE To delete a blog from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the Delete gt This Blog 3 Adialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure you want to delete this folder c v This will also delete all content quicklinks associated with the content and subfolders 4 Click OK to delete the blog searching Blogs Searching blogs works the same as searching HTML content See the following topics for an explanation of using the Search feature e The Administrator Manual chapter Searching Content on the Web Site e Searching the Library on page 136 subscribing Unsubscribing to a Blog Logged in Site users and Membership users ca
421. ltiple DMS Documents option 233 N network folder mapped adding Office documents 238 number toolbar option 639 numbers in words spell checking 666 O objects absolute positioning 640 Office 2000 inserting content from 777 open file toolbar button 643 open WeblmageFX command 705 oval WeblmageFX command 706 overwrite button 62 P padding cell 762 password changing 479 paste toolbar and menu option 635 paste as new image WeblmageFX command 707 paste text toolbar and menu option 635 pending start date content 805 pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 673 pixels 680 pointer selection WeblmageFX command 707 polls creating 214 618 creating in Workarea 215 620 editing from Web site 219 623 polygon WeblmageFX command 708 position objects menu 640 prerequisites 11 preview button 62 floating toolbar 4 feature 13 print editor content toolbar button 644 profile users updating 477 viewing 477 properties button floating toolbar 4 content 45 publish button 63 content to web site 89 published content block viewing 63 Q quicklinks 769 adding to content 153 broken finding 59 definition 132 using for a collection 432 viewing 153 R rectangle WeblmageFX command 709 red content border color meaning 798 redisplay toolbars 650 redo toolbar and menu option 635 WeblmageFX command 710 registered trademark character inserting 637 remove alignment toolbar button 643 rem
422. lumns on page 539 Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove table rows and columns follow these steps NOTE You can also adjust the number of rows and columns using the Table Wizard See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard on page 533 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 539 Working with Tables Menu options relating to adding removing rows or columns are highlighted below Insert Row Below Delete Row 4 Insert Column to the Left a Merge Cells Horizontally 2 Merge Cells Vertically Split Cell 2x Delete Cell al Set Cell Properties Fa Set Table Properties vi Show Hide Border 3 Click the appropriate menu option For example to add a row above the current cursor location click Insert Row Above NOTE These options are also available on the toolbar Filesi Warde 201 Charartere 20 Specifying Table Width After you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 540 Wo
423. m on page 501 e Whole Word Match on page 501 e Searching Selected Text on page 500 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 499 Finding and Replacing Text Searching Selected Text You can search and replace text in a selected portion of content To do so follow these steps 1 Select text that you want to search and replace by dragging the cursor over it Click the Find and Replace button 4 In the Find amp Replace dialog enter the search string lf desired click the Replace tab and enter a replacement string 5 Under Search click Selection only Find A Find Search Directio Up Dow 6 Click Find Next 7 The search runs but is limited to text you selected in Step 1 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you find every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 500 Finding and Replacing Text Find Find Search Entre text Selection only To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In o
424. m administrator can add or remove the Accessibility button from the Insert Table dialog Size Cancel Roms Columns Accessibility i LL aaa a en r Borders ane 7 The Accessibility dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 789 Section 508 Compliance Accessibility Ea Heading Rove 0 Heading Columns 0 Cancel Summary en Caption Horizontal Caption Alignment Vertical Caption Alignment Accessibility Dialog Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below a aa Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter Rows the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the Columns number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 790 Section 508 Compliance Field Description O Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Horizontal If desired enter the caption s horizontal alignment Caption Alignment Gee e kjeft e right Ver
425. map bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image Microsoft Internet Explorer AN You have not selected a file with one of the valid extensions gif jpo png peg it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 676 Inserting Images 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 6 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 679 e Setting a Border on page 680 e Aligning the Picture on page 681 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 683 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 684 9 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you c
426. mation for each completed form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 200 Working with HTML Forms e a checkbox that lets you delete the response e an internal identification number of the response e the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears e date response was submitted e descriptive name of each form field appears in the column header the value entered for each field appears below the header Sample of Table of Values Format General Demographic Survey Delete ID Submitted Date Gender Age Education Annual Household By Submitted range Level Income Income E 22 Member 12 6 2005 Male 22 25 High 40 000 60 000 L John 4 18 50 School GED 49 999 69 999 5 Pm F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 Female 31 40 Master s 70 000 100 000 M 4 22 58 Degree 79 999 149 000 Pl a 24 Edit John 12 6 2005 Male 26 30 High 30 000 30 000 5 4 23 40 School GED 39 999 39 999 Pm List of Submitted Values The List of Submitted Values format provides the same information as the Table of Values but is formatted vertically rather than horizontally See Also Table of Values on page 200 Sample List of Submitted Values Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 201 Working with HTML Forms General Demographic Survey Delete ID Submitted By Date Submitted Field d F 22 Member J
427. mplemented Ektron s Document Management feature Content HTML content blogs entries and XML Smart Form field values Assets Content that is neither HTML nor XML such as Office documents and managed files See Also Using the Document Management System on page 222 Include Archived Content forms and assets that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 69 Specifying a Search Word or Phrase In the Search Text field enter one or more words that you want to find within content forms and assets The search returns content that includes these words Entering text here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without entering words contained in the content For example you can find every piece of HTML content that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content on your site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 122 Searching the Workarea However if you enter search text the search only finds items that include the search text and satisfy other criteria on the screen The Noise File Ektron CMS400 NET has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text
428. ms Click View gt Menus Click the menu that you want to add items to In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu See Also Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 473 The View Menu screen opens displaying the items already on the menu Submenus look like a folder with a plus sign to the left i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 453 Working with Menus 6 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu Yiew Menu pp i NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 The Add New Item screen appears Use the table below to select a type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 456 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 458 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 458 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 459 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module To add a menu item via the Menus module follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click M
429. n Alignment page 571 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 573 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 573 To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Creating a Table on page 531 2 Place the cursor inside the table 3 Right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 570 Working with Table Cells 4 Click Set Table Properties 5 The Table Properties dialog appears 6 Click the Accessibility tab Table Wizard F Table Design Y amp Table Properties Y lt Cell Properties Heading rows Max 5 Heading columns Max 3 Caption alignment El Caption Accessibility Summary Associate cells with headers e Accessibility Dialog on page 571 e Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes on page 572 Accessibility Dialog The fields on the tab are described below e Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter the number Rows of rows that it should occupy The number cannot exceed five Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 571 Working with Table Cells ESS Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the number of columns Columns th
430. n CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 167 Working with HTML Forms The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 74 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to make it easier to insert form elements m fab fab e e EE TA Select Button All toolbar options except the Select Button pull down also appear on a vertical toolbar to the left of the editor You can use whichever toolbar you prefer all options are the same Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment ABA oa Ye 60 Ae Normal 2010 pt A dm BZA m fab fab e e EE Ta Select Button z Place form elements heri lv lab e i xj t Adding a Field to the Screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 168 Working with HTML Forms The major difference between the toolbars is how you add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the vertical toolbar drag a button to the desired screen location Note that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform these actions You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context sensitive menu of all commands Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment Notificatio RRR MA osm Y
431. n a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink on page 521 e Testing a Hyperlink on page 523 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 524 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 525 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 525 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 526 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page that appears when someone clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 521 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and www ektron com IS the destination Entering a Hyperlink To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager button The Hyperlink dialog appears Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink ite eee URL bad Existing Anchor Type Target o e A Tooltip o C55 Class 3 Click in the URL field after nttp 7 Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example www ektron com If your version of Ektron CMS400 NET has URLs that have been entered into the library as hyperlinks click the ellipsis button m to browse the library a
432. n above you can add content a calendar a collection a blog etc After you add the content type click Done Add Content Then within that content area click edit A new screen area appears Use that area to define the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 376 My Workspace My Workspace A community is a group of people who network with each other to share information ideas likes and dislikes Typically people or members in the community are connected to each other by a relationship For example they work for the same company went to the same school share the same values or have a friendship When a person initially visits a community site they can explore to see what type of information people and groups are on the site While the person can see some information on the site they often need to become a member of the site to see exclusive information When a person signs up to be member they define information about themselves This is known as their member profile As a Ektron CMS400 NET user you already have a member profile on the site The Community Platform in CMS400 is a set of features that allow users to network socially on the site Access to the community platform is available from both the Web site and the Workarea Only Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can access their information via the Workarea Membership Users Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can access their profile p
433. n any order within the file Any of the Words Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It is an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 124 Searching the Workarea A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that exact phrase Content ID You can find content by its ID number To do so select Content ID from the drop down box below the Search Text field Then enter the ID number in the Search Text field and click Search Search Content Folder Results Text v S asa eacceianantaaae Search Published Advanced Search Content Forms Assets J Include Archived All the words Any of the words Exact Phrase Content ID Title Comments Additional Search Criteria The next section of the Advanced Search Tab lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Note that if you enter more than one criterion only content satisfying all criteria appears on the search results screen Fields that Apply to Content Forms and Assets Ektron CM
434. n edit the title filename and description of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 143 Click the Edit button L The Edit File screen appears Edit Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title ID Filename ktron Partners and Customers CMS400Exanple uploadedFiles ektron_partners_custon Description t Bs Go co 302 pt A BZA Ve AA Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners 4 Change the title file name and or description of the file 5 Click the Update button i Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button E on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files The new image or file must have the same file extension as the file being replaced Before You Overwrite an Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 145 Library Folder When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the two images have the same file extens
435. n into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 512 Working with Images regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Width field on the Image Properties dialog See Also Pixels on page 512 Image Properties Image Properties Tmanma Alt Tart altran nen Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border ll Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel senor Ll lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 513 Working with Images Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Image Alignment field on the Image Properties dialog The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this Alignment option The picture on the left margin ee S allowing subsequent text to Ore _ Faced with the challenge of redr wrap around it Hi 4 and compressed schedules to ro f sites and rich Web applications i advantage tilted in them favor to The picture on the right margin i Ea B allowing sub
436. n page 51 Accessing the Edit Content Screen from the Workarea To access the Edit Content screen from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the folder that contains the content you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Select View gt Language then the language whose content you want to view Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 and click Select Edit from the menu 4 Delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 54 Editing HTML Content 5 The editor opens with the content block inserted 6 From the Edit Content window you can e edit content e create or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content e enter or update a comment e enter or update start and end dates e review and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature e review and update templates To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates e review and update categories To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Taxonomy e save changes e check in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 7 Make the necessary edits to the content Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content win
437. n subscribe to a blog or a blog post By subscribing to a blog users receive notification when posts are added to the blog By subscribing to a blog post users are notified when comments are added to the post When you do not want to receive notices you can unsubscribe Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 337 Blogs The section contains the following topics e Subscribe to a Blog on page 338 e Unsubscribe to a Blog on page 339 e Subscribe to a Blog Post on page 340 e Unsubscribe to a Blog Post on page 340 Subscribe to a Blog To subscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon for the blog Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Add Post 1 2 3 T 5 6 Fi 8 9 10 New Test Post 149 12 d 40 1A 17 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Blog Ektron Medical Blog Notification Type Add Subscription l 4 Select the Notification Type 5 Click Add Subscription Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 338 Blogs A message states that you are now subscribed to the blog You are forwarded to the blog page Unsubscribe to a Blog To unsubscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon for the blog Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
438. n the lower left corner of the Workarea 3 The Library folder appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 132 Library Folder Library Folder Content images g o m mas E ee ata i i lima BS D DE 7 j i Sc Se e EA E AE a ea E ETE Pal Pal E E EE E EEE E Bah E I A A Bucy N ET oe Le gt ene i eee E eae Pa z s ea o a Pea ood en en t a eo S ate ae ry As a w E v Keia Graia aia ee er naiai ie A di irahan ent a oe oe Pe oe w a Title ID Date Modified Filename ALM 624 4 14 2005 10 15 18 AM CMS400ExampleuploadediImages aim 2i gi BM ON DEMAND Bm ChS400 Logo 14 1 3 2005 3 58 19 PM CMS400Example uploadedImages cms4o00 5 CMS400 net 4 The sub folders appear in the left frame Files in the root folder library appear in the right frame You can use the dropdown list circled above to change the type of library files that appear To work with any library file click it When you do the View Library screen appears providing additional information about the item From here you can e edit its title file name or description e overwrite it e find content linked to it e delete it For more information see Viewing Files on page 143 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 133 Library Folder The following table explains the toolbar buttons on the library screen NOTE Your system administrator determines which library folders you can access and which funct
439. n width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result aro If Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a Se The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 761 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns S panned Layout width W Word Wrap setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1the pdoe y pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells e entire Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding to your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 762 Working with Table Cells Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the
440. navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues Click the Search button gi Click the Advanced Search tab Select the criteria by which to filter the search results Click Add Filter to add additional filters Enter text in one of the text boxes Click the Search button ee SS Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 407 My Workspace Using Community Search Results After you click the Search button all users and groups who match the search term appear This list shows an avatar display name and status for each user or group Advanced Search Status Sent a colleague request Add as Colleague You are the leader of this community group The Status column indicates whether the user is already a colleague or if you can add them as a colleague It also lets you join a Community Group if you are not already a member Click the Add as Colleague link to send the colleague request or the Join this Group link to join the community group Send a Colleague Request To send a colleague request to another user in the Workarea follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 408 My Workspace 1 Search for a user as described in Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members on page 403 Click the Add as Colleagues link 3 A colleague request is sent to the user You are added to Pending Colleagues list of the user to whom the request was sent See Also View Pending Co
441. nces Display a dialog box that shows your version of About eWebEditPro XML and your license keys eWebEditPro XML Delete Delete selected content Il Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined 2 Remove alignment oo Remove alignment settings applied to selected content a Bookmark Create a bookmark See Also Using Bookmarks on ookmar S Horizontal Line E Insert a horizontal line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 643 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only E Ctrl P Print the editor content Print C Ctrl A Select all content Select All z Deselect all selected content Select None Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 644 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration BERAR g ooye AAA aal mip als E Apply Style gt Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt A aa BR i This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines e which menus are available to you e which buttons appear on each menu and the sequence in which they appear initially e whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen lf you are authorized to customize your toolbar
442. nd do not change the document but simply close Office the document remains Checked Out O Use the Check In menu option to check it in 7 Drag and drop the edited document See Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 235 You are asked to confirm the file replace Click Yes 9 The document is submitted for approval 10 The revised document is saved in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 248 Using the Document Management System Saving an Office Document You would typically save an Office document to your computer in order to distribute it to others or if you want a personal copy You should not save a document to your computer if you plan to edit it then replace the version in Ektron CMS400 NET doing this may overwrite edits made by other users lf you want to edit a document use the Edit in MS Office or Check out and Save As menu option Both options set the content to checked out status which prevents non administrator users from editing it until you check it back in Follow these steps to save an Office document 1 In Ektron CMS400 NET open the folder that contains the Office document 2 Hover the cursor over the triangle on the right end of the document and click Save As 3 You are asked if you want to open or save the document Choose Save 4 Select a folder to which you want to save the document Saving an Office Document in html Format This feature conv
443. nd drop documents below a Ej lon2 jpa E 4 h lion ipa 4 ntan lion jpg mr JAL mountain _ions_sc62 jp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 236 Using the Document Management System 10 The following screen appears Copying Copying mountain lion jpg to http icestorm CMS400Deve lf any asset being uploaded is not supported an error message appears An error occurred copying some or all of the selected files However all supported files are uploaded See Also Supported Types of Assets on page 223 11 If Ektron CMS400 NET requires you to apply metadata or a taxonomy category to the content the following screen appears NOTE Your system administrator creates the metadata screen The image below is only an example of what it might look like Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 237 Using the Document Management System ektran F L i L z an Fi w Fa DES dih ea Periph aA a aa aah E x al r epen ee b he Woa a S i SF A a na ae Halo i tarna il a i arst bel ae ii tarat i are ai i aretha wE L Pee Sowa POMC ae f a ma egal gal Meet Be at LS Sab Sa Ph be Leh eh Sa Sah Soh LE i Lg Add Metadata for Files Metadata Category title Default current character count 0 2000 max description Default current character count 0 2000 max 12 Required metadata field labels are red and have an asterisk as title does above Complete all re
444. nd insert a hyperlink See Also Hyperlinks on page 150 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 522 Using Hyperlinks 4 lf desired use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 767 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 You can enter text to appear in a small window when someone hovers his cursor over this link For example SCIEIMLle WE dif de LO PIOVIUeE SOIULOT make a difference in people s lives Go to Ektron We do thy HoH yA a aaa Ir pharma a nology to patients th the latest technol able to provide solutions that make a To add such text use the Tooltip field 6 The style of this hyperlink is normally determined by the style sheet assigned to the content s page template However if you want to apply a special style sheet class to this link select it from the CSS Class dropdown 7 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink To test a hyperlink save the content Then under the View screen s Content tab click the link to verify that it opens the correct Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 523 Using Hyperlinks View Content Home LY th bo la Dea a Ge e Properties Content Summary Meta At ektron Medical we focus on assisting some of the most complex conditions Som hemophilia cancer immune disorders and
445. nd the content You can only select a piece of content whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting Content for the Task on page 292 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 289 Managing Tasks SS Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down box is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 294 Task Type Select the Task Type for this task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 294 Add By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 294 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Edit By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 296 Note If you edit a Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes St
446. nd white And it s anything but gray I know that no T m not alright But Til be OX cause Anything can everything can happen That s the story of my life Posted by Application Administrator at 01 02 2006 01 PM Comments o A subject can only be assigned to the blog in which it is created it cannot be used with other blogs With each new blog you need to create new subjects This gives you the flexibility to tailor unique subjects to each blog Adding Blog Subjects To add a blog subject follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 322 Blogs NOTE To add a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Subjects tab then Add New Subject 5 A text box appears 6 Enter the subject NOTE Add as many subjects as you need by clicking Add New Subjects 7 Click Save M Editing Blog Subjects To edit a blog subject follow these steps NOTE To edit a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 323 6 Blogs Click the Edit Properties button L
447. ndar Event on page 273 Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 Click the event you want to edit The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 282 Working with Calendars Edit Calendar Event Ti fk amp Event Title company meeting Event f montreal room Location One Time Recurring Date 56 Apr 2006 pa Start 1 00 00 PM End 2 00 00 PM W Display the times for the event Hyperlink C Launch link in a new browser Event Type 4yvatlable Selected Company Holiday gt Company Event Trade Show El 4 Update the fields using the table described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 as a reference 5 Click the Save button I Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 283 Working with Calendars NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on
448. ndar displays weekdays only Forward Only If a green check appears next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day and the user viewing the calendar is not logged in the calendar only displays events from the viewing date forward No past events appear A logged in user can view past calendar events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 267 Working with Calendars SS Event Type Label Indicates if event types are assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 277 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default this text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check means you can add event types to the calendar Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Instructions If this calendar uses event types text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the event type selection box By default this text is Select Event Type to View Select Event Type To View Select Event Type To View Enon Al m orp Holid Trade Show Your system administrator can change this text Show All Label If this calendar uses event types the list o
449. ned to this content click this tab and choose a template from the dropdown list See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Category Assign taxonomy categories to this content See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Taxonomy Editing HTML Content Ektron CMS400 NET HTML content can be in any of several statuses as described in Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 You can only edit content for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you e submitted for your approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 52 Editing HTML Content NOTE If you check content out you or a member of the Administrators group must check it in before other users can edit it NOTE The ability to edit content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Edit option on the dropdown menu you do not have permission to do so See Also e Editing a Form on page 210 e Translating Content to Another Language on page 55 e Editing an Office Document on page 244 e Editing a Managed File on page 256 Steps in Editing HTML Content There are two ways to edit content e froma web page after you log in e from the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Each is now explained Accessing the Edit Content Screen from a Web Page To ac
450. need approval when Forums are using the Moderate Comments feature See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Discussion Boards gt Implementing Discussion Boards gt Working with Posts gt Approving a Post Content Review A list of Content Reviews awaiting approval Content Reviews need approval when the ContentReview server control s Moderate property is set to True See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing HTML Content gt Content Rating gt Viewing the Content Rating Report gt Moderating Reviews gt Moderating Reviews From the Smart Desktop Content Flags Content flagged by a site visitor for review See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Community Management gt Flagging NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content items in that category for you When you click an item up to five content items in a category appear To perform tasks on that content and to view additional content in that category click the category lf you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content in that folder If you select content from the list information about it fills the right frame e The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has three subfolders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 286 Content Reports see
451. nes Enter a message to include with the invite in the Optional message box Click the Send Invitations button A confirmation appears stating that the invitation was sent The person is added to your Sent Colleagues Request See Also Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 411 Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 403 My Workspace This Search lets you find users or community groups registered on the Web site After seeing the search results you can add a colleague or join a community group When you hover over a user or community group name link profile information appears How much information appears depends on your status and the profile settings of the user or group returned in the results For an explanation of when additional information appears see the Developer Manual section gt Community Platform server controls gt CommunitySearch server control gt Using Community Search Results gt When is a User s Profile Accessible in Search Results The Community Search provides two types of searches e Directory filter users by a letter in the alphabet A user can select whether to sort by first or last name See e Basic Search Searches for users and groups on the site See Performing a Basic User Search on page 405 e Advanced Search Searches based on individual or multiple criteria such as Tags Display
452. nformation such as summary metadata taxonomy category and schedule Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions like view history submit for publishing and delete If you want to edit a managed file use the Check out and Save As menu option to place a copy of it on your computer Then edit it using the host application When done drag and drop the changed file to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 253 Using the Document Management System This section explains how to work with managed files through the following subtopics e Managed File Menu Options on page 254 e Creating a New Managed File on page 255 e Importing Managed Files on page 255 e Editing a Managed File on page 256 e Deleting a Managed File on page 257 Managed File Menu Options Depending on a managed file s status your role and position in the document s approval chain any of the following options may be available when you display the dropdown menu for a managed file See Also Content Dropdown Menu on page 35 Menu Description For more information see i n ey a a ee optio Note These sections describe working with Office documents Everything works the same with managed files View and edit managed file and its CMS400 NET information Summary Metadata History etc Can also be used to replace file Save As Save copy of managed file to your computer Saving an Office Document on pag
453. ng 65 start date setting 66 statuses 98 approved 798 submitted definition 803 summary see summary translating 55 types 7 viewing 40 Workarea search 114 workflow reports see reports content block see also content add button 60 definition 1 deleting several at once 62 editing overview 9 finding 9 lifecycle 10 contrast WeblmageFX command 698 copy information from other applications 658 toolbar and menu option 635 WebImageFX command 699 copyright character inserting 637 create new WebIlmageFX command 699 creating il document document manage ment feature 255 crop WebIlmageFX command 699 custom validation data designer 599 customizing toolbar 645 cut toolbar and menu option 634 D data designer custom validation 599 decline content from publishing 90 one content item 89 several content blocks 90 delete button floating toolbar 4 content toolbar button 62 folder toolbar button 62 toolbar button 62 WebImageFX command 700 delete cell toolbar button 642 delete column toolbar button 642 delete row toolbar button 642 deleting cell 748 content 57 folders 40 table 721 Detect All field eWebDiff 105 difference content view toolbar button 5 dimensions WebIlmageFX command 700 display borders toolbar button 643 DMS Document Option 232 Do not apply XSLT button 62 document creating document management feature 255 importing into DMS 230 document management feature adding documents to collectio
454. ng on the choices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 605 Replacing a Poll from the Web Site When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can right click on a poll and choose New Poll to replace the current one The title of the poll its ID and properties stay the same Only the questions and answers Change To replace a poll follow these steps 1 Log into Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Navigate to the Web page that hosts the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 621 Working with HTML Forms 3 Right click the poll and choose New Poll I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Conine E newna Friend C edit coWorke TA view History O Newsgrat belete Hother Add Task Submit For Properties eS Whorkarea 4 The Workarea opens indicating you are at step three of the Poll Wizard Continue to define the Poll Enter a question and all possible responses Leave unused responses blank Question oe Choices 5 Add anew question to the Question text box 6 Add possible responses to the Choices text boxes 7 Click Next 8 Click Done 9 The form editor launches allowing you to edit the fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 622 Working with HTML Forms 10 Once
455. ng with Collections Collections Report Title ID Description Path Homepage Ads 4 1 Homepage News 6 1 About Us a 1 Contacts 10 List of contacts at Ektron Medical CMS400Demo About Us Statt NOTE The ek_PageSize setting in the web config file determines the maximum number of collections that appear on a page before it breaks When a page breaks additional collections appear on another screen and the following appears at the bottom of the list Page 1 of 2 First Page Previous Page Next Page Last Page NOTE If you have a large number of collections use the Search box to help find one 3 The screen has four columns described below Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Folder location of the collection You can click any collection to view information about it and perform tasks on it See Viewing a Collection on page 428 You can also add a new collection See Creating a Collection on page 430 And if you have a large number of collections you can use the Search box to help find collections of interest Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 427 Working with Collections Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Sele
456. ns 259 adding documents to menus 259 approving file 259 browser requirements 224 creating managed file 255 document types 223 file types 223 importing document 230 introduction 222 managed files 253 Office document editing 244 overview 222 reports 259 reports of document by status 259 security 224 software requirements 224 workflow 258 Document Management System Firefox plugin 225 documentation online accessing 483 drag and drop DMS documents 235 E edit button floating toolbar 4 editing content block overview 9 content toolbar button 62 HTML 775 editors introduction 486 email address user editing 479 instant modifying 27 requirements 26 sending 25 where available 26 notification disabling 481 end date setting for content 68 end time calendar event 275 279 eWebDiff window 104 eWebEdit400 alignment toolbar buttons 494 anchor tag toolbar button 491 bold toolbar button 492 bookmarks 517 bullet toolbar button 494 cells background color 560 background color deleting 561 background image deleting 562 background image inserting 561 border size 556 deleting 559 merging 566 padding and spacing 568 splitting 565 text alignment 564 width 558 copy information from other applications 497 toolbar button 491 cut toolbar button 491 email links 527 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 finding text 498 font background color toolbar button 493 color toolbar button 493 relative size tool
457. nsert HTML View as HTML 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row click Insert Row NOTE If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 732 Manipulating Your Table s Format NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 746 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 761 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the
458. nsert Submit Button with Submit as its text Inserting or Editing Buttons on the When a site visitor completing the Form on page 612 form presses this button the data on this screen is submitted to your Web server After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 579 Metadata Edit the metadata for the form See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Assign start or end dates or both for when the form is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 Enter history comment to indicate changes made to the form Templates The template assigned to the form Technical note HTML forms must reside in a folder whose template uses the FormBlock server control See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Creating Updating Templates Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 588 Working with HTML Forms Category Any taxonomy categories assigned to the content See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Taxonomy Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 931 Submit content into approval process 5l Submit Ry Publish content to Web site Publish lt lt lt ss SS SS Note If the content has any active tasks a
459. nsert column left toolbar button 495 insert column right toolbar button 495 insert toolbar button 494 inserting within a table 537 merge cell horizontally toolbar button 495 merge cell vertically toolbar button 495 properties toolbar button 495 rows specifying 538 section 508 570 show hide border toolbar button 496 span rows and columns 562 split cell toolbar button 495 width setting by percentage 541 width setting by pixels 543 word wrap 567 text searching 498 text aligning in columns 538 toolbar buttons 490 translate toolbar button 492 underscore toolbar button 493 undo toolbar option 491 wiki toolbar button 492 exit without save WeblmageFX command 702 exit WeblmageFX command 701 extensions file allowed in library 135 image allowed in library 135 F file open toolbar button 643 save to local computer toolbar button 643 files copying to library 140 extensions library setting 135 library inserting into content 148 overwriting 145 viewing 143 library editing title 145 find next toolbar and menu option 635 finding content block 9 text 659 FireFox plugin for DMS installing 225 folders add button 60 button for deleting 62 deleting 40 information available when viewing 31 screen display 28 view history restore 111 viewing 30 fonts background color 639 color 638 heading size 638 size 638 style 638 form elements toolbar 641 forms adding to content 153 HTML assigning task 195 615 creating 159 576
460. nt is published it will no longer be archived Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 72 Adding a Content Summary Adding a Content Summary A summary provides a short description of content to supplement the title when a list of content items appear on a Web page You create a Summary when creating or editing content Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that display just the title and summary to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site which lists titles and summaries of top stories illustrated below TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA iccieom Ine id SididOweneoie sia elo Come Sie management and authoring has been named a Rising Star as part of the prestigious New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Ine y an INAO Cor shel yoan Web content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the Toun h or ses aioe Gucioveye kOe Ik Celigse cll cea Program Like content summaries can include images as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation on your site Your system administrator determines how and where to display summaries on your site See Also Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Versi
461. ntent A staged version of content is one that is not published It can be content that is checked in or content that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to content while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it See Also After you select the content you have the following options on page 43 Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 8 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 806 Index Note All eWebEdit400 entries are listed under eWebEdit400 508 compliance 784 A about eWebEditPro box 640 643 absolute positioning of objects 640 add button calendar event 60 library items 61 task 61 workarea toolbar 60 column toolbar button 642 content 48 block button 60 folder button 60 row toolbar button 642 add content screen buttons 50 responding to fields 50 tabs 51 address email user editing 479 AddSubMenu 460 alignment cell 756 image 681 table 737 text 640 text remove toolbar button 643 approval chain example 91 approvals toolbar button 61 approve all toolbar button 61 button floating toolbar 4 workarea toolbar 61 content 87 one content item 89 several content blocks 90 approving file document management feature 259 archived content toolbar button 61 archiving definition 69 options 69 restoring archived content 71 assets supported types 223 assign task button floating tool
462. ntent Last User To Edit 2dministrator Application Last Edit Date 9 19 2005 2 55 05 PM Date Created 1 11 2005 3 04 34 PM Description Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners Preview Ektron Partners and Customers The table below describes each field on the screen Field Deseripton Title assigned by user who copied or edited it Filename and location on the server Library ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET when file was originally copied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 143 Library Folder Field Deseripton Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content If the file can be displayed in your browser a preview of it appears at the bottom of the screen If it cannot display in the browser a link to preview it in its host application appears instead NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen Edit the items title and description Editing a File on page 145 Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 145 Find content linked to the library item Library Link Searching on page 147 Delete library item Deleting Library Items on page 148 M ee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 144 Library Folder Editing a File You ca
463. ntent Office or View Properties Marked for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requested to be removed from the Web site by a user When content is marked for deletion it passes through the approval chain like content that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 804 Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes the toolbar buttons Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content back into a checked in status Save As Save copy of file to your computer See Also Saving an Office for assets Document on page 249 only View View information about content Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its start date and time have not occurred yet Button Description Check out the content and edit it Only the user who submitted the content has this option Note If you edit the content you need to resubmit it to the approval chain View View in View all information about content Office or View Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 805 Appendix A Content Statuses Staged Co
464. ntent items from the current folder This option only deletes Approved content For more information see Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder on page 59 e Depending on the content s status and your permissions you may be able to delete one item at a time The options for doing so are a Delete option when viewing content from a Web page a Delete menu option that appears after selecting content on the View Contents of Folder screen For more information see Deleting a Single Content Item on page 57 Like publishing deleted content must proceed through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps Deleting One Content Item from a Web Page To delete content from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 57 Deleting Content Browse to the content you want to delete Click the Delete menu option The View Content screen for the selected content appears See Viewing Content on page 40 5 Click the Delete button Hl 6 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E x Are you sure vou wish to submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers
465. nual Version 7 5 293 Managing Tasks Adding a Task Category and Task Type NOTE Add Task Task Title Assigned To Language Content Priority Task Category State Start Date Due Date Description Task Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories and types without leaving the Add Task screen Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Adding a Task Category and Task Type To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 288 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type dropdown box E jedit Select User or Group English U S v Select Normal Not Speched Task Type NotSpeciied Edit l l 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 294 Managing Tasks Add Task Type Task Type Add Task Type to Existing Task Category Po Task Type Description Add Task Type to New Task Category C Not Available From this screen you can perfo
466. number one more than the line above Note The Number toolbar button applies a number to each paragraph If you want to switch to regular that is non numbered paragraphs click the button a second time Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Note The Bullet toolbar button applies a bullet to each paragraph If you want to switch to regular that is non bulleted paragraphs click the button a second time Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin Indent Align paragraph so that it is arranged Left Center and Right Justify e evenly on the left side uneven on the right e in the center of each line evenly on the right side uneven on the left e evenly on right and left side Use the last button to remove justification Insert a table Working with Insert table Tables on page 531 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 494 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Insert a new row above current one that is the one in which the cursor currently resides a Insert row above Insert a new row below current one that is the one in which the cursor currently resides a Insert row below Insert a new column to the left of the current one y ra Insert column left Insert a new column to the right of the current one y
467. ny type library asset external hyperlink link to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu on the right is a submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over Company Profile The right arrow indicates a submenu is available Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature e the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking View gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 446 Working with Menus e the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus e the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above If you choose the first or second option you select a specific menu Then it appears on the View Menu screen For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menu screen you can perform the following actions on a menu e Create anew menu e Edit its information for example the URL and template link e Translate it e Delete it e Add or remove items e Change the sequence of menu items e Edit menu items e For submenus add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information edit menu items Managing Menus Ektron CMS400 NET gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sections explain how to do that e Adding a New Menu on page 448 e Adding a Menu Item on page 453 e Adding Ne
468. o Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur e The content is new e The content already exists and you are publishing a new version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 67 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Each scenario is now explained Setting the Go Live Date on New Content When you set a go live date on new content it becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a site visitor accesses the page that contains the content before then he sees only the template If a logged in CMS user browses your Web site he sees a grey border around the content until the date specified If he clicks within the grey border he can use the Preview option to see the new content Setting the Go live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes to existing content and it completes the approval chain a logged in CMS user sees a grey border around the content until the date specified When you view content on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previous version and its status changes to Active setting an End Date on Content To set an end date for content follow these steps Edit content See Editing HTML Content
469. o a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink on page 768 e Testing a Hyperlink on page 771 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 771 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 772 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 773 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 773 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page the browser displays when the person viewing the page clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 768 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www extron com IS the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the URL address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quicklink Your Web master can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quick Link select link Ektron Home Fage Ektron Technical Support Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the UR
470. o accomplish either of these actions follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Select the folder from which to move or copy the images 3 Click the drop down triangle to the right of the image title 4 From the drop down list select Copy to Buffer 5 Select the folder to which the content will be moved 6 Click the Manage link 7 Click the Move Items Ea or Copy button B 8 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm the move or copy action 9 Click OK 10 The page refreshes and the moved or copied image appears in the new folder Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos The Photos area of My Workspace allows you to add and remove images you want share with your colleagues You can share content with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the content private You apply sharing options to folders not to individual content To share a folder follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Click the Manage Folder Button 4 3 The Add Folder box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 422 My Workspace 4 Click the Share Folder button 45l 5 The Share Workspace box appears Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues Private testpics O O 6 Select with whom to share your folders The table below describes each option All people viewing your profile page can view your photos C
471. o approve This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorlnChief has a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 95 Approving Declining Content publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last approver in the approval chain When he approves the content it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options ee Publish the content El 1 Sends an email to the creator notifying him her that content was Decline declined 2 Removes content from the approval chain Invokes the editor The approver changes the content After reviewing the content the EditorInChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content receives an email notifying him that it was published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 96 Approving Declining Content amp Content changes have been made The changes to the content Eed Sox Win World Senes have been approved The content changes went live immediately Fara sena Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 97 Comparing Versions of Content Comparing Versions of Content There are two versions of this procedure You may need to consult your system administrator to determine the correct procedure for you If the Ekt
472. o equal 10 remove the less than sign lt from the calculation Now it looks like this string length X 10 Replace the x with 10 Now it looks like this string length 10 11 Move the cursor up to the Message field and compose a relevant error message For example must be 10 digits 12 Your screen should look like this Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 603 Working with HTML Forms Text Field General Validation Data Style Validation Custom Message Custom Validation Data Type Whole number Condition Examples Maximum text length string length lt X 13 Press OK Fields on the Text Field Dialog Data Style Tab Click the Data Style tab to apply formatting to a field that accepts user input When you do the following tab appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 604 Working with HTML Forms Text Field General Validation Font Name Unassigned e Font Size Unassigned Bold Unassigned Italic Unassigned Text Alignment Unassigned Text Line Unassigned Font Color ma Background Color ili Use the tab to assign the following formatting attributes to a response field e Font style and size e Bold and italic e Text alignment especially helpful for formatting dollar amounts in a plain text field e Underline or strikethrough e Font color and or background color Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices fi
473. o find out more about a MWS VE Agreement please contact maplic microsoft com for information Google Maps http code google com apis maps terms html 7 Miscellaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License
474. o remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 365 eee i Add Form Add a new form Creating a New Form on page 159 Export Raw Data Download form data to a Microsoft l Aa E A Exporting a Form s Raw Excel spreadsheet Data on page 203 ee l l Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 213 Button or Tab View Repons i View Content or Form Properties Properties View language Add Add select select language language Description View submitted form data can select range of dates Access view properties for the content If you can view forms in more than one language select a language from the drop down list Lets you copy current form into new block and translate it to selected language Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies Working with HTML Forms More Information Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 Translating Content on page 818 WARNING For complete understanding of Forms polls and surveys you should read the entire chapter Working with HTML Forms on page 156 e A pollis generally one question and appears on a site for a very short time an hour or a day e A sur
475. ode form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats See product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio mus
476. odules gt Menus 2 Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 454 Working with Menus 3 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 4 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with View Menu O ped Of Delete Ty I 5 The Add New ltem screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Menu item type For more information see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 456 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu on page 458 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 458 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu ltem on page 459 Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Login 2 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 455 Working with Menus 3 Place the cursor on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 4 The menu appears
477. of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Additional Terms and Conditions apply When using the CMS400 map control Subject to the terms and conditions of the Map provider Microsoft Virtual Earth or Google maps Microsoft Virtual Earth http www microsoft com virtualearth product terms html If you have any questions would like t
478. of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Server File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Managing Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 671 Inserting Images Media File Selection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 672 Inserting Images Media File Selection File Selection OK Cancel Select Server File Select Mew File Picture Options ldg width Height Border Thickness fo Alignment T Reset W Maintain 4gpect Ratio Spacing Horizontal fo fo Vertical You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 673 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 677 Using the Firs
479. ofile set Smart Desktop as start location 482 V validation HTML form 172 590 version number viewing 640 643 vertical flip WeblmageFX command 717 view content difference 98 100 button floating toolbar 5 screen first use 107 view date toolbar button 63 view difference toolbar button 63 view history button floating toolbar 5 toolbar button 63 view preferences toolbar button 643 view published toolbar button 63 view staged toolbar button 64 ViewAllMenus 444 viewing HTML 774 W WeblmageFX assigning new name to image 689 choosing image 687 commands blur 693 brightness 694 choose color 695 choose font 696 contrast 698 copy 699 create new 699 crop 699 delete 700 dimensions 700 exit 701 exit without save 702 freehand 702 horizontal flip 703 image info 703 line 704 open 705 oval 706 paste as new image 707 pointer selection 707 polygon 708 rectangle 709 redo 710 rotate 711 save 711 save as 712 select 713 sharpen 713 text 714 twain acquire 716 twain source 716 undo 717 vertical flip 717 zoom in 717 zoom out 718 introduction 687 menu commands 689 saving image 689 specifying color depth 718 toolbar buttons 689 whole word match 662 width table setting by percentage 733 setting by pixels 735 width work page customizing for user 481 wiki creating 778 overview 778 word wrap 761 work page size customizing for user 481 workarea accessing 15 button floating toolbar 5 definition 15 hiding
480. og Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 90 Vertical Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 90 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 792 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 792 WARNING The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works if Internet Explorer version 6 0 or higher is installed Once that is installed any browser can be used Netscape FireFox IE etc WARNING Even if you change no values on the screen you must open the Accessibility dialog whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 719 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table border until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a table is selected small squares surround it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 788 Section 508 Compliance Employee Id Department 1546 1549 Human Resources 1550 sales 1551 Adminstration Click the Tables button E3 Click Table Properties The Table Properties dialog appears oo M Click the Accessibility button NoTE Your syste
481. ohn 12 6 2005 4 18 50 PM Gender Age range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status Religious Other Religious Affiliation Race Mothers Education Level Fathers Education Level F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 4 22 58 PM Gender ge range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status Relinimiss Submitted Data as XML Yalue Male 22 22 High Schooal GE 40 000 49 9 60 000 69 9 Legally Separat Evangelical Chr African A4merica High School GE Some College Female 31 40 Master s Degre 70 000 79 9 100 000 14 Married Protestant Chri Displays the results of the form in an XML format The following information is included e lt Title gt title of the form block IMPORTANT With polls you can create a new poll question to replace an existing poll question By default the poll still has the same Title ID and other properties You can change the title of a new poll question when you are editing the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 202 Working with HTML Forms e lt Description gt description of the form e lt SubmittedData gt information that was submitted Sample of Submitted Data as XML lt Form gt lt Title gt Where did you hear about Ektron Medical lt Title gt lt Description gt Poll for finding out where visitor s heard about our site lt Description gt lt SubmittedData gt Date value 2006 05 16T17 25 35 gt 5
482. olleagues Only people who are your colleagues can view your photos See Also Colleagues on page 400 Selected Colleagues Only colleagues who are marked as selected colleagues can view your photos Private You are the only one who can view your photos 7 Click the Share button Share Images in the folder are now available for viewing by the selected viewer type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 423 Web Site Navigation Aids Web Site Navigation Aids Working with Collections A collection is a list of content links offered to the readers of a Web page The following illustration shows a collection on a Web page ar cveack EE Go Back Ektron Rated Positrve Ektron Inc an innovator m Web content management software today announced Ektron to Demonstrate Healthcare Healthcare Content Indexing Framework which enables hospitals medical groups and health insurers to deliver indexed content via the Web You can also use a collection to display listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Highlighted Knowledge Base Articles INFO Release notes for evVvebEditPro ML v4 2 INFO Release notes for evVvebEditPro 4 2 INFO eWebEditPro 3 amp 4 JavaScript Object Model This section explains how to create collections Your system administrator then creates or updates a
483. ollow kmeta name rewisit after content 15 days gt EMETAJHTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no gt lt Titiesektron Inc web Content Management and Document Management wi exible and affordable authoring solutions lt T1t le Keywords content document management web content manageme Management cms EET Description content Ektron s web Content Management and C Management software products manage web content and documents with wYSI xHTML HTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring anc zalitians For wah cantant manmsanesmant and dacimont mansansmoant For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 85 e Metadata that identifies related Ektron CMS400 NET information for example another content item a collection or a ListSummary Then your Web site can display the related content whenever the source content item appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 77 Adding or Editing Metadata For example your Web site sells motorcycle helmets On a page that shows a particular helmet the left column lists a collection of motorcycle drivers who use that helmet e Image data this standard metadata field is available to every content item It identifies an image that can be retrieved by Ektron Markup Language s EKML s1mage and ImageThumbnail Variables EKML is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide An example of using Imag
484. om the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned 6 Click OK Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to soan rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 755 Working with Table Cells Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or e left e center e right e justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers This example illustrates these choices text right justified center justified ext left justified This text is both justify left and right justified To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Ver
485. ommunity Group Invites on page 414 Viewing Your Community Groups You can see a list of community groups you belong to by navigating to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt My Groups in the Workarea From this area you can remove yourself from a community group Remove Yourself from a Community Group To remove yourself from a community group in the Workarea follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt My Groups 2 Place a check in the box next to the group from which you want to be removed To remove yourself from all groups place a check in the Select All box IMPORTANT If you are the leader of a community group a check box does not appear next the title of the group You cannot remove yourself from community groups which you lead You must either select a new leader for the community group and then remove yourself or remove the community group from the system For the steps to select a new leader see the Administrator Manual section Community Groups gt Community Groups in the Workarea gt Managing Community Groups gt Edit a Community Group s Information 3 Click the Leave Group button o The screen refreshes and the group is removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 413 My Workspace Working with Pending Community Groups Pending Groups show a list of groups which you have asked to join but have yet to be accepted To v
486. on 7 5 73 Adding a Content Summary e Automatic Creation of a Summary on page 74 e Creating a Summary for New Content on page 74 e Creating a Summary for Existing Content on page 75 e Editing a Summary on page 76 Automatic Creation of a Summary Ektron CMS400 NET automatically generates a summary for new content if none exists To do this it checks the summary when new content is published If the summary is blank Ektron CMS400 NET copies the first 40 words of the content to the summary After the content is published you can update or delete the summary If it is deleted the summary remains blank and is never again automatically generated for that content item Creating a Summary for New Content Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content Click New then pick the content type from the dropdown menu The Add Content screen appears Insert a Title and content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 ae 5 Click the Summary tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 74 Adding a Content Summary Edit Content in Folder About Us Title English U S Content Summary Comment Templat BB REGAS oa eTA A A A ae Bi Apply Style Normal BZ UAA gzh FJ III Ta gi Ei i WW I nbp TM j i ed H As a global leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and glo communities particularly with regard to increasin
487. on tab is disabled Password field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry is disguised This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password Password Passwords cannot exceed 18 characters Learn About Fields on the Text Field Dialog Validation Tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 594 Working with HTML Forms Fields on the Text Field Dialog Validation Tab Text Field General Validation Data Style Validation No validation Message Po seta Wakid kan LUS TOM Va lid a CHOT e p Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 596 Your system administrator determines whether a user can save an invalid document Message Enter text that appears on the screen if a site visitor s response violates the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message matches the selected validation criterion Use this field to customize the text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Man
488. on the Dialog Box on page 499 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 498 Finding and Replacing Text Finding Text In the Find field type the text you want to find 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 499 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Finding and Replacing Text In the Find field type the text you want to find Click the Replace tab In the Replace With field type the text to replace the find text oN Fs 4 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 499 9 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NOTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find button 6 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 500 e Considering the Case of a Search Ter
489. ons section of the Table Properties tab specify the percentage at the Width or Height field Follow the number with the percent sign as shown below AE a o E Table Wizard FF Table Design A Sd Table Properties Dimensions width px Hecht OOOO Lavout Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 542 Working with Tables Specifying Table Width or Height by Pixels Specify table width or height by pixels if you want the table size to remain the same when a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized lf the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table e Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help ws a N Reload Home Search Netscape Setting Table Width by Pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 543 Working with Tables To specify table width or height by pixels follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab In the Dimensions section of the Table Properties tab enter the number of pixels at the Width or Height field
490. ontent as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 204 Click the Edit Content button CY The Edit Content screen appears Make the necessary changes to the form s content lf needed click the Postback Message Metadata Schedule Comment or Web Alerts tab to edit that information Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Editing a Form s Properties See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you are creating The options are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 211 Working with HTML Forms e Send it via email e Store it in a database e Send it via email and store in a database See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Deleting a Form You can easily dele
491. ontent history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Submitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available lf content can be compared with another version the View Difference button R appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Content Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 107 The Compare Content window consists of the following e Toolbar on page 103 e Content Area on page 106 e View Tabs on page 106 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 102 Comparing Versions of Content Welcome to RC internNational Re ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RO racing and thang vehicle sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO community We w improve our affordable products and hope you will become an EC international member RE D is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and Inve RC Content Area View Tabs Dif Prubished Each area is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below en rame ei Print Sends content to local or network printer Note This option prints the currently displayed content whether it is the compared publis
492. oolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 646 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize Edit e View As ve Paragraph Format E Format e Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 647 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Special Characters Form Elements _ Table Position Objects C Test Direction E 5 Click the menu that you want to edit 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 648 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Bullets Bulleted List 4 Button tele g Cell Properties m Remove gt y T aec Check Spelling As You Vae Deri Checkbox Mare Dawn E Center Align Center Check Spelling Selected Toolbar E dit Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half of the screen lists av
493. opied library images NOTE Overwriting images is a permission that your system administrator may or may not assign to you To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 145 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jog gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to content To add an image to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 673 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 152 Library Folder Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see terms Used in this Chapter on page 131 Adding a Quicklink or Form to Content After new content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table checkbox was checked for it users can insert a quicklink to it into any other content To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a
494. or a folder If you choose a folder its structure is recreated in Ektron CMS400 NET even if it is several levels deep 1 From the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the Ektron CMS400 NET folder in which you want to place the documents See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 NOTE You cannot drag and drop a file into a folder for which XML Smart Forms are required 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create the documents in a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click the Add Assets button circled below Footer K s E farm Aata avwnmert al Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 235 Using the Document Management System 5 The drag and drop window appears Drag and drop documents below NOTE If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET with the FireFox browser for the first time see Installing FireFox Plug In on page 225 6 Resize Ektron CMS400 NET so that it occupies the left half of the screen 7 Open Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the right half of the screen 8 Find the folder or assets you want to upload From Windows Explorer select then drag and drop the folder or assets onto the drag and drop window E Lions File Edit View Favorites Tool Address C Documents and Setting Folders Name nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nee B Deki Thumbs db Drag a
495. or page Use the Library Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 580 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 582 10 Click the Next button 11 A screen indicates that you have entered basic information about the survey and should click the Done button to enter the survey s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 585 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 625 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e use Microsoft Word to edit Web content e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e edit an image e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indenta
496. orite follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites 2 Place a check in the box next to the content you wish to remove 3 Click the Remove button I Moving Favorites to a Folder Moving favorite content to a folder allows you to group you favorites by a common theme For example you might group all content created by a certain author under a folder with that author s name To move a Favorite to a folder follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites Mark a favorite item s to be moved 1 2 3 Click the Move button L 4 Select the folder where the content will be moved Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 416 My Workspace This folder contains my favorite content on Ektron s Server Controls T Ektron Rated Positive P Sample Content Block iil 5 Click OK to move the favorites to the new folder 6 The page refreshes and the content can now be found in the Photos new folder The Photos area of My Workspace allows you to add images to CMS400 and associate them with your profile You can create subfolders to separate images by category Images in the Photos area are separate from the Content folder structure and its files Images in this list have the same properties and actions available to those found in the Content folder structure For example you view edit delete and copy Photos From the Photos area you can
497. ormation See Also Accessing Online Help on page 483 e online manuals can be viewed searched and printed like a paper manual Online manuals are in a PDF format which makes it easy to navigate online and print See Also Accessing Online Manuals on page 484 Both formats provide the same information Choose the format that best suits your needs Accessing Online Help To access online help for any screen click the help icon illustrated below When you do an online help screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 483 Online Help Ektron CMS400 MET Administrator Manual Managing Content Folders An administrator can control every aspect of the content and the folders that hold them The controls include setting permissions approvals and F adding editing publishing and deleting content Below is the content folder The following table describes the buttons available on every help screen Moves to prior topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Moves to next topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Divides the help into two panels e The left panel displays the table of contents It also provides buttons for accessing the index and full text search The right panel continues to display help topics Highlight the current help topic s location within the table of contents Print
498. ose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell whose width you want to set Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Ie YY The Cell Properties dialog box appears Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout f Not Specified f Percent fa Waard Wafram C Pisels 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 732 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 747 Working with Table Cells 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before o pee e Co E E Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these step
499. ottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 735 Manipulating Your Table s Format yF Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help Peles diene cre EEN etscape If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a monitor set to low resolution 640 x 480 Setting Table Width by Pixels To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the number of pixels at Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 736 Manipulating Your Table s Format the Width field Insert T able Size Rows 2 Columns 2 Layout p10 Not Specified C Percent fe Pixels Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Alignment Example E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 737 Manipulating Your Table s Format If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is lett justified so this text appears to the right of the table Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box
500. ou copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 707 To select an area of an image use the Select command See Also Select on page 713 If you do not select an area the entire image is copied Standard Toolbar Button Description Crop D Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 697 Standard Toolbar Button Description t Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 699 Editing Images Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area To use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to keep 2 Press the Crop button t 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button rad Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area before you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its
501. ou post regularly or are just getting started Writer is the tool for you If you do not already have a weblog you can create a Windows Live Spaces account now Click the link below to open the web page that will begin your on ine registration pos Create a Windows Live Spaces Account If you already have a blog dick Next to continue In the Choose Blog Type window select Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta the Another PY weblog service radio button ta Choose Blog Type Click Next Configure Writer Windows Live Writer can create blog entries on your Windows Live Space or on another weblog service Please choose your blog service to continue Configure Windows Live Writer to publish to Windows Live Spaces Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 359 Blogs Step Windows Live Writer Setup Screen In the Weblog Homepage and Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta Login window enter Fo the following HVA Wak Ue Weblog Homepage and Login Weblog Homep age URL this is the page that contains the blog For exam ple http lt your Site gt CMS400Min blogs aspx Weblog Homepage URL View Weblog username to log on to the Ektron Password your password to log on to the Ektron CMS400 NET site Edit Proxy Set tings edit the proxy settings as needed Configure Writer to work with your current blog service To use Windows Live Writer you must already have an account with a blog serv
502. ou want to translate the content ee PENMENEMENENENENENENENNNENENNNNENNNNNENEENNENENENERENENENERENENENENNN Danish German standard 3 The Edit Content screen appears with original language content 4 Translate into the new language then delete the original content If desired you can click the Translate button ag If you do a new screen prompts you to identify the original language new language and a glossary Then the content is translated If you like the translation click Paste Content and the translated content replaces the original Once the translated content is inserted into the editor you can edit it as needed 5 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language It has the same content ID number as the original content but a different language identifier Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 56 Deleting Content Deleting Content NOTE The ability to delete content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete option on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so NOTE It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting content See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 59 The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site There are two ways to delete content e A folder level Delete option Delete removes several co
503. ounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Validation Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 178 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation Option Characteristics of Valid Response No validation Response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Non negative whole number or A positive whole number or no response blank Non negative whole number A positive who
504. ove button 63 remove XSLT from XML content block 111 reorder button 63 replace toolbar and menu option 635 replacing text 659 reports content workflow 130 restore toolbar button 63 restoring content 111 right to left editing 641 rotate WeblmageFX command 711 rows table adding 731 deleting 731 spanning 754 specifying 730 S save file to local computer toolbar button 643 to database toolbar button 63 WeblmageFX command 711 save as WeblmageFX command 712 scanning an image 716 scheduling content 65 search 659 considering case of search term 661 content folder 114 direction 660 library 136 toolbar button 63 whole word match 662 search screen noise files 123 specifying kind of content to search 122 match criteria 123 word or phrase 122 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 vi searchable properties creating 79 editing 79 section 508 compliance 784 tables 787 select all menu option 655 toolbar button 644 select none toolbar button 644 select WeblmageFX command 713 selecting text 632 server moving picture to 685 sharpen WeblmageFX command 713 shortcuts keyboard 633 show calendar toolbar button 63 Smart Desktop definition 17 hiding left panel 23 modifying folder display 21 navigating 20 set as start location for user 482 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 105 space character inserting 637 spacing cell 762 spanning table columns 754 table rows 754 special characters inserting 638 spell
505. ows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 148 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 194 Working with HTML Forms Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make Sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information on the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on p
506. p Enter the relationship of the blog roll link to you or to the site For example brother Click Edit for a pop up screen that helps you choose the site s relationship The table below explains each relationship type Type of Description Relationship URL Check this box if the address is owned by the same person or company Friendship What level of friendship do you have with the person who owns the site Choose one e Contact e Acquaintance e Friend e None Physical Check this box if you have physically met the person who owns this blog Professional Does the person who owns this site have a work level relationship with you Select all that apply e Co worker e Colleague Geographical Select one e co resident e neighbor e none Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 329 Blogs Type of Description Relationship If the site owner is family what is the relationship Select one Child Parent Sibling Spouse Kin None Romantic What are your feelings toward the owner of the site Check all that apply Muse Crush Date Sweetheart 7 Click Close NOTE Add as many links to the blog boll as you would like Just click Add a New Roll Link To remove a blog roll link see Removing a Blog Roll Link on page 331 8 Click Save M Editing a Blog Roll To edit a blog roll link follow these steps NOTE To edit a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea
507. page 282 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the content folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longer needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 2 Click the event you want to delete 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete button i 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 284 Working with Calendars Deleting a Single Recurring Event 1 a ee e Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 Click the event you
508. pell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button 7 When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of the dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Spelling x Mot in Dichornary O leal O leal E All Suggestions Change Change all Change all Cancel e Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 664 Checking Spelling The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays e the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary field e suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list e buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit If you want to Do this Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue Click the suggested word spell checking the page _ Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the Click the suggested word Suggestions and continue spell checking the page _ Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue Click in the Not In Dictionary spell checking the page field Correct the spelling Click Change Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary L
509. perties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Delete Submit a request to delete the Deleting Content on page 57 content If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 LY 0 a B Submit Publish Submit content into approval Asset Workflow on page 258 chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button option appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 801 Appendix A Content Statuses Checked Out Content If content has a red border it was checked out by a user other than you If you checked it out the border is green While in this status other users are prevented from editing It Ektron encourages you to contact us with y feedback about Ektron s Web content auth solutions The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the user who checked it out or a system administrator Only the user who checked out the content can edit it Each option you may perform on checked out content is described below Button Name Description For more information see is Check In Check in content Only appears Ga to user who checked content out Force Check In Only appears if
510. ppearance of clean HTML is more consistent when viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 776 Working with HTML Inserting Content from MS Office If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 or higher application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears Clean HTML Code c HTML code generated by Office 2000 has been detected There iz excessive HTML code that may prevent you from changing test format Tou may clean the HTML code later by right clicking and selecting Clean HTML Code Do pou want to clean the HTML code now For best results click Yes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 777 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature The Wiki feature lets registered site visitors that is membership users and CMS users insert hyperlinks to other content The hyperlinks can connect to existing content or to content that doesn t exist yet If the hyperlink s destination does not yet exist the wiki creates both the hyperlink and the new content item to which it jumps This collaborative authoring style is used in wiki sites such as Wikipedia nttp en wikipedia org where any author can contribute new content and articles Creating a Wiki To create a wiki hyperlink the us
511. ppens upon reaching its end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illustrated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on the content s Schedule screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 69 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Action on End Date Archive and remove from site fexpire C Archive and remain on site C Add to the CMS Refresh Report Each option is explained below Archive Options Can site visitors view content Can users view and edit upon expiration content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Archive and remove from Yes within its folder by clicking site expire the View gt Archive Content option Archived content can be found via the Workarea Advanced search if the Archived check box is checked Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 70 Archive and remain on Site Add to CMS Refresh Report Scheduling Content to Begin and End Can site visitors view content upon expiration Content appears in a List Sum mary if the ListsSummary con trols content ype property is set to Archive_Content If content is an HTML form the response page option appears For example if the form displays a message after the user com pletes it t
512. proval chain Invokes the editor From here the approver can change the content For demonstration purposes we ll choose Approve Second Approver After the content is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 94 Approving Declining Content Fron Webmaster your company com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 19 PM To EditorInChieh ourdomain com Subject Request for content aporoval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site httow 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Mote You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor EditorInChief Comment E EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS400 NET and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content Red Sox win World Series From this window EditorInChief can view information about the content including title go live date user who created it etc He then clicks the content he wants t
513. ption Allows you to For more information see Approve Approve content that has been submitted for Approving Declining Content publishing on page 87 Check in Change status of selected content to checked in Checked In Content on Might use if you checked out and saved a page 800 document then it became lost or corrupted This option changes original document s status to checked in However it does not replace the version of the file in Ektron CMS400 NET To replace content that was checked out and edited drag and drop it into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document on page 247 Note Previous Ektron CMS400 NET releases included a Work Offline option whose Check In function replaced the version of the file in Ektron CMS400 NET In contrast this release s Check In function only changes the content s status Check out Change acontent item s status to checked out and Checking Out Saving and and Save As save it to your local computer When you finish Replacing an Office Document editing the item drag and drop it into Ektron on page 247 CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 37 Viewing a Folder Option Allows you to For more information see Decline Edit in Microsoft Office Edit Properties Decline an approval request submitted to you This option reject the changes and keeps the current version live on Web site Yo
514. quired metadata See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 If the Category tab appears apply at least one taxonomy category to this asset See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Taxonomy The status of a dragged and dropped document depends on the approval chain e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In I Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder You can set up a mapped network folder then drag and drop folders or assets into it The advantage of this method is that you can upload documents without installing or learning how to use Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 238 Using the Document Management System When using drag and drop you can choose individual assets or a folder If you choose a folder Ektron CMS400 NET recreates that folder structure even if it is several levels deep After the assets are uploaded they are set to Checked In status You can also delete and move assets using the mapped network folder This section explains these procedures e Language Restrictions on Content in a Mapped Network Drive on page 239 e Setting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 239 e Dragging and Dropping Assets into a Mapped Network Drive on page 241 e Viewing Managed Files in a Mapped Network Drive on pag
515. r Rating Ektron CMS400 NET provides a Content Rating feature that lets site visitors rate any content item on a scale of 1 to 10 If this feature is enabled for the content item the average numerical rating appears See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Content Rating Content Searchable True appears if the content can be found when someone searches your Web site However even if content is not searchable the Workarea Advanced search still finds it See Also gt The Advanced Search Tab on page 119 Expanding the Content Area You can vertically expand the content area of the screen This gives you more space to work on content To expand the content portion of the Workarea click the up arrow a highlighted below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 46 Viewing Content tent in Folder About Us eS tu 5 ay Style Normal y B Z U A eX nbsp TM i B a ee ole obal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global mities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for erved populations It is a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of mmunities in which employees live and work Tal gi u i gi WW I I Once the content area is expanded the top row of buttons and title are not visible User Aste KEAR TEAN ea UG id das cate Rol Giles E arec ELA ma
516. r aa Approve Assign Task Hide Border Appears if you selected a language and the content is not available in that language Use this button to copy existing content into new content and translate it to the new language Approve or decline a request to publish or delete content Assign a task to a user Open View Content page From it you can delete the content Check out content for editing Hide the colored border around content when a user is logged in Important When you hide the border the Add and Edit buttons for menus are also hidden Log out of Ektron CMS400 NET view of Web site Create new poll or survey Preview content before it is published Open content s View Content page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Approving Declining Content on page 87 Managing Tasks on page 286 Viewing Content on page 40 Editing HTML Content on page 52 Hiding and Showing the Content Border on page 5 Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 14 Creating Polls and Surveys on page 214 Site Preview on page 13 Viewing Content on page 40 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Button Name Description More Information Show Border View Content Difference Show a colored border around Hiding and Showing the content when you are logged in Content Border on page 5 Important When you hide the border the Add and Edit buttons for menu
517. r Editing Metadata ee oa Library Folder CMS400Demo quicklinks O Blogs fils tN PO E E OI E iN S ICE AINE Sen Meen Title ID content Lanquar GO _RotatingIma About Us login asps7id 35 56 1033 About Us About Us Index flogin aspy 7id 276 296 1033 Blogs Home login aspsx7id 33 54 1033 Conditions Privacy login as wid 268 208 1033 3 Contact Infor Products products aspx id 76 g7 1033 a ektron Medice Products 4 Mm CQ Services Therapies 5 Developer a aii Ea Discussion Boarc Title ak C HTML multimedia test G Openoffice i POF Use this screen to identify the related content To do this Select a folder from the left frame Double click the related content item from the top right frame The item appears in the lower right frame When all items are in the lower right frame click the Save button bel directly below Select Metadata e lf default metadata is defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it e Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of metadata characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters 5 Click the Save button 1 6 The View Content screen reappears The content is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit it to the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 84 Adding or Ed
518. r end date status postback message etc e Form fields plain text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 158 Working with HTML Forms Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a new form has five simple steps After you complete the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need To make the task even easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 211 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties screen See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 NoTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 215 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 220 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New menu gt HTML Form Survey Ektron CMS400 NET
519. r in your User list This depends on which version of the software you have installed CMS400 NET Users Membership Users C jedit C jmember C tbrown C member example com C jsmith C north L vs C supermember C west Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Reference Manual Version 7 5 Rev 7 Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Additional Information You do not need to make these changes if you are using the CMS400 NET for demonstration or evaluation purposes These changes should be completed once the decision is made to purchase the product and go live with your site IMPORTANT Ektron recommends creating your own Administrator user and deleting the Admin user IMPORTANT Ektron recommends deleting any users from the CMS400 NET that are not needed on the system The Everyone Group By default the root folder in Workarea provides the Everyone Group with all permissions except Overwrite Library Ektron Inc recommends reviewing the permission needs of the Everyone Group when you add a folder For information on Permissions see the Administrator Manual section Managing User and Permissions gt Setting Permissions Editing Builtin IMPORTANT The builtin user does not appear in the Users list This user appears on the application setup screen To change the builtin account information follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Setup Click the Edit button L Locate t
520. rcise your simple Web page will look like this BBR 68 2oo 0 RE MPS sees amp Apply Style Worrmnal Times New Roman 3 12 pt i A J E 7 U A This is some sample content You can make the text bold a e or underlined with the push of ab also easily add hyperlinks e You can bean alne with bullets Finally you can change the text to a large SIze Notice that this page has the following elements e The second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text e The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it e The fourth sentence begins with a bullet e The last sentence has some very large 18 point text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 628 Creating a Simple Web Page Creating a Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button B to apply bold to the word Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button Z to apply italic to the word Double click the word underlined
521. re content for translation by a Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator translation translation agency Manual section Multi Language Support gt Using the Language Export Feature Search content in the Workarea Searching the Workarea on page 114 Content Dropdown Menu The View Contents of Folder screen features a context sensitive dropdown menu of options you can perform for a content item Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 35 Viewing a Folder 2 Privacy A a Edit Products F View Properties Where did you hear abou NMalata The options depend on several factors such as e your folder permissions e your position in the approval chain if any e the content s status e whether the item is a Microsoft Office document To see the dropdown menu options for any content item follow these steps 1 After signing in navigate to a Web page or the folder that contains the content 2 Hover the cursor over the content item It is surrounded by a blue rectangle and a triangle appears to the right of the title View Contents of Folder Root abstract d TF active directory d 3 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 and click Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 36 Viewing a Folder 4 Amenu of options available for that content item appears For example if you have permission to edit it Edit appears on the dropdown menu Dropdown Menu Options O
522. repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 660 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also e Finding Text on page 659 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 660 e Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 660 Finding Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 660 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 659 Finding and Replacing Text Finding and Replacing Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find 2 Inthe Replace With field type the text to replace the find text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 660 4 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NoTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button 3
523. ress tF organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content management With Ektron s browser based solutions busin B me a a a te r eee alala oe ooa eee ny eee a a See a See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Each toolbar button is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 803 Appendix A Content Statuses paon time m B Approve Approve and publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the chain has this option See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 91 Decline Refuse to publish the submitted content and change its status to checked in Note Only members of the approval chain have this option This button rejects the changes and keeps the current version live on Web site The approver is prompted to enter a reason for the decline After the decline option is completed e The author who made the change is notified by email e The content is removed from the Approval Chain If an author updated content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option Approvers are prompted to publish or decline content changes as well as requests to delete content Check out the content and edit it Only the user who submitted the content has this option Note If you edit the content you need to resubmit it to the approval chain View View in View all information about co
524. riterion For example if the validation criterion is Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit the error message could be Please enter at 8 or more characters with at least one digit By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks 7 appear instead of the characters Inserting a Text Area Field Use a text area field when you want the site visitor to enter an unformatted free text response A text area field is similar to a Text Field except it scrolls vertically to accept more text To insert a text area field follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 182 Working with HTML Forms 1 Place a text area field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 168 2 The following dialog appears Textarea Descriptive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text Default value Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Textarea Dialog a a Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 197 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 183 Working with HTML Forms SS F
525. rizontal Alignment on page 737 e Table Backgrounds on page 738 e Setting Table Borders on page 742 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Insert Table Size Bows 2 Columns 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 730 Manipulating Your Table s Format A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series j Rows m Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row in which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row If you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 731 Manipulating Your Table s Format 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears ort Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code I
526. rk with existing content or create a new content you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three sections e The top left frame shows the folder structure You can click any folder to display its content in the right frame while its subfolders appear below it e The right frame shows content in the currently selected folder Above is a set of menus that let you perform tasks on the content e The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 28 Working with Folders and Content Folders a New _ ey CMS400Dermo a H _ Date Modified Title ss Language ID Status 3 _Aotatingl mages fea le EE About Lis q E 39 A 2 28 2007 o 06e Careers About Us Index 276 A 4 4 2006 3 28 17 c Company Profile Business Practices 4 84 A 8 8 2006 5 55 50 Why Choose Ektron 4 E 64 A 8 8 2006 5 56 50 In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual e Viewing a Folder on page 30 e Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 60 e Deleting a Folder on page 40 e Viewing Content on page 40 e Expanding the Content Area on page 46 e Adding HTML Content on page
527. rking with Table Cells Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 741 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a background image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a i Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color if Unassigned Background Image Select Image E 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell e Ifthe cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 752 Working with Table Cells e lf the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible e Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell
528. rking with Tables NOTE To set the width of a column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell on page 558 Usually this change affects the other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width and height by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all table cells For details see Word Wrap on page 567 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and high and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help N 4 A a m S Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Shop If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved down Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 541 Working with Tables Netscape File Edt View Go Cormmunicator Help A a N Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape ao Setting Table Width or Height by Percentage To specify table width by percentage follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab In the Dimensi
529. rm the following e Add a task type to an existing task category e Create a new task category e Add anew task type e Add a task type description e Define task type availability NOTE As auser if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save i 6 Your new Task Category and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 295 Managing Tasks Task Type Availability Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Goto the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 288 Choose a Task Category and the Task Type to edit Click Edit next to the Task Type dropdown box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 296
530. rm with this dialog strikeout for example sample Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color if text wraps when it reaches the Text Attributes Wrap end of aline Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 715 Editing Images Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button T Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 716 Importing Scanned Images WeblmageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or digital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain Source and do a quick acquire from that source using Twain Acquire Limitations e You can only acquire one page ata time e Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software e Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button aie Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 716 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 716 Editing Images Undo Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the comman
531. rmal wt Wlainone w Please select content by navigating the folders below E Path CMS400Demo About Usi News PJ D J B Ektron Rated Positive B Ektron to Demonstrate Healthcare Fone Index NOTE You cannot select another type of item If needed you can delete this content item and add a different type of item in its place a Local intranet 7 Ifa Zone dropdown list appears in the Editor Zone you can use It to move the selected item to another zone Adding Content When you enter Add Content mode a new screen zone appears displaying content you can add to the page Your system administrator determines which content items appear To add content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator tells you how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost siteroot mypage aspx 2 Click Personalize to enter personalization mode The screen refreshes If you have add permission Add Content appears below the Personalization Manager see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 371 Personalizing a Web Page deliver indexed content via the vy Personalize Manager Reset To Default Done Personalization For Current User Public Users 4 An add content zone appears Your system administrator determines its location on the page Below is the add content zone on the sample page E
532. rmed function when performed from from Web Site Workarea View Published posts are viewable by Blog properties standard permission any site visitor View Only Add Not available Blog properties standard permission Add Edit Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Delete Approve Not available User must be member of blog s approval chain Add Three blog folder properties Blog properties standard permission control how comments can be Add submitted from Web site See Controlling Blog Comments on page 350 Edit Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Membership User Blog Permission Table Membership users can be given permission to edit and add blog posts in the blog Depending on the level of permissions they can perform any of these functions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 335 Blogs Permission Lets membership user Read Only Read blog posts This box must be checked before you can add Edit and Add permissions Purge History Purge History works the same way for blogs as it does for the rest of the Ektron CMS400 NET See Also the Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Managing Content Folders gt Purge History Language Support Language Support for b
533. ron And your CMS400 NET client is server is 32 bit 32 bit The View Content Difference Screen on page 98 64 bit 32 bit The View Content Difference Feature on page 100 Note This procedure was the only one prior to 7 5 2 It downloads an ActiveX control to your computer 64 bit 64 bit The View Content Difference feature is not available The View Content Difference Screen NOTE Use this procedure if both your computer and the Ektron CMS400 NET server are 32 bit The View Content Difference screen highlights changes to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing the default tab Difference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 98 Comparing Versions of Content Difference ERP CE At ektron Medical _ we focus on assisting iconic a OED _ immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying ou EORR ETEN harmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a in patients Ives latest technologies in medical solution a Difference Both versions content that only appears in the version on the This Content tab is high lighted in yellow content that only appears in the currently published version is red unchanged content is black Last Currently published Published This Content The version you are comparing the currently published content against IMPORTANT If there is no difference between the versions you see Content is I
534. ron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 226 Using the Document Management System Software Installation You have asked to install the following item ekdragdrop xpi Unsigned from file C DOCUME 1 bbolt LOCALS 1 Te Malidous software can damage your computer or violate your privacy You rus t 13 Click Install Now 14 Close then reopen the Firefox browser 15 You can now drag and drop files into Ektron CMS400 NET Working with Microsoft Office Documents This section explains how to work with Microsoft Office documents through the following subtopics e MS Office Document Menu Options on page 228 e Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 228 e Importing Office Documents on page 230 How Imported Documents are Named on page 231 Adding Documents Using the DMS Document Option on page 232 Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 233 Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 235 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 227 Using the Document Management System Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder on page 238 e Editing an Office Document on page 244 e Deleting an Office Document on page 246 e Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document on page 247 e Saving an Office Document on page 249 e Saving an Office Document in html Format on page 249 MS Office
535. roval Editor Information The person who created or last edited the blog post Post Time and Date The date and time the blog post was created or last edited Status The status of the blog post For example if the blog post is checked in the status is I See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 98 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 345 Blogs From this screen you can perform all functions with a blog post that you can with content You can give it a Summary add metadata associate a task assign Web Alerts etc You must have Edit permission for the blog to perform these functions WARNING You can also add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Adding a Blog Post NOTE Tobe able to add a blog post you must have Add permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to add a blog post 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to the blog folder Click New gt HTML Post Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose New Post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 When the Add Content screen appears use the editor to create the blog post You create a blog post the same way you create content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 IMPORTANT If you are u
536. rs 6 When the page refreshes it opens to the newly added folder Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Photos Sometimes it becomes necessary to change the name of folder in the My Workspace gt gt Photos area To accomplish this follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 418 My Workspace 2 Click the folder s Edit button 421 This button is located to the left of the folder s title Photos Le subcategories 3 The Edit Folder box appears Name Test Folder 4 Change the name of the folder 5 Click the Save button Save When the page refreshes it opens to the folder with changed name Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Photos You can delete obsolete folders from My Workspace gt gt Photos To delete a folder follow these steps NOTE You can not delete the top level folder aloums CAUTION Deleting a folder permanently deletes all images as well as its subfolders 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 419 My Workspace 2 Click the folder s Edit button 421 This button is located to the left of the folder s title Photos A fest folder 0 3 The Edit Folder box appears Name Test Folder Click the Delete button Delete A dialog box appears asking you to confirm deleting the fold
537. rseescerasanetiesnenenanent 618 Viewing Form INfOrmatiOn c ccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeneeeseaeeees 618 ol Tate ie Wl gto er 618 Deleng a PONa 618 View Form TOOlDaT siseccipenceceacesesuncereeccesatecsanaetentecesimscernteneriase 618 Creating Polls and Surveys ccccccsssesseeeesesseseeeseeeeseeeseenenss 618 Introduction to eWebEditPro XM_L 626 Creating a Simple Web Page cccsssscseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 628 Creating a Sample Web Page scccsssseeessssseeseeeseesseeees 629 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 vii Toolbar ButtOnS ccccccecsscencessncecceceneecencseesceneeeessneseeness 632 Customizing Your Toolbar ccsscccsseessseeeeseeeesesenseees 645 Removing Or Adding Menus cccsssecseeseceeeseeseenseeeeseeseees 646 Removing or Adding Menu Items ccccseseeesseeeeeeeeeeeesees 647 Restoring Toolbars ivcessinsccnasesccsntucsnscnsaranqntevsssersteseiataneeoentremnees 650 Rearranging the Menus on a TooIbat cccsssccsssesseeeeenseesens 650 Creating a New Menu ccccsssseecsesseeeecesseeeeeesneeseenseessoeees 650 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar cccccssseeecessseeeeeeeseenees 652 Changing the Menu s Orientation cccssssecsssssseeeseeneeeeeeees 653 The Context Sensitive Menu sccssseeeeeseeseeeees 654 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 657 Copying from
538. rts content folders community features ia Library i Modules brary folders Settings iModules a Collections Settings 16 Menus a Users Calendar 3 User Groups 3 Import XLIFF Files 5 Roles s5 Site Analytics a Help 16 Business Rules 5 Ektron Explorer 16 Taxonomy s Configuration HH Community Management From the Smart Desktop you can also e Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 21 e Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 23 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 21 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Format Illustration A full button with an icon and text B Content An icon on the bottom of the left frame The full display is easier to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best Suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the display of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the display you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle
539. rule can specify that a site visitor s response to the Telephone field conforms to a standard format for example 7 or 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message informs the site visitor of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 178 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits an entire form not as soon as the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 172 Working with HTML Forms The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc Tip If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after the form is submitted and if the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example Check f you are over 65 D To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place a checkbox type field v onto the screen S
540. s Move the cursor to the first cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of the deleted cells shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 748 Working with Table Cells Before setting a Cell s Border Color NOTE A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table E Sets the color of the table bec Sets the thickness of the tab late tha ceacines saree thes lf you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 749 Working with Ta
541. s e vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line top vertical ne OCCUPYING r bottom The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this in the Alignment field The picture on the left margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it QF The picture on the right margin allowing E subsequent text to wrap around it ol The top of the picture with the top of the Text Top Top Qi text The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text middle The vertical center of the picture with the AbsMiddle vertical center of the text absmiddle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 682 Inserting Images To align Click this in the Alignment field The bottom of the picture with the Bottom Baseline baseline of the text This is the default alignment The bottom of the picture with the bottom AbsBottom of the text absbottorm Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width height border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button Layout width 20 Height 20 Border Thickness fo Alignment Hot set bi L r f Note that you cannot selectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing
542. s on page 197 Viewing Form Information See Viewing Form Information on page 204 Editing a Form See Editing a Form on page 210 Deleting a Form See Deleting a Form on page 212 View Form Toolbar See View Form Toolbar on page 212 Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies WARNING For complete understanding of forms polls and surveys you should read the entire chapter Working with HTML Forms on page 574 e A pollis generally one question and appears on a site fora very short time an hour or a day e A survey is usually multiple questions and appears on your site for a longer time than a poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 618 Working with HTML Forms NOTE For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 With polls and surveys you can show ongoing results to site visitors after they submit their answers The following sections provide information about creating a poll or survey beyond the normal form information e Working With Polls on page 619 e Creating a Survey on page 624 e Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 582 e Viewing Form Information on page 618 For information on how to display a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction
543. s http www example com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address bar The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 772 Using Hyperlinks 1 Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed 3 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink lf you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Bs Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink lf you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra Space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 773 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup
544. s Lah Poche Poe ad FF SALES Pot fe Patel be e d Pot a pot To pect le Poet le Pot ee Pet be Peele Peete ite pemiee Fe poets Pomel Patel in poe gas i _ 1 b B eo ca feb Normal BZA Ve t fi 5 Enter the necessary information according to the following table Description Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to find it Description You can enter a full text description to help other users identify this file The Description appears on the View File screen It also accompanies the file on the Search Results screen if the user selects Mixed when viewing results See Also Displaying Search Results on page 139 After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 142 Library Folder Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 Click the file you want to preview 3 The View File screen appears View Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title Ektron Partners and Customers Filename CMS400Example uploadedFiles ektron_partners_customers ppt Library ID 41 Parent Folder 9 Co
545. s See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New gt HTML Form Survey 4 The New Form screen appears New Form Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Ei Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 624 Working with HTML Forms 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Click the Next button Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the survey Click the Next button This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 579 e Redirect to a file
546. s are also hidden Display differences between a Comparing Versions of previous and the currently published Content on page 98 version of content View History Open View History screen where you Viewing and Restoring can view previous versions of content Previous Content on page 108 Workarea Open Workarea From here you can The Workarea and Smart perform all Ektron CMS400 NET Desktop on page 15 tasks Hiding and Showing the Content Border IMPORTANT TECHNICAL NOTE When changing the border to hidden the Add and Edit buttons for menus are also hidden This displays the page as it appears when you are not logged in For information on menus see Working with Menus on page 444 You can hide the border that may surround content when you are logged into Ektron CMS400 NET This lets you view the page as it appears when not logged in When the border is hidden and you hover over a content area there is no indication that it is CMS400 content However you can still right click to access the menu Information about whether a border is hidden is stored in a cookie on a user s system This preserves the information between sessions Hiding the Border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 To hide the content border right click a content block while logged in Next select Hide Borders The page refreshes and no border appears This image shows the content with a border and menu Introduc
547. s see Moderate Comments on page 351 To approve a comment follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to approve Unapproved comments are indicated by a red flag 3 Click approve 4 The comment s status changes to approved Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer Ektron CMS400 NET authors and membership users can use Windows Live Writer to add and edit blog posts to your site If users have the proper permissions they upload images and attach files from their system See Also Permissions and Approvals on page 334 For additional Windows Live Writer help from Microsoft click here Follow these steps to set up Windows Live Writer to work with your Ektron CMS400 NET Blog If you have previously set up Windows Live Writer click Weblog gt Edit Weblog Settings Then skip to step four Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 358 Blogs Step Windows Live Writer Setup Screen Download and Start Windows Live Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta Writer When the Welcome ae Welcome window appears oe click the Next button Do not Welcome to the world of blogging create a Windows Live Spaces account Windows Live Writer is a tool that makes blogging a breeze It works like a familiar desktop word processor making it easy to post text and other content on the web Whether y
548. s ELELEE al ADANE j aeien etn BA AIL Ee ST sor bet FAR p R ve ERA k E a Taaa pe Oe Aa ar F i FE ur TEAT a a rii i e ia a eet ee ey AA Poke Ob hey pee AE ke A AN A Oks T AAE W g B oe AN An We a i i w Vi PA eS PS AR TPT A ENP OT PARR NN OP PLT TP AT A S RC Edit Content in Folder Root Mo oe i ve eh Lo elon LI i English U S Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Catec BB 45286868484 o gt PERET E Appl Style Normal BIU xA E a sees e TH lt i BPR om Ao e HEC D 9 Create the content NOTE Refer to Adding HTML Content on page 48 for additional information about creating new content 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12 Check off the content you created and other content Lt Float RELI IC J Syndication W Contact Ektron 1 l Login Information 2 in New Content Block i 13 Click the Add button SP to add the content to the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 437 Working with Collections Editing Content in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove links to and from it Adding Content to
549. s a global leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global communities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for unde aac Itisa J temm Aih view History 2f the mployees LATEST NEWS Fl d Positive d E E Innovator in Wet c Add News ament software tE Properties 24 amonstrate 4 H 3 Workarea z ar a Logout tent Indexing Add Task Framework wuch enables Properties hospitals medical groups and workarea fa Logout Hide Borders Menu indicated by Menu indicated by gray colored border circle in top left corner You can perform Ektron CMS400 NET tasks from the control menus The options can vary depending on what is on that area of the page and your permissions For example one area might have a content item and another a list of related content items Your system administrator controls the design of each page The advantage of this feature is that you can see how Web page will appear to site visitors Continue editing until you are satisfied with the content See Also e Control Menu Options on page 3 e Hiding and Showing the Content Border on page 5 e Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 explains the meaning of the border s color Control Menu Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 3 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET The following table describes the menu options that may appea
550. s current topic Accessing Online Manuals To access the help folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 484 Online Help Access the Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click Help i A X gt Settings SHED User Profile Be Help 4 The help screen appears in the right frame Ektron CMS400 Help Dev er Manual Quick Start Manual Administrator Manual User Manual Setup Manual 5 Click any link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the help page on Ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 485 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors Ektron CMS400 NET has two choices for a main content editor depending on your computer s operating system Operating Possible editors System Windows e eWebEditPro XML e eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 does not require installation of an ActiveX control to each client computer But even if you choose eWebEdit400 if a user begins to create or edit an XML Smart Form configuration the client computer installs eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET requires that editor to create XML Smart Forms TECHNICAL NOTES Each editor s toolbar is illustrated below eWebEdit400 Toolbar Content Summary a i a2 glop a eee i BeBe Ss aw design _mod Normal it SE Ektron CMS4
551. s has no impact on your ability to use Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 243 Using the Document Management System Editing an Office Document There are two ways to edit an Office document if you are using the Internet Explorer browser and Office is installed on your computer e Edit in Microsoft Office on page 244 e Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder on page 245 NOTE Firefox users can check an Office document out to their computer edit it using Office then drag and drop the asset back into CMS400 NET Edit in Microsoft Office Prerequisites e Your computer has MS Office e The Internet Explorer browser You cannot use Firefox To use this option click the document from the Ektron CMS400 NET folder and select Edit in Microsoft Office from the dropdown menu BPG CMS Personnel Ba View in Microsoft Office Hi a View Properties my pave As rt Edit Properties Check Out and Save As Submit Delete The document opens within Office Make your changes and save it When you do the revised version is saved to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 244 Using the Document Management System NOTE If you want to edit the document s Summary Metadata Schedule Comment Task or Taxonomy category information click the asset from the Ektron CMS400 NET folder then select Edit Properties from the dropdown menu When you begin to edi
552. s in the Workarea This list contains the following information i Avatar An image representing the user Display Name The user s display name as it appears in blogs forums posts and message board comments The user s first name The user s last name Inviting Non Site Users to Become Colleagues and Join the Site IMPORTANT The default From email address used to send all invitations is invitation example com Ektron Inc strongly recommends that your site administrator change this address for use with your site See Also The Setup Manual section Managing the web config File gt Settings in the web config File gt ek_InvitationFromEmail You can invite people who are not part of CMS400 community to become your colleagues and members of the site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 402 My Workspace Invite New Colleagues a Recipient email addresses Optional message Hello I am sending you this email because I would like you to join m at this website Send Invitations To invite a non site user to become your colleague follow these steps 1 2 oe E ie In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues Click on the Colleagues link Click the Invite button 6 The Invite New Colleagues screen appears In the Recipient email addresses box enter emails for the people you wish to invite Separate addresses using either commas spaces semicolons or new li
553. scribe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button e Save and check in content This button does not submit the Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mj Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 171 Working with HTML Forms Close the editor without saving changes Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eo The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 194 Form Validation You can apply validation rules while creating or editing the following field types e text e password e textarea e calendar Validation rules ensure that the form information entered by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation
554. scription search Filename search Only search items last edited by myself The fields are described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 137 Library Folder Field Description Enter Keyword s Specify one or more keywords that the search will use The search looks for keywords in the file s title The title is assigned by the user when the file is added to the library If a file s title matches the keywords the file appears on the search results screen The search also uses keywords to search through the file s e internal name for example airplane gif if the Filename Search checkbox is checked e description if the Description search checkbox is checked A keyword can be a complete or partial word But you can only enter a partial term for one word For example you can enter Adv and have the search return the content titled Adverse Drug Reactions But if you enter Adv Drug the search returns nothing You can enter several complete search terms but they must be in the correct sequence For example to find the topic titled Adverse Drug Reactions you can enter Adverse Reactions but cannot enter Reactions Adverse To find all files in a selected library folder enter nothing in this field Or to find all files in a selected library folder of a type for example images select the type and enter nothing in this field Description Search If you check this box the search considers the l
555. seeeseeseseeseeeneees 109 Restoring a Previous VersiON c ssccessesssseesessseeneeeeseeeeseeenaes 111 Comparing Historical Versions ccccsssssesssssseeseesseeseeees 112 Removing Applied XSLT ccccccssseesssseesensseeesseseeaneseenseeees 112 Searching the Workarea cccssescssessssesenseeenseneneenes 114 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen 114 The Search Published Tab ccccsssseeeeessseeeeeesseeseenseees 115 The Advanced Search Tab ssseccesseeseeseesennsesensenseneeees 119 Result Display Options sasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 127 Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen 128 Content Workflow Report ccssecessesseseeenseseneeees 130 Library Folder cccccssccsssessseseeseeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeee LOT Terms Used in this Chapter c cccsssseeescssseeecesnseeseeeseees 131 Accessing The Library asssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 132 Library Folder Properties cccccsssssecssesseesssesseeseesseesenseesees 134 Searching the Library winisnivesiesieateniaensinacavaspiinensinndercentmienins 136 l o a ENEE E E A E E E E E E A A 140 aeae UN E E se cece pt ecamncoimeenaneeencsneuetentencaenseacaeasees 150 NAS sess E E E E A A E E T 151 Quicklinks and FOrmS ssssicassinisisstcivocsntecessstistedeissiainedunttsacenenens 153 Working with HTML Form
556. selected content to the collection Navigating between subfolders deselects content 9 Click the Add button FP See Also Creating a Collection on page 430 Working with Collections on page 424 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 435 Working with Collections Creating New Content for a Collection You can create new content while adding content links to a collection To add content follow these steps 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 428 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support select the language of the collection Click the Add button qj The Add Items to Collection screen appears If your collection includes subfolders and you want to add the content to one of them navigate to that subfolder Otherwise proceed to the next step Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support the content s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the collection s language and cannot be changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 436 Working with Collections ctron rh etna r G a 4 pi Z e Betta A EEA EET Een en
557. sequent text to ved IT budgets smaller teams wrap around it new Inteet and intranet The top of the picture with the first line of text and compressed schedules to roll out new in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 514 Working with Images To align Click this Alignment option The vertical center of the picture with the first line of text J Faced with the challenge of re and compressed schedules to roll out new im The bottom of the picture with the first line of text Faced with the challenge of rech and compressed schedules to roll out new inte Adding Space around the Picture On the Image Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Mave DIU PILL EP VU Vertical Spacing Vil AH lon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 515 Working with Images The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS BS This image has 20 pels of vertical space no horizontal space This mage has 20 pzels of horizontal space no vertical space BS ES This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 prels of horizontal space Deleting an Image from Content lf you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the pic
558. ser to select a Smart Form when creating a new post It is only an option The Blog Roll The blog roll lets you add a list of Web site links to your blog page Think of this as a roll call of blog pages a list of blogs related to you or that you want visitors of your blog to also visit Below is an example of a blog roll on a Web page Pige THE Gikhf iar SF cuki ied a bel bare eer nothing Adding a Blog Roll Link Follow these steps to add a blog roll link NOTE To add a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 327 Blogs right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 On the Blog Roll tab click Add New Roll Link Add a Blog to folder Blog 5 The Add Blog Roll Link form appears Add a Blog to folder Blog Properties Subjects Blog Roll _ Remove Roll Link SS Description Relationship O Ed dd New Roll Link Remove Last Roll Link 6 Fill out the form according to the table below Feld Description Describes the link in the blog roll URL The URL of the blog you are adding to the blog roll It must begin with http Short Description Add a short description of the site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 328 Blogs SSS Relationshi
559. sert lt gt Library a Folder a a gh M RE a ia tical i caidas aN a la acl a 0 Calendar 4 CenturyMedicalServi Title c a LBATUPYVMIEGICAISErvIces eae EL a EN ET oS SLL eI Sees AHIM uploadediImages faim 21 git i H O Contacts MIM EMA 0 Dynamic Content In Co trina 5 FAO ee a5 Form Example CMS400 Logo uploadedimages cms400 50 qit 1 44 gt IntranetBasic akon od VE a PORTEE CMS400 net Press Releases collection error gif 1 6ED6 4506 BA41 OEECEO2DAFEA gif 6 Ai Purchase Orders explorerl GIF C E364 498C 9044 C6O00DE366BF6 GIF 6 replication Luplnadedimages replication gif G 6 From the file types dropdown list select the kind of file you want to insert 7 All library files of that type in the selected folder appear on the screen 8 Click the file you want to insert NoTE You can preview the file by clicking the preview button La 9 Click the insert button i to insert the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 149 10 Library Folder A hyperlink to the file appears in your content amp 2 nbsp TH Functuation rules You can click the link to open the file Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content Use this procedure to insert an image into content that has not yet been copied to the library This procedure inserts the item into the library then into the content 1 a N Se Invoke the editor by adding or
560. set cell alignment follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties The Cell Properties dialog appears oe a hy Ss Click the down arrow to the right of Content Alignment f Cell Properties 6 Click your alignment choice 7 Click Update Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split Cs Row after split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 565 Working with Table Cells Ca To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Split Cell from the menu Insert Row Above Insert Row Below Delete Row ta Insert Column to the Left ah YW Delete Column Insert Column to the Right fa Merge Cells Horizontally Merge Cells Vertically Fel Malata roll 4 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width or height equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cell After Merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 566 Working with Table Cells The above example shows a horizontal merge You can also merge cells vertically
561. sing subjects or tags they can be assigned to a blog post by clicking the Summary tab and choosing a subject For more information on subjects see Blog Subjects on page 322 For more information on Tags see Tags on the Summary Page on page 347 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 346 Blogs Categories Description BE amp 2BE 48 4 Oa YY amp af 11 art md Feb Apply Style Normal gt TimesNewRoma A C Music Sports a nbsp TM k EJ III Thal gi u gi Ii I Hl enter multiple tags comma delimited 3 Ifthe user creating the post is a member of the blog s approval chain it is published immediately If not it is surrounded by a yellow border and a member of the approval chain must approve it before it can appear on the Web site For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual section Setting Approval Chains World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Last Edited by bobuser bobuser on 6 2 2006 1 33 05 PM Status 5 No Comments 4 Once the post is published it appears within the blog on the Web site Tags on the Summary Page You can add tags to a blog post to further define information about the post for blog search engines For example you create a blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 347 Blogs post about your favorite band Ektronica and enter the following tags Mus
562. sion 7 5 756 Working with Table Cells Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a a YS The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout width alls i Not Specified i Percent i Word Wrap i Pixels on 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices e top e middle e bottom e along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 681 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 757 Working with Table Cells This example illustrates the choices Top Bottom Baseline To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu g S ee a The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 758 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Spar Rows Spanned Columns S panned 50 Layout width C Not Specified f Per
563. spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 568 Working with Table Cells e entire Assigning Cell Padding and Spacing To assign cell padding and spacing to your table follow these steps Place the cursor in the table Right click the mouse Click Set Table Properties The Table Properties dialog appears Click the Table Properties tab In the Cell Padding and Cell Spacing fields enter the number of pixels oa Se ly F Table Design 7 E Table Properties Dimensions E Width Oo px 7 Click Update Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 569 Working with Table Cells Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Narrative software uses the information from the Accessibility table fields heading rows columns caption alignment and summary to produce a Tooltip message for each table cell Users with impaired vision can see those Tooltips as they hover over the cells Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 571 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 571 Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 571 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 571 Horizontal Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog Alignment page 571 Vertical Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog o
564. st Name F o 2 JE John Edit 3 Click the Update Selected Colleagues button a View Pending Colleagues Pending Colleagues are users that have sent you a colleague request which you haven t accepted yet To view pending colleagues in the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues From this area you can accept and decline colleague requests See Accepting a Pending Colleague Request on page 410 and Declining a Pending Colleagues Request on page 411 Accepting a Pending Colleague Request Accepting a colleagues request adds the user to your colleagues list This allows you to access additional information on their profile page To accept a pending colleague request follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 410 My Workspace 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to each colleague whose request you want to accept 3 Click the Approve New Colleague button ww The page refreshes and the users are removed from the Pending Colleagues list and added to the Colleagues list See Also Viewing the Existing Colleagues List on page 402 Declining a Pending Colleagues Request Declining a colleague request allows you cancel another users colleague request Once you decline the request it is removed from your Pending Colleagues list and the requester s Sent Colleagues Request list See
565. st application then import it into DM Importing Managed Files WARNING You cannot import files whose name includes a percentage sign or ampersand amp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 255 Using the Document Management System You import managed files into Ektron CMS400 NET using the same methods you use to import MS Office documents See Importing Office Documents on page 230 If you do not see a file you uploaded verify that the View Menu box is displaying the type of file you are looking for Files upload to the correct type regardless of what is selected when you drag and drop them Editing a Managed File You do not edit a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead you check it out save it on your computer edit it using the host application then check it back in to Ektron CMS400 NET While it is checked out only you or a system administrator can edit the managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE Alternatively you can edit within a mapped network folder See Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder on page 245 Follow these steps to edit a managed file From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the managed file s folder Select the managed file you want to edit aw YS Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the file and click 5 Click Check out and Save As from the dropdown menu w BPG CMS Personnel bd 4 view in Microsoft Offic
566. st to arrange the choices vertically a art emusic f sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally el le at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box If more than four choices are available the user scrolls to see additional options Select day s when you are available Tyesday Wednesday Click Drop List to display all choices in a dropdown list When the user clicks the down arrow all entries appear Interests Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 608 Working with HTML Forms SS Item List This section of the screen displays the list items It is only editable if the list type is Custom The Context Sensitive Menu Buttons to the left of each item circled below display a menu The menu lets you remove items rearrange them and insert additional items anywhere on the list d Item List Selected J Sr Insert Below Duplicate y Move Down Remove The Selected Box Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected If the Appearance is set to Drop Down list this value is ignored Display Text Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Value Enter the value that is collected when the si
567. stablish procedures that avoid such problems Saving an Office Document as a Web Page When saving a Word document after you choose Save as from Word s File menu there are two choices for saving as html NOTE When saving an Excel document Save as Web Page htm html is the only option e save as Web Page e save as Web Page Filtered Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 250 Using the Document Management System ee Word Document doc w Cance Word Document doc NOTE For a description of the differences between these options see htip office microsoft com en us help HP030852781033 aspx Ektron recommends save as Web Page Filtered because the resulting HTML is almost identical to the original document The save as Web Page is not a good option because its HI ML content does not match the original document and may cause problems when being edited Handling Images Embedded within a Word Document If you save an Office document that includes images they appear when anyone is editing the document as well as when it appears on your Web site In addition the images are saved to the corresponding Ektron CMS400 NET Library folder In this way other Ektron CMS400 NET users can apply the images to HTML content as needed See Also Library Folder on page 131 Saving an Office Document as html from Ektron CMS400 NET This procedure assumes the Office document has been saved to Ektron CMS400 NET
568. stom_blogs css Leave this field blank to inherit the default style sheet blogs css located in Workarea csslib You can customize the default style sheet but your modifications will get overwritten when you upgrade Ektron CMS400 NET Page Lets you specify one or more templates for content in this folder For more Templates information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Metadata There is no difference when working with Metadata for blogs or folders For more information see Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 321 Blogs Blog Subjects Subjects make it easier for site visitors scanning a blog page find posts that interest them Here s how they work 1 The creator of a blog post assigns one or more subjects to it 2 When the post is published a list of subjects assigned to all posts appears in the right column 3 A site visitor clicks any subject and see all posts relating to it For example a blog s subjects are Music Sports and Art A user creates a new blog post about his favorite band Ektronica and assigns the music subject to the post When a site visitor views the blog page he looks under Subjects and clicks Music A list of music related posts appears including the post about Ektronica Music Subject And I write it everyday I know it isn t black a
569. t on page 48 To learn more about Menu permissions see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Web Site Navigation Aids gt Menu Feature This chapter describes the following aspects of managing menus e what they are e how they can be used e how to the add edit view and delete them What s In This Chapter The following topics explain Menus e The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 446 e Access to the Menus Feature on page 446 e Adding a New Menu on page 448 e Adding a Menu Item on page 453 e Editing a Menu on page 462 e Editing a Menu Item on page 464 e Viewing a Menu on page 467 e Reordering Menu Items on page 470 e Deleting a Menu on page 471 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 472 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 473 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual sections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 445 Working with Menus e Menu Feature gt Permission to Use the Menus Feature e Menu Feature gt Implementation of the Menus Feature The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure e menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder A menu identifies a page template used to display menu options that are content e menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content of a
570. t has a drop down menu of actions that can be performed on it 2 Privacy Products 3 Where did you hear abo The options change according to several criteria such as the content type status and your permissions for its folder See Also Content Dropdown Menu on page 35 New for 7 5 1 After signing into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site or the Workarea many server controls have a menu of actions that can be performed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 i What s New in the 7 5 Release E B Jh ektron com Sales 555 1234 004 gL Add HTML Content 4 BE Properties 2ktron com Engineering 555 1234 007 ey Workarea i 4 B ektron com Marketing 555 1234 006 ra Logout d Milton Waddams milton waddams ektron com Marketing 555 1234 003 Peter Gibbons Peter Gibbons peter gibbons ektron com Engineering 555 1234 001 Samir Nagheenanajar d To display the menu click the small gray circle in the upper left corner 2 E Jh j 2 Add HTML Content BE Properties aki 8 workarea R ek e The Community Platform in Ektron CMS400 NET is a group of features that allow users to network socially on the site Access to the community platform is available from the Web site or the Workarea As a User you can access the your Community information from the Workarea via the My Workspace folder tab See My Workspace on page 377 e New for 7 5 2 The eWebEdit400 editor an alternative to eWebEditPro XML is avail
571. t the text wraps around the image For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 514 Image Src The path to the image If you want to change the image click the ellipsis l button to open the library From there select a replacement image Horizontal Spacing The amount of horizontal and vertical space around the picture See Vertical Spacing Also Adding Space around the Picture on page 515 Width The width of the picture in pixels See Also Pixels on page 512 Height The height of the picture in pixels See Also Pixels on page 512 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 511 Working with Images SS Constrain The constrain feature lets you determine if an image s height and width can be adjusted independently Typically you want Constrain on as shown below Wid Height In this state if one dimension is adjusted the other is automatically adjusted in proportion to it For example if you change the height from 100 to 200 the width is also doubled To turn Constrain off click it When you do it looks like this Width Height When Constrain is off the adjusted picture can be disproportionate as shown below AKIN MAYE WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the scree
572. t Folder In a content folder allows you to create a subfolder to further organize your content See Also Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 60 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 60 Workarea Toolbar Buttons se Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file or add a hyperlink or Quicklink to use in content See Also Library Folder on page 131 Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on page 286 Approvals View approval chain for folder or content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Approve content that awaits your approval Approve All In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your approval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 69 Return to previous screen Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 261 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content you are working on See Also Approved Content on page 799 Collection Accesses the collection area for content lets you create edit and delete collections See Also Working with Collections on page 424 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 61 Work
573. t Internet Explorer provided by Ektron Inc L Library 4 Books Calendar 9 CenturyMedi 6 Contacts G Dynamic Con FAQ a G Form_Examp 9 IntranetBasi G Press_Relea 9 Purchase Or 8 Click the insert button 1 Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to display the results after a site visitors completes the form The results can display in the same window or a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Types on page 584 To show site visitors poll survey results follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Report on the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 582 Working with HTML Forms Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page uae ame Window EE Bar Chat 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window 4 Choose the style of the report Edit Content in Folder Content Title Breakroom Survey English l Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Repor
574. t Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 673 Inserting Images This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer or from the Web server to which your computer is connected Both choices are described below Insert Media Item Microsoft Internet Explorer To Select an Existing File File Information Mot Available Delete 2 Preview To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description for the file A JK Cancel Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 674 Inserting Images Insert Media Item Microsoft To Select an Existing File Delete Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dia
575. t complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer in disease We do this By applying our expertise in medical devices pharm biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives With t medical science we are able to provide solutions that make a difference lives lt p gt lt p gt lt a style BACEGROUND IMAGE url CMS400Developer workarea csslib ContentDesigqner selectedfield gif BZ href mailto webmaster ektron com subject Medical Technology gt Contact Us thaic Farr arr tri mer FS ovra rt co oan mews asn Odes i ese Tih o rmo samt anl o sane F lt UI 4 You can edit the HTML using functions like Cut Copy Paste and Delete To access these functions right click the mouse 5 To return to normal view click the Design button circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 530 Working with Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This chapter explains everything you need to about working with tables It explains e Creating a Table on page 531 e Deleting a Table on page 537 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 537 e Modifying Table Properties on page 535 e Working with Table Cells on page 556 e Section 508 Tables on page 570 Creating a Table When creating a table you need to specify a number of rows and
576. t onthe form Same Window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 583 Working with HTML Forms Chart Types The following table describes the types of charts available Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users 50 18 21 who responded to 204 22 25 each item 0 26 30 250 31 or over Age range 4 responses Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are Age range 4 responses displayed with a bar graph Use this chart type when you want a quick visual representation of the responses Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or Poll My favorite feature survey answers are My favorite feature in Ektron CMS400 NET color coded and the S percentage of p B Approval Process 11 people who chose i Hi Asset Management 11 oo EIBlogging Tools 11 Poll and Survey 56 i Multimedia 0 EiMembership 0 MSearch 0 Security 11 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 584 Working with HTML Forms Combined Combines the Data Table and the Bar Age range 4 responses Chart 18 21 50 B 22 25 25 M 26 30 o 31 or over 25 B IMPORTANT You cannot chart data entered into a text box For example if one choice in a poll is Other and the survey has a text box for site users to enter additional information the text in the box is not charted However the fact that a user chose Other is charted Creating a Form s Content
577. t the document its status changes to Checked Out 0 When you make your changes and save it is Approved See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Managing Tasks on page 286 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 eEktron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 931 Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder You can edit an Office document directly from a mapped network folder To do that follow these steps 1 Set up a mapped network folder as described in Setting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 239 2 Use Windows Explorer to open the folder NOTE If any Windows folder has more than 1500 files Windows Explorer may time out while trying to open it To remedy this problem divide your files in that folder into several child folders 3 Open a document using Office make changes and save it You can also delete and move documents using the mapped network folder The document is now in checked into Ektron CMS400 NET and can appear on your Web site when approved Also a history of every saved version is retained so you can restore previous ones if necessary You cannot enter or change Ektron CMS400 NET document information Summary Metadata etc in the mapped network folder someone must use Ektron CMS400 NET to do that Status of Document Saved to Mapped Network Folder Ektron C
578. t with Tlexitble and affordable authoring solutions lt T1t le gt Emeta Mahek Keywords content document management web content management Management cms gt Description cantent Ektron s web Content Management and Doc Management software products manage web content and documents with wysIwy XHTML HTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring and soalutians for web content management and document management gt On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the metadata definitions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 86 Approving Declining Content Approving Declining Content Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content items The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve new or edited content before it is published to the Web site If a user group is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may e change it e approve or decline it e publish it to the Internet it is published when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 87
579. ta Style Tab on page 604 Inserting or Editing Buttons on the Form A form typically includes one or more buttons which let a site visitor submit a completed form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 612 Working with HTML Forms Absence Report Form Names o Employee 1D Dept S Reason for Absence Floating Holiday Vacation Sick Day Date s of Absence None Until None Total Days Absent ity pay without pay Comments eWebEdit400 s form toolbar has three buttons that you can place on a form circled below The buttons are described below aR AG9 728 BH O la SS Cl Normal B 7 U A x Kx E h h gt t oaannaH Pw pRa HGS E 2 2 Toolbar Description Button Insert Submits form information to your Web server By default it has no text To learn how to add button text see Editing a Button s Properties on page 614 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 613 Working with HTML Forms Toolbar Description Button Reset Changes a form s field values back to their state when the form first loaded Submit Submits form information to your Web server Its default text is Submit Editing a Button s Properties After you insert a button you may want to enter or change its properties such as its text height and width To edit a button s properties follow these steps 1 Click the button so that it is selected A selected button is surroun
580. tails see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 456 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 458 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 458 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 459 Editing a Menu You can edit a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click View gt Menus 3 Click the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 462 Working with Menus 5 Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 6 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 7 Change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 8 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Cl
581. te forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and information To delete a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Form button i 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK View Form Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with forms To learn about toolbar buttons available when creating or editing a form see Inserting Form Fields on page 169 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 212 Working with HTML Forms Button or ban Description More Information Edit Content Edit the form s content which Editing a Form s contains the form fields Content on page 211 View Staged Click View Staged button to view Published Content content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site View History View and possibly restore older Accessing Content versions of a content block History on page 108 View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 98 Edit Form Properties Edit Form properties not available Viewing and Editing a via the Edit Content button Form s Properties on page 205 Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 212 Check Links Check for other content that contains a link to this form You would typically use this feature t
582. te paper a common file format is PDF that a visitor requested An example of a page is one that prompts the visitor to download your product e Redirect to form data to an action page See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 580 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 582 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 585 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 578 Working with HTML Forms Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges a site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the style sheet class insert library items etc Inserting Fields into the Postback Message You can also insert fields into the Postback Message that retrieve form information For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey When you click the Post back message tab and select Display a message the Merge Field button appears on the toolbar Title
583. te visitor selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here The Disabled Checkbox Check the box next to any selection that you want to disable If you do the option appears on the form but the user cannot select it Option Click this button to add a row to the bottom of the list Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Expiration Date Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 609 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click the Calendar field button T3 See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 587 3 The following dialog appears Calendar Field General Validation Data Style Descriptive Name Field Name Field1 Too Tip Text Default valve Thu Mar 06 2008 Respond to the fields on the screen See Also e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog General Tab on page 610 e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Validation Tab on page 611 e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Data Style Tab on page 612 Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog General Tab SS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 618
584. ted form data to an action page follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 3 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 580 Working with HTML Forms To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post back message tab 2 Select Redirect form data to an action page Edit Content in Folder Content bo b m D E mora sweta a a A we Tele setae es eee pana inka aera nai anai a be a pans wei a M ae anit Soe EE Tee wee ee en et Me al OE Oe et se ee wk a poral oi nm SIG Bas Sado Oe RNA ONAL REL REPL EN ee RRL Lae E ORNL AAs hea GAMA EL ARMOR REE sel nm ENE Title Breakroom Survey English U 5 Form Post back message Schedule Comment Web Alerts Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report on the form File or page 3 Click the icon next to File or page The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears Click the URL button 5 The library appears In the left panel select the folder that contains the hyperlink 6 Inthe right panel select Hyperlinks from the file type dropdown 7 Select the hyperlink whose name was given to you by your system administrator Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 581 Working with HTML Forms lt CMS400 Library For admin Microsof
585. tem you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 471 Working with Menus NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 468 Select the submenu Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete Deleting a Menu Item Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via e its content folder e its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 467 2 Move the cursor over the item NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Click Delete Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 467 Move the cursor over the item Click Delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 472 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or opt
586. tent sample this is a sample content block under the documents WH Server Control Review Below is a list of server controls waiting for review 4 From the drop down list select Copy Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 387 My Workspace Documents Workspace Documents 1 No subcategory exists jsample re o F View this is a sample content block under Manage Edit Edit Properties Delete 5 Navigate to the my Workspace gt Documents folder into which you want to copy the content 6 Click the Manage link NOTE The Manage link only appears after you copy a document but have not pasted it Documents Workspace Documents 3 Requirements 1 Manage 7 Click the Move Items i or Copy button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 388 My Workspace 8 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm the move or copy action 9 Click OK 10 The page refreshes and the moved or copied content appears in the folder Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents The Documents area of My Workspace allows you to add and edit content you want share with your colleagues You can share content with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the content private You apply sharing options to folders not to individual content To share a folder follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Cl
587. tes ee E He Colleagues ac Journal In the Workarea Messages links are located in two places The first a link in the left side panel of the Smart Desktop The second a link under the My Workspace folder button Messages are stored in two areas the Inbox and Sent Messages Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 391 My Workspace iMy Workspace H Documents ae Community Groups F JE Ei Messaging ae Favorites Inbox ae Colleagues 4 Journal SHE5 Message BP Br oe a eee eee Ape eed Peer eed Peed See Also e Messaging Inbox on page 392 e Messaging Sent Messages Box on page 393 Messaging Inbox In the Inbox you see a list of messages that have been sent to you You can see who the message is from the subject and the date the message was sent Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 392 My Workspace Si ibjec Date Content Project 10 10 2007 9 21 53 AM From the Inbox you can e view a message s details See Viewing a Message on page 393 e compose a new message See Compose a New Message in the Workarea on page 394 e delete a message See Delete a Message on page 396 Messaging Sent Messages Box Sent Messages provides a list messages you ve sent You can see to whom the message was sent the subject and date it was sent From the Sent Messages list you can e view a message s details See Viewing a Message on page 3
588. the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks WARNING This procedure is only necessary if Link Management is set to false in your web config file If if Link Management is set to true Ektron CMS400 NET automatically updates the template within the quicklink when content is moved See your system administrator for help with the web config file NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks When content is moved in Ektron CMS400 NET its quicklink does not get changed After it is moved you need to update the default template called in the contents quicklink To update the default template for one or more quicklinks follow these steps 1 Inthe library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box in the table header to select or deselect all 5 Inthe To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 154 Library Folder 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the specified template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 155 Working with HTML Forms IMPORTANT This section describes cr
589. the Collection For information about adding content links to a collection see Assigning Content to the Collection on page 434 Removing Content from the Collection To remove a content link from a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 428 3 Click the Remove button The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Check boxes next to links that you want to delete Select All Clear All Title ID UR HomePage Content 1 ct L Support Page B ct W Plastic Molder 123 13 fad RC Cheetah 5 A L RC Redstar 7 JQ M Contact Ektron 15 CI C New Content Block 17 G Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks 6 Click the Delete button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 438 Working with Collections Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content item is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 425 2 Access the View Collection Screen as d
590. the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears se ee 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learned how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 631 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below LY BE BGA Boa Se ARANGE KL Bi Apply Style Normal BZ UAA p5 nbp TM Ej ls EHC e The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables ikl I II ut gi u gi Ii i hli All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize your toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 645 This section explains e Selecting Text on page 632 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 633 e Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on
591. the post If someone has edit post permission and authenticates before submitting a comment it is approved automatically Appearance of Unapproved Comments On the Workarea s View Posts in Blog screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a red flag comments 3 On the View Comments for Post screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a yellow border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 351 Blogs Lc e Require Authentication Determines if a user must be authenticated that is logged in as a CMS400 user or membership user to add comments via the Web site Comments by default are fully controlled This means they are enabled must be approved and a site visitor must be authenticated to create them lf comments are enabled but not moderated any site visitor can add a comment If you don t want censorship this is the way to go WARNING While you can delete a comment at any time if comments are not moderated they appear on your site as soon as a site visitor submits them However to make sure comments on your site meet certain criteria moderate them The following topics are explained in this section e Comments on the Site on page 352 e Comments in the Workarea on page 354 Comments on the Site On the site comments for a blog post appear when one of the following blog post items is clicked e the Comments link e the Title of the blog post The comment page contains the or
592. ther words if you enter Bob in the Find field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc If you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box If you enter Bob in the Find field and place a check in the Match case box the search only stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find VASITA Find o Search Direction Entire text Up Selection only Down C Match whole words only Whole Word Match Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 501 Finding and Replacing Text By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text in the Find field click the Match whole words only box Find EE Find Search Entire text Selection only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 502 Checking Spelling NOTE This section describes the spell check software installed with eWebEdit400 If you use the FireFox browser it has its own spell check software To eliminate confusion between eWebEdit400 s and Firefox s spell checker Ektron suggests disabling Firefox s This is set on Firefox s Tools gt Options dialog gt General Tab gt Check my spelling as I type check box To begin spell checking click the spell check button When you do eWebEdit
593. there are several ways to do so e Removing Or Adding Menus on page 646 e Removing or Adding Menu Items on page 647 e Restoring Toolbars on page 650 e Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar on page 650 e Creating a New Menu on page 650 e Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar on page 652 e Changing the Menu s Orientation on page 653 Each procedure is explained below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 645 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option iv Edit eS View As ve Paragraph Format o Format ve Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize NOTE lf Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do not currently appear on the toolbar 4 To adda menu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from your t
594. tical If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment Caption Alignment e bottom e top After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps On gt 4 Select one or more cells Right click the mouse Select Table gt Cell Properties Access the Cell Properties dialog The Cell Properties dialog includes fields that let you adjust the Abbreviation and Category Attribute field values see illustration below NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility fields from the Cell Properties dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 791 Section 508 Compliance Cell Properties x an ee E OF Rows Spanned Cancel Columns Spanned Layout Borders M Use Default Color f Not Specified C Percent F Word Wrap Pixels Border Color Accessibility Abbreviation Horizontal Slignmert Vertical Alignment Categories Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog a e Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille
595. tion e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 626 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on it such as spell checking BB BEAGA oo Ye Aaea E Apply Style Normal BIFIUA A x amp Whiz an 1 nt yi IFI pI fij Ilh Hl nbsp M amp j H gt e To learn more about using eWebEditPro XML see these topics Creating a Simple Web Page on page 628 e Toolbar Buttons on page 632 e Customizing Your Toolbar on page 645 e The Context Sensitive Menu on page 654 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 657 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 627 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Finished Web Page When you finish this exe
596. tion to Ektron CMS400 NET Our Company Vision Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates ot marketplace To be the preferred global star Cy Edit ent Management Company Directory of Services wj Add Task Properties workarea Logout Hide Borders This image shows the same content without the border Our Company Vision Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that evreedc eynertations and differen marketplace H Edit To be the preferred gl Fi view History iab Content Manage Delete l add Task Company Directory of Ser Properties Workarea Logout Show Borders Showing the Border To show the border right click a content block while logged into Ektron CMS400 NET Next select Show Borders The page refreshes and the border appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Types of Content Every piece of content in Ektron CMS400 NET is one of the following types The table below summarizes all types Type HTML content XML Smart Forms HTML form survey DMS Documents which consist of Office documents managed files and multimedia files Office documents Managed files Multimedia Content designed to be published on the World Wide Web Online forms polls or surveys designed to collect information from site vis
597. tion when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for information about Ektron CMS400 NET templates Or you can disable the template and instead use Quicklinks to determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 153 If you specify a template all content in the collection uses the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use Quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content item in the collection Here is an example of links using Quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks content in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 432 Working with Collections the collection the screen information around the content changes according to its template Title ID 1 4 ee Home Page Content 1 fCMS400Demo index asp id 1 Support Page g CMS400Demo index asp id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 CMS400Demo hr asp id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS4000Demo products asp id 5 RC Redstar 7 CMS4000Demo products asp id 7 New Content Block 17 CMS4000Demo index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 fCMS4000emo index asp id 15 Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information Surrounding the
598. to adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page enter or edit the picture s title view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment Layout width fi 6 Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Mot set bi Reset You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field The width of the picture in pixels Width Add a border around the picture Border Thickness For more information see Setting a Border on page 680 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 679 Inserting Images To make this change Use this field Adjust the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 681 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that t
599. to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control Working With Polls Below is an example of a poll Note that when a site visitor hovers over the poll the question also appears as ToolTip text I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Ny coWorkdg Newsgroup Other Submit Form This subsection contains the following e Creating a New Poll in the Workarea on page 620 e Replacing a Poll from the Web Site on page 621 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 619 Working with HTML Forms e Editing a Poll from the Web Site on page 623 Creating a New Poll in the Workarea To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a poll in another language by copying an existing poll and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 818 NOTE For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 576 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 624 1 From the View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the poll Click New gt HTML Form Survey 3 The New Form screen appears New Form m om am m s oum m oo me oe s om an a o Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Des
600. to access this 2 If you have permission to change the page for unauthenticated users the Personalization For box appears Otherwise skip to Step 3 Personalize Personalization For Current User Public Users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 367 Personalizing a Web Page Use this box to decide if your page customization applies to just yourself Current User or all site visitors who do not sign in Public Users 3 Click Personalize 4 The page refreshes and you see its Web part zones e lf you have permission to move content you can do that now e If you have permission to edit content you can do that now e If you have permission to add content click Add Content The screen refreshes and a new area appears that lets you add content e You can delete any content item that you added See Deleting Content on page 373 e To suppress the display of a content item but leave it in its zone click its minimize button To restore the content item click the restore button e To remove a content item from its zone click the close button circled below MainRightZoane What are the symptoms eE A closed item is placed in the Page Catalog If your Web administrator places the Page Catalog on a personalization page you can later move the content from the Page Catalog to any zone See Also The Page Catalog on page 375 e Atany time you can restore the page to the original layo
601. to this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 593 Working with HTML Forms e cca Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears if a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value A site visitor can change the default value while completing the screen Allow multiple lines Check this box if you want this field to scroll vertically to allow the person completing the form to enter as much text as needed Note This setting cannot be applied if this is a Password field Cannot be changed Check this box to prevent the person completing this field from changing its content For example you want to display a license agreement Below this field you might place a check box prompting the site visitor to check it to indicate he has read the agreement As another example you could provide instructions for completing the screen Invisible Check to make this field hidden This option lets you store unseen information in each document An example might be putting a version number on the form If you apply this property to a form the Allow multiple lines and Cannot be changed fields are automatically checked and cannot be unchecked Also the Validati
602. topics e Overview of Form Processing on page 158 e The Structure of Form Data on page 158 e Creating a New Form on page 159 e Creating a Form s Content on page 166 e Form Validation on page 172 e Form Fields on page 173 e Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 194 e Assigning a Task to a Form on page 195 e Viewing Form Reports on page 197 e Exporting a Form s Raw Data on page 203 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 157 Working with HTML Forms e Viewing Form Information on page 204 e Editing a Form on page 210 e Mailto or Database Form on page 211 e Deleting a Form on page 212 e View Form Toolbar on page 212 e Creating Polls and Surveys on page 214 Overview of Form Processing Step Formore information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 159 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 194 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved to a database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 197 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data Forms reside within the root folder or one of its subfolders A form has the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and o
603. tor has granted you permission to delete tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK Viewing a Task s History Ektron CMS400 NET maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was linked to content when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task on page 300 Click the History button H The history of task events appears example below view Task History for review today Date 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 Initiator Activity Information jedit Creation jedit Other Task Assigned to All Authors jedit Content Linked Plastic Molder 12313 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 310 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to i Tasks on page 306 Add Task Access the Add Task
604. trator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Query Language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 115 Searching the Workarea e satisfies content type criterion if chosen see below These are described in Search Screen Options on page 116 Search Content Folder Search Published Advanced Search Basic Search Sie Jy _Searek Site HTML Documents Images Multimedia Forums Search Screen Options Search Screen Finds submitted text in these content types Option Content from all options listed below e HTML e Smart Form XML Note Finds field values but not field labels This has not changed since prior releases e HTML Form e Blog entries not comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 116 Searching the Workarea Search Screen Finds submitted text in these content types Option Documents e MS Office document includes Powerpoint Excel Note The search finds text within Visio documents if the Visio IFilter has been installed on the server See Installing the Visio IFilter in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual e PDF file e txtfile Images added as gif jpeg etc assets or through the library Multi Media Flash mps etc Forums Forum posts and topics NOTE The search cannot find calendar events Searching for Metadata e Searchable type metadata values are returned like regular content e ltcan take up to 30 minut
605. trator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content Pe en F h NOTE Your system administrator determines the appearance of the Metadata screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 80 Adding or Editing Metadata Summary Metadata Comment tithe current character count 0 2000 max keywords Not Included Included content management system Search Data wellness No Selection Required fields Image Data Image CMS400Developer Change Remove 4 Edit the metadata Note that e Required field labels are red and marked with an asterisk You must place at least one response in such fields before you can save the metadata e Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 81 Adding or Editing Metadata e Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content You can select terms from the list or enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the Add and Remove buttons e You may see alist of terms in one box and a field labeled Text to its right keywords document management aj Te o With such a list you can add a new term by typing it into th
606. tscottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship co worker sibling Remove Rall Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship friend colleaque 7 Adialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 333 Blogs Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Click OK if you want to remove the blog roll link NOTE Continue to remove subjects by clicking the Remove link 9 Click Save M Permissions and Approvals Permissions for blogs work like folder permissions The same functionality and features are available For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual sections Setting Permissions and Setting Approval Chains User Blog Permission Approval Table Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this function when performed function when performed from from Web Site Workarea View Published blogs are viewable by Blog properties standard permission any site visitor View Only Add Not available Blog properties advanced permission Add Folders Edit Not available Blog properties advanced permission Edit Folders Delete Not available Blog properties advanced permission Delete Folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 334 Blogs Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this function when perfo
607. tude The latitude used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Google maps provides a service that takes the address of user and returns its latitude and longitude Note You don t need to use Google s automatic retrieval of latitude and longitude Instead you can enter the values manually Longitude The longitude used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Google maps provides a service that takes the address of content and returns its latitude and longitude Note You don t need to use Google s automatic retrieval of latitude and longitude Instead you can enter the values manually Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 480 Updating Your User Profile Fd Powerit Forum Signature Adds a signature to your posts in the forum You do not see the signature in the editor It is added after you click the Post button a Posted Tuesday October 17 2006 3 58 PM 7 2006 This is a test reply to the Test Topic John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Select from a predefined list of Tags that describe yourself Or create a new tag by clicking the Click To Add A New Tag link Placing a check mark in the check box next to a tag activates it for your profile Disable Email Check this box if you do not want to receive notification email Notification Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the
608. ture 3 Click the Cut button 4 NOTE If you want to remove an image from content created from an XML Smart Form and eWebEdit400 is your editor click the image icon a open the Image Properties dialog and delete the image path circled below image AIQNMenM Image Src http ektsqa7a CMS400Developer uploadedin Hori7vontal Soacinee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 516 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word or phrase to another place in the same content block On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate the bookmark Bookmarks are particularly helpful if your page is very long For example if your Web page contains minutes from several meetings the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks it to jump using the bookmark to the correct minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 517 describes how to set up a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 768 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 771 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text a user clic
609. u items e content on your Web site e library asset e link to an external Web site e submenu You can edit a menu item via e its content folder e menus module Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 464 Working with Menus e navigation link on a Web page See Also Working with Menus on page 444 Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click View gt Menus Click the menu you want to edit 4 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items View Menu L Why Choose Ektron L Business Practices Company Profile D News L Staff List G Careers E Ektron Medical Blog E Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer 5 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit 6 Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 449 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 465 Working with Menus Editing a Menu Item via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a
610. u are prompted to enter a reason for the decline After you decline e The author who made the change is notified by email The content is removed from the Approval Chain If the author updated content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option You may be asked to decline both a content change and a request to delete content Submit content for deletion HTML HTML form or XML Smart Form con tent edit content within an Ektron CMS400 NET editor Asset First use Check out and Save As or Save As to save asset to your computer and edit it Then use Edit to replace version in Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Office document within Ektron CMS400 NET which launches Office Edit item s Ektron CMS400 NET information such as Summary Metadata Schedule and Taxonomy After you complete the edit screen you proceed to the View Content screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view history Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Approving Declining Content on page 87 Deleting a Single Content Item on page 57 Deleting an Office Docu ment on page 246 Deleting a Managed File on page 257 Editing HTML Content on page 52 Editing a Form on page 210 Editing a Managed File on page 256 Editing an Office Document on page 244 After
611. u select the Tags filter and the Display Name filter results must match the criteria in both to appear in the results box If a user or community group matches only one filter it does not appear in the results Here is a detailed example John is searching for another member named Jane who has tagged herself as a writer John decides to add Jane as colleague and searches for her by selecting the Tags filter and First Name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 406 My Workspace filter In the tags filter John enters Writer In the First Name filter John enters Jane When the search is complete Jane appears in the search results If Jane did not match the criteria in both filters she would not show up in the search results In addition to the criteria listed in a Basic Search you can perform an advanced search based on a taxonomy category If you do not see the Category filter in the drop down list ask your administrator if your site has a taxonomy for its users To use categories to find a user select Category from the Users filter and place a check mark in the appropriate User Categories check boxes Next click the search button Any users assigned to the categories appear User Categories Ea Users Category Select ME Occupation 169 Education Add Filter Groups Group Tags Add Filter arch Nothing to search for To search using the Advanced tab follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea
612. u via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu 2 Click View gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 467 Working with Menus 3 The View All Menus screen displays all menus in the folder View All Menus Root View In English U S Title ID Lang ID Date Modified Shout Ws 11 1033 6 9 2006 4 34 10 PM Conditions 7 1033 Of 2006 10 13 37 AM contact oa T a 6 1033 5 19 2006 4 54 17 PM Inside Ektron ee Medical 36 1033 3 24 2006 3 54 08 PM Products i 1033 3 6 2006 9 36 42 AM 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 The menu s options appear E Why Choose Ektron D Business Practices 9 Company Profile L News L staff List C Careers E Ektron Medical Blog D Forum L Site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 468 Working
613. uage Properties The content properties screen contains information about the content Content Title The title assigned to the content Content ID The ID number assigned to the content The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content s language Status The current status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 798 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 45 Viewing Content a Action on End Date What happens to the content when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page 69 Date Created When the content was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Smart Form Configuration The Smart Form applied to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Template The template currently assigned to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Content folde
614. ual Version 7 5 595 Working with HTML Forms SS Custom Validation See Custom Validation on page 599 Validation Options NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the No validation Cannot be blank Allow Maximum of 1000 characters Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Non negative whole number or blank Non negative whole number required Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation However the file that maintains custom validation is different for HTML forms it is siteroot workarea ContentDesigner ValidateSpace xml Used with calendar field Used with text field Characteristics of Valid Response Response is not checked Response is required The format of the response is not checked Response cannot exceed 1000 characters Only available if text field is set to Allow Multiple lines Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit Only available if text field is set to Password field A positive whole number or no response A positive whole number must be entered Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 596 Decimal number or blank Decimal number required Percent 0 100 required email address email address required email address list email address list required Zip code US Zip code US required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version
615. ual Version 7 5 65 Scheduling Content to Begin and End setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing existing content 2 If adding new content enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab Edit Content in Folder Root oy ba eel x a Title Sample Content Block English U 5 1 Content Metadata Schedule Comment Web Alerts Templates BB 2 8 4804 502 Fe ARANA A7 h Li mhia Z koll Klee Th F TT A 4 N w 5 A calendar pops up 6 Select the date and time when this version of the content will become visible on the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 66 Scheduling Content to Begin and End http localhost cMs4oo fa Bf 2 Nov December 2005 Jan gt gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat B 45 PM w eeeseresern E zz 5a ss ms a Done Cancel 7 Click the Done button 8 The date and time appear in the Start Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After I Set a Start Date After you save the content it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Als
616. uling Content to Begin and End on page 65 10 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would HTML content See Also Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option To add Office documents to Ektron CMS400 NET via the New gt Multiple DMS Documents menu option follow these steps NOTE This option is only available if you are using Internet Explorer and Office is installed on your computer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 233 Using the Document Management System TIP If you will apply the same information Summary Metadata Categories etc to several files place those files in the same Windows folder before starting this procedure 1 From the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the Ektron CMS400 NET folder in which you want to place the documents See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create a document for a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click New gt Multiple DMS Documents 5 The Edit Content in Folder screen appears The lower portion of the screen resembles Windows Explorer Edit Content in Folder Root Doi Wa tel Oxx MEME en eens ene NEE een ne EN EEN a eee ENTE Title Set to filename of uploaded file by default English U S Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable
617. us makes it ineligible for deleting 6 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer o A xX This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request 7 Are you sure vou wish to submit this content block to the approvers For deletion if This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue 7 Click OK to delete the document Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 87 Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document If you check out and save an Office document to your computer you would typically edit it using Office While it is checked out only you or a system administrator can check it back in Other users cannot edit it You may use this feature to work on the document on your computer copy it to another computer or even email it to someone who does not have access to Ektron CMS400 NET You can also use the Check Out and Save As option to edit an Office document if you use the Firefox browser Firefox does not let you edit Office documents within Ektron CMS400 NET as you can with Internet Explorer To work around this limitation check out the Office document save it to your computer and edit it When all edits have been entered
618. user is a member of the Administrator group and content is checked out Allows the admin to check in content even though he is not the one who checked it out Request Check In Allows any user to send an email to the user who checked out content The email asks the check out user to check in the content Save as Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 249 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 802 Appendix A Content Statuses ae Description For more information see Edit or Edit in Office Check out content to change it e Editing HTML Content on Only available to user who page 52 checked content out e 6 Editing a Managed File on page 256 e Editing an Office Docu ment on page 244 Edit Properties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user submitted the content into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Products Support Rms S 2 Content management systems from Eki Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordabl full featured content management systems add
619. ust select a page 716 source using the Twain Source command Allows the user to select a source for Twain Source on acquiring an image such as a page 716 scanner or digital camera Twain Source Exit Save changes and return to Exit on page 701 eWebEditPro XML Exit without save Ignore changes return to Exit without Save on eWebEditPro XML page 02 Edit Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 699 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 690 Toolbar Command Brief Description Button paste as new Inserts copied image or area into a image new file Editing Images For more information see Paste as New Image on page 707 Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 717 mu redo Reapplies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo select Selects an area of an image You can then perform actions on the area such as blur and delete t crop Removes everything outside of selected area of an image Redo on page 710 Select on page 713 Crop on page 699 Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 700 View Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description Button reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size For more information see Reset Zoom Ratio on page 10 Ca zoom in Increases an image s magni
620. ut and content using Reset To Default Moving Content You can move content to an empty zone or one with content If you do the latter the new content appears at the top of the zone and existing content in the zone is pushed down To move content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will tell you how to find it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 368 Personalizing a Web Page In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost siteroot mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode 3 Move the cursor to the left of a content item s personalization menu illustrated below MainRightZone Ektron Rated Positive Ektron Inc an innovator in Web 4 The cursor changes to a four headed arrow 5 Drag the content to a different Web part zone Editing Content Editing allows you to do the following to a content item e replace it with another item of the same type e move it to a different Web part zone e change its width and height Editing does not allow you to change the content of any item To edit content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will tell you how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page IS http localhost siteroot mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode The screen refreshes
621. utical Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 504 1 words are indicated with a red wave underscore make a meaningful difference in patents lives With the medical science we are able to provide solutions that make s lives Our projects have been very successful with Ektron s Checking Spelling e lf you want to exit the spell checker and ignore all changes you have made since beginning it click Cancel circled above at any time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 505 Working with Images eWebEdit400 makes it easy to insert images in to your content First you import the image into library or as a Ektron CMS400 NET asset Then add it to the content Next you can edit its properties such as border width and color spacing width and height etc For more information see e Inserting an Image on page 506 e Inserting an Image Thumbnail on page 508 e Editing an Image s Properties on page 508 e Deleting an Image from Content on page 516 Inserting an Image Prerequisite Before you can insert an image into eWebEdit400 it must be either uploaded to the Library or imported as an asset e Copying Files to the Library on page 141 explains how to upload an image to the Library e Importing Managed Files on page 255 explains how to import an asset Procedure for Inserting an Image To insert an image into the editor follow these steps 1 Place the cursor where you want th
622. ve Title Form title as entered by the author Assigned to As set up by the user who created or edited the form Priority Normal Assigned by User who created or last edited form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 196 Working with HTML Forms Value Form Submission Task Category Category Not specified Start date Not specified Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission An email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form e name e value submitted by user Viewing Form Reports If a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report The View Contents of Folder screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 197 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click the form you want to view If you do not see your form in the folder make sure the Content Type drop down box Is set to All Types or Forms 3 Click the View Reports button iil The View Forms Report screen appears 5
623. vencdsnscdensseeccavecsiaesuans 799 Checked IN COntent 2cccceeceeeeceeceeceececeeceseeeeecaseeseeeeseuseesesenees 800 Checked Out Content 0 ccccecceceececceceecesceseecesceseeseeeeeeeeeseeees 802 Submitted CONtent ccceeceececeeceececeeceeceececeeceseuseeeeseuseeeeeeuees 803 Marked for Deletion COntent cccccccecceceeceececceceeeeseeeeseeeeees 804 Pending Start Date Content cccsscseesceeseeeseesseeeeeenneesees 805 Staged Conmeen sessa iian a 806 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 ix Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Using Ektron CMS400 NET to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS400 NET site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS400 NET works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS400 NET through the following subtopics e What is a Content Block on page 1 e Control Menu Options on page 3 e Types of Content on page 7 e Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 8 e Editing Content on page 9 e The Lifecycle of Content on page 10 What is a Content Block A Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more b
624. vey is usually multiple questions and appears on your site for a longer time than a poll NOTE For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 65 With polls and surveys you can show ongoing results to site visitors after they submit their answers The following sections provide information about creating a poll or survey beyond the normal form information e Working With Polls on page 215 e Creating a Survey on page 220 e Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 163 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 214 Working with HTML Forms e Viewing a Form s Information on page 204 e Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 205 For information on how to display a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control Working With Polls Below is an example of a poll Note that when a site visitor hovers over the poll the question also appears as ToolTip text I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Friend where did you hear about Ektron Medical ree fons are required Newsgroup O Other submit Form This subsection contains the following e Creating a New Poll in the Workarea on page 215 e Replacing a Poll from the Web Site on page 217 e Editing
625. vidual managed files within a mapped network drive folder follow this procedure 1 2 Open the site root web config file Go to this line lt remove verb GET HEAD POST path gt 3 4 Remove the comment characters in red above In the following lines insert beginning and ending comment characters as shown in red below lt add verb GET POST path doc type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path docx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path xls type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path xlsx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 242 Using the Document Management System lt add verb GET POST path ppt type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path pptx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path vsd type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path vsdx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt Enable the line below and remove all office specific mappings above for Server 2003 with private assets and enable remove verb command gt 5 Go to this line lt add verb GET HEAD POST
626. w Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 461 e Editing a Menu on page 462 e Editing a Menu Item on page 464 e Viewing a Menu on page 467 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 447 Working with Menus e Reordering Menu Items on page 470 e Deleting a Menu on page 471 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 472 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 473 Adding a New Menu You can create a menu by navigating to a folder or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt Menus you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder it is assigned to the selected folder Adding a Menu via Content Folder Navigate to a content folder 2 The current language appears as a flag next to the screen title To create the menu in this language proceed to the next step To change the language of the new menu click View gt Language and select the new language 3 Click New gt Menu The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu mE Title English U 5 4 Advance Settings 5 At minimum a menu requires a title If you want to add more information click Advance Settings When you do the lower section of the screen appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 448 Working with Menus
627. w summary list of all versions The Content History Report a Window on page 109 Remove XSLT Remove XSLT applied to XML Removing Applied XSLT on XML Content Only content page 112 Actions are explained below Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button mp on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so Open the content folder that contains the content Click the content item hata Se a 2 3 Click the History toolbar button E 4 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore oO Click the Restore button Ep The content history window closes and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status If desired check out the content to make additional changes Select the workflow to perform on the content 9 When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 111 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of content you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare an historical version follow these steps NOTE You can only View Differences if there are two or more published versions of the content Open the
628. want to decentralize the update process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS400 NET manages the lifecycle of content from creation through approval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate content s status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 8 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editing Content Finding Content Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest e Navigate through your Web site to the content you want to edit e Find the content through the Workarea which resembles Windows Explorer and helps you find content by navigating through a folder tree See A so gt The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 15 e Use the Search button A which appears on many screens When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find content click the Edit button 4 or menu option to open it in an editor Below is an example of content within th
629. want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete Content button A confirmation message appears Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 273 Click the event in the series that you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete This and Associated Recurring Events button Fi A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 285 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action within Ektron CMS400 NET Examples of a tasks include e updating content e publishing content e updating an image e reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific piece of content If it is you Can access content then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content For more information see Viewing a Task on page 300 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics e Creating a Task via the Task Folder on pa
630. was created The View Form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see View Form Toolbar on page 212 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties To see and update additional form information that does not appear on the View Form screen view its properties To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the form s View Form screen as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 204 Click the Form Properties button _ ee haa The Form Properties screen displays a subset of form information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 205 Working with HTML Forms e Title and Description e Database or Mail if form data is emailed whenever a site visitor submits it enter mail property information below See Mail Properties on page 206 e Autofill form values checked by default this allows the form s fields to fill automatically when a logged in site visitor has previously completed the form e Limit Submission when checked you can enter the number of times a user can submit a form in the Number of Submissions text field e Assign task to see Assigning a Task to a Form on page 195 e Form block s ID number e Mail Properties Mail Properties Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 207 Text that appears in the email s From field See
631. when editing a blog s properties Blog Properties NOTE To be able to edit blog properties you must have permission to Edit Folders on the blog s Advanced Permissions screen By clicking the blog properties button f you can change the following groups of information about a blog e Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 318 e Blog Folder Properties on page 319 e Metadata on page 321 e Blog Subjects on page 322 e Web Alerts on page 326 e The Blog Roll on page 327 e Permissions and Approvals on page 334 e Purge History on page 336 Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog When you edit a blog s properties and settings more properties and settings are available than when you created it This is done to save time when adding multiple blogs to a site The table below shows which properties or settings are available when adding and editing a blog Blog Properties and Settings Availability Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 318 Blogs Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Blog Title Tagline of Visible Posts Comment Control Update Service Style sheet filename for this folder Smart Forms Metadata Subjects Web Alerts Blog Roll Permissions Approval Chain Template filename for this folder
632. x is checked min Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www example com To link to content on your Web site click the library button fi This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Launch link in a Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the new browser Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 5 276 Working with Calendars i Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 277
633. you select the content you have the following options on page 43 38 Viewing a Folder Option Allows you to For more information see Force Check Only appears if user is a member of the In Administrator group and content is checked out Allows an admin to check in content even though he is not the one who checked it out Publish Accept changes to content and publish it to the site Allows either admin user or non admin user with edit permission for the content s folder to email the user who checked out content The email asks the check out user to check it in Save Office document or asset to your computer Saving an Office Document on page 249 Submit Submit current version of content for publishing Asset Workflow on page 258 When you do this the next person in the Approval Chain is notified that your content is ready for review View View item s Ektron CMS400 NET information After you select the content such as Summary Metadata Schedule and you have the following options Taxonomy After viewing you can also edit that on page 43 information if you have permission Next you proceed to the View Content screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view its history View in View Office document within Office application Microsoft Cannot change Office Request Check In View View Office document s Ektron CMS400 NET

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents